2024 Ford Mustang Owners Manual Version 1 Om EN-US

2024 FORD MUSTANG Owner's manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of release. In the interest of continuous
development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without
notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors
and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2023
All rights reserved.

Part Number: -202212-20230418145831
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which
are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Contacting Us Child Safety

Contacting Us ..................................................15 Child Safety Precautions ...........................40
Child Restraint Anchor Points ...................41
Introduction Child Restraints ..............................................42
About This Publication .................................17 Installing Child Restraints ..........................43
Using This Publication .................................18 Booster Seats .................................................48
Symbols Glossary Seatbelts

Symbols Used on Your Vehicle .................19 Seatbelt Precautions ....................................51
Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts
Data Privacy ...........................................................................52
Data Privacy .....................................................22 Sensitive Locking Mode ..............................53
Service Data ....................................................23 Automatic Locking Mode ...........................54
Event Data ........................................................23 Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy ....................................................55
Settings Data ..................................................24
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................55
Connected Vehicle Data .............................24
Checking the Seatbelts ...............................57
Mobile Device Data .......................................25
Seatbelt Extensions ......................................57
Emergency Call System Data - Vehicles
With: Emergency Assistance ................25
Personal Safety System™
Environment What Is the Personal Safety System
..........................................................................59
Protecting the Environment ......................26
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work ...............................................................59
Visual Search Personal Safety System Components
Steering Wheel ...............................................27 ..........................................................................59
Instrument Panel ..........................................28
Vehicle Interior ...............................................29 Airbags
Front Exterior - Base, Convertible ...........30 How Do the Front Airbags Work .............60
Front Exterior - Base, Coupe ......................31 How Do the Side Airbags Work ...............60
Front Exterior - Dark Horse ........................32 How Do the Knee Airbags Work ...............61
Front Exterior - GT, Convertible ................33 How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work -
Front Exterior - GT, Coupe .........................34 Coupe ............................................................62
Rear Exterior - Base, Convertible .............35 Airbag Precautions .......................................63
Rear Exterior - Base, Coupe ......................36 Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats ........................................63
Rear Exterior - Dark Horse ..........................37
Children and Airbags ...................................64
Rear Exterior - GT, Convertible .................38
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........64
Rear Exterior - GT, Coupe ...........................39
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......67
Disposing of Airbags ....................................68
2024 Mustang (CZJ) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202212, DOM
Table of Contents
911 Assist Easy Entry and Exit

What Is 911 Assist .........................................69 How Does Easy Entry and Exit Work
How Does 911 Assist Work .........................69 ..........................................................................84
Emergency Call Requirements ................69 Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and
Off ..................................................................84
Emergency Call Limitations ......................70
Security
Keys and Remote Controls
Passive Anti-Theft System .......................85
Remote Control Limitations .......................71
Anti-Theft Alarm System ..........................85
Using the Remote Control ...........................71
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings ........86
Removing the Key Blade .............................72
Security – Troubleshooting .......................87
Sounding the Panic Alarm .........................72
Locating Your Vehicle ...................................72
Steering Wheel
Changing the Remote Control Battery
...........................................................................72 Using the Controls on the Steering Wheel
..........................................................................89
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
...........................................................................74 Adjusting the Steering Wheel ..................89
Programming the Remote Control .........74 Horn ...................................................................90
Keys and Remote Controls Audible Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
Warnings .......................................................75 On and Off ..................................................90
Remote Rev .....................................................76
Keys and Remote Controls – Wipers and Washers
Troubleshooting .........................................77 Wipers ................................................................91
Autowipers .......................................................91
Doors and Locks Checking the Wiper Blades .......................92
Operating the Doors From Outside Your Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ..........92
Vehicle ...........................................................78 Washers ............................................................93
Operating the Doors From Inside Your Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting
Vehicle ...........................................................78 ..........................................................................94
Autounlock .......................................................79
Autolock ............................................................79 Exterior Lighting
Mislock ...............................................................79 Exterior Lighting Control ............................95
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings ........79 Headlamps ......................................................95
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting Headlamps – Troubleshooting ...............96
..........................................................................80
Autolamps .......................................................96
Exterior Lamps ...............................................97
Keyless Entry
Automatic High Beam Control ................98
Keyless Entry Limitations ...........................82
Automatic High Beam Control –
Using Keyless Entry ......................................82 Troubleshooting ......................................100
Table of Contents
Interior Lighting Instrument Cluster Display

Switching All of the Interior Lamps On Using the Instrument Cluster Display
and Off .........................................................101 Controls ........................................................114
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On Customizing the Instrument Cluster
and Off .........................................................101 Display ..........................................................114
Interior Lamp Function ...............................101
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting Personalized Settings
Brightness ...................................................101 Changing the Language .............................115
Ambient Lighting ..........................................101 Changing the Measurement Unit ...........115
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting ......102 Changing the Temperature Unit .............115
Changing the Tire Pressure Unit .............115
Windows
Opening and Closing the Windows - Trip Computer
Convertible ................................................103
Accessing the Trip Computer ...................116
Opening and Closing the Windows -
Coupe ..........................................................104 Resetting the Trip Computer ....................116
Global Opening ............................................104 Configuring the Trip Computer ................116
Window Bounce-Back ..............................105
Remote Start
Interior Mirror What Is Remote Start ..................................117
Interior Mirror Precautions .......................106 Remote Start Precautions .........................117
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror .................106 Remote Start Limitations ..........................117
Enabling Remote Start ...............................117
Exterior Mirrors Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle ...........................................................117
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors ..................107
Extending the Remote Start Duration
Folding the Exterior Mirrors ......................107 ..........................................................................118
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror .................107 Remote Start Settings ................................118
Instrument Cluster Climate Control - Vehicles

Instrument Cluster Overview .................108 With: Dual Automatic
Tachometer ...................................................108 Temperature Control
Speedometer ...............................................108 (DATC)
Fuel Gauge .....................................................109 Identifying the Climate Control Unit ......119
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Switching Climate Control On and Off
........................................................................109 ..........................................................................119
What Are the Instrument Cluster Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Warning Lamps .......................................109 ..........................................................................119
Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps .....109 Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
What Are the Instrument Cluster ..........................................................................119
Indicators ......................................................111 Switching Defrost On and Off .................119
Instrument Cluster Indicators ...................111
Table of Contents
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off Locating the Cabin Air Filter ....................128
..........................................................................119 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ..................128
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................120
Front Seats
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ........................................................120 Front Seat Precautions .............................129
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........120 Sitting in the Correct Position .................129
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off Manual Seats ................................................130
.........................................................................120 Power Seats ...................................................132
Setting the Temperature ..........................120 Heated Seats .................................................135
Directing the Flow of Air .............................121 Ventilated Seats ...........................................135
Auto Mode .......................................................121
Climate Control Hints .................................122 Rear Seats - Coupe
Manual Seats .................................................137
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Electronic Automatic Rear Occupant Alert System
Temperature Control
(EATC) What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....124 .........................................................................138
Switching Climate Control On and Off How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
.........................................................................124 System Work .............................................138
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.........................................................................124 .........................................................................138
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.........................................................................124 .........................................................................138
Switching Defrost On and Off ................124 Rear Occupant Alert System Settings
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off .........................................................................138
.........................................................................124 Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off .........................................................................139
.........................................................................125 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Warnings .....................................................139
and Off .........................................................125
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........125 Memory Function
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off How Does the Memory Function Work
.........................................................................125 ........................................................................140
Setting the Temperature ...........................125 Memory Function Precautions ...............140
Directing the Flow of Air ............................125 Locating the Memory Function Buttons
Auto Mode ......................................................126 ........................................................................140
Climate Control Hints ................................126 Saving a Preset Position ...........................140
Recalling a Preset Position ......................140
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................128
Garage Door Opener
Garage Door Opener Introduction ........142
Table of Contents
Garage Door Opener Precautions and Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Frequencies ...............................................142 Position .......................................................158
Programming the Garage Door Opener Starting and Stopping the Engine –
.........................................................................143 Troubleshooting .......................................159
Garage Door Opener Additional
Assistance ..................................................145 Auto-Start-Stop
What Is Auto-Start-Stop ...........................161
USB Ports Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Manual
Locating the USB Ports .............................146 Transmission ..............................................161
Playing Media Using the USB Port .......146 Auto-Start-Stop Precautions -
Charging a Device .......................................146 Automatic Transmission .......................161
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off
..........................................................................161
Power Outlet
Stopping the Engine - Manual
What Is the Power Outlet .........................148 Transmission ..............................................161
Power Outlet Precautions ........................148 Stopping the Engine - Automatic
Locating the Power Outlets ....................148 Transmission .............................................162
Restarting the Engine - Manual
Wireless Accessory Charger Transmission .............................................162
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger Restarting the Engine - Automatic
.........................................................................149 Transmission .............................................163
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions Auto-Start-Stop Indicators .....................163
.........................................................................149 Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger .........................................................................163
.........................................................................149
Charging a Wireless Device .....................149 Fuel and Refueling
Fuel and Refueling Precautions ............166
Storage Fuel Quality ...................................................166
Cup Holders ....................................................151 Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel ................167
Glove Compartment ....................................151 Running Out of Fuel ....................................167
Center Console ..............................................151 Refueling ........................................................169
Glasses Holder ..............................................152 Fuel Tank Capacity ......................................170
Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting
Starting and Stopping the .........................................................................170
Engine
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Catalytic Converter
Precautions ................................................153 What Is the Catalytic Converter ..............172
Push Button Ignition Switch ....................153 Catalytic Converter Precautions .............172
Starting the Engine .....................................154 Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting
Engine Block Heater ...................................155 ..........................................................................172
Stopping the Engine ...................................156
Automatic Engine Stop .............................158
Table of Contents
Manual Transmission Electric Parking Brake

Manual Transmission Precautions ........173 What Is the Electric Parking Brake ........185
Shifting Into Reverse ...................................173 Applying the Electric Parking Brake -
Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission, Vehicles
Level ..............................................................173 Without: EcoBoost™ Performance
Package/GT Performance Package
Checking the Clutch Fluid Level .............174 .........................................................................185
Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Applying the Electric Parking Brake -
Specification ..............................................174 Manual Transmission, Vehicles With:
Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification EcoBoost™ Performance Package/GT
.........................................................................174 Performance Package ...........................185
Applying the Electric Parking Brake -
Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission, Vehicles
Without: EcoBoost™ Performance
Automatic Transmission Precautions Package/GT Performance Package
.........................................................................175 ........................................................................186
Automatic Transmission Positions .......175 Applying the Electric Parking Brake -
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear - Vehicles Automatic Transmission, Vehicles
Without: Paddle Shifters ......................176 With: EcoBoost™ Performance
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear - Vehicles Package/GT Performance Package
With: Paddle Shifters .............................176 ........................................................................186
Automatic Transmission Position Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Indicators - Vehicles Without: Paddle Emergency - Vehicles Without:
Shifters ........................................................176 EcoBoost™ Performance Package/GT
Performance Package ...........................187
Automatic Transmission Position
Indicators - Vehicles With: Paddle Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Shifters .........................................................177 Emergency - Vehicles With:
EcoBoost™ Performance Package/GT
Automatic Transmission Audible Performance Package ...........................187
Warnings ......................................................177
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Manually Shifting Gears ............................177 Brake - Vehicles Without: EcoBoost™
Brake Shift Interlock ...................................178 Performance Package/GT
Rear Axle Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake - Vehicles With: EcoBoost™
Limited Slip Differential ............................180 Performance Package/GT
Brakes Automatically Releasing the Electric
Brake Precautions ........................................181 Parking Brake ............................................188
Anti-Lock Braking System .........................181 Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning
........................................................................188
Brake Over Accelerator ...............................181
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir ........182 the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Checking the Brake Fluid ..........................182 Charge .........................................................188
Brake Fluid Specification ..........................182 Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting
........................................................................188
Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................183
Table of Contents
Cross Traffic Braking Stability Control – Troubleshooting ......199

What Is Cross Traffic Braking ...................191
How Does Cross Traffic Braking Work Steering
..........................................................................191 Electric Power Steering ...........................200
Cross Traffic Braking Precautions ..........191 Steering – Troubleshooting ...................200
Switching Cross Traffic Braking On and
Off .................................................................192 Parking Aids
Overriding Cross Traffic Braking .............192 Parking Aid Precautions ...........................202
Cross Traffic Braking Indicators .............192 Switching Parking Aid On and Off .......202
Cross Traffic Braking – Troubleshooting Rear Parking Aid ..........................................203
.........................................................................192
Parking Aid Indicators ...............................204
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting ...........204
Hill Start Assist
What Is Hill Start Assist ............................194
Rear View Camera
How Does Hill Start Assist Work ...........194
What Is the Rear View Camera .............205
Hill Start Assist Precautions ...................194
Rear View Camera Precautions ............205
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off -
Manual Transmission ............................194 Locating the Rear View Camera ...........205
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off - Rear View Camera Guide Lines .............205
Automatic Transmission ......................194 Rear View Camera Settings ...................206
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting ......194
Cruise Control
Auto Hold What Is Cruise Control .............................208
How Does Auto Hold Work ......................195 Switching Cruise Control On and Off
Switching Auto Hold On and Off ...........195 .......................................................................208
Using Auto Hold ...........................................195 Setting the Cruise Control Speed ........208
Auto Hold Indicators ..................................195 Canceling the Set Speed ........................209
Resuming the Set Speed ........................209
Traction Control Cruise Control Indicators .........................209
What Is Traction Control ...........................197
How Does Traction Control Work ..........197 Adaptive Cruise Control
Switching Traction Control On and Off How Does Adaptive Cruise Control Work
.........................................................................197 - Manual Transmission ..........................210
Traction Control Indicator .........................197 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work - Automatic
Traction Control – Troubleshooting ......197 Transmission .............................................210
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
Stability Control .........................................................................210
How Does Stability Control Work .........198 Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
Switching Stability Control On and Off ..........................................................................211
........................................................................199 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Stability Control Indicator ........................199 and Off - Manual Transmission ..........212
Table of Contents
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Setting the Speed Limit ...........................229

and Off - Automatic Transmission Changing the Set Speed Limit ...............229
.........................................................................213
Adjusting the Speed Limit Tolerance
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic ........................................................................230
Cancellation ...............................................213
Canceling the Set Speed Limit .............230
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed - Manual Transmission ............213 Resuming the Set Speed Limit .............230
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Intentionally Exceeding the Set Speed
Speed - Automatic Transmission ......214 Limit ............................................................230
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Intelligent Speed Limiter Indicators .....230
.........................................................................215 Intelligent Speed Limiter Audible
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................216 Warnings ....................................................230
Resuming the Set Speed - Manual Switching From Intelligent Speed Limiter
Transmission .............................................216 to Speed Limiter .....................................230
Resuming the Set Speed - Automatic Intelligent Speed Limiter –
Transmission .............................................216 Troubleshooting .......................................231
Overriding the Set Speed ..........................217
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators .......218 Lane Keeping System
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control What Is the Lane Keeping System .......232
to Cruise Control ......................................218 How Does the Lane Keeping System
Lane Centering .............................................218 Work .............................................................232
Predictive Speed Assist .............................221 Lane Keeping System Precautions ......232
Predictive Speed Assist – Lane Keeping System Limitations ........232
Troubleshooting ......................................223 Switching the Lane Keeping System On
Adaptive Cruise Control – and Off ........................................................233
Troubleshooting ......................................223 Switching the Lane Keeping System
Mode ............................................................233
Drive Mode Control Lane Keeping System Settings ..............233
What Is Drive Mode Control ....................226 Alert Mode .....................................................233
How Does Drive Mode Control Work Aid Mode ........................................................234
........................................................................226 Alert and Aid Mode ....................................234
Selecting a Drive Mode .............................226 Lane Keeping System Indicators ..........235
Drive Modes ...................................................227 Blind Spot Assist .........................................235
Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting
Intelligent Speed Limiter .........................................................................237
What Is the Intelligent Speed Limiter
........................................................................229 Blind Spot Information
How Does the Intelligent Speed Limiter System
Work ............................................................229 What Is Blind Spot Information System
Intelligent Speed Limiter Precautions ........................................................................239
........................................................................229 How Does Blind Spot Information
Switching the Intelligent Speed Limiter System Work ............................................239
On and Off ................................................229
Table of Contents
Blind Spot Information System Pre-Collision Assist Precautions ..........249

Precautions ...............................................239 Pre-Collision Assist Limitations ............250
Blind Spot Information System Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Limitations ................................................239 Off .................................................................251
Blind Spot Information System Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors
Requirements ..........................................239 .........................................................................251
Switching Blind Spot Information Distance Indication ....................................252
System On and Off ................................239
Distance Alert ...............................................253
Locating the Blind Spot Information
System Sensors ......................................240 Automatic Emergency Braking ..............253
Blind Spot Information System Evasive Steering Assist .............................254
Indicators ..................................................240 Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting
Blind Spot Information System – ........................................................................255
Troubleshooting .......................................241
Speed Sign Recognition
Exit Warning What Is Speed Sign Recognition ...........257
What is Exit Warning .................................242 How Does Speed Sign Recognition Work
How Does Exit Warning Work ................242 ........................................................................257
Exit Warning Precautions ........................242 Speed Sign Recognition Precautions
........................................................................257
Exit Warning Limitations ..........................242
Speed Sign Recognition Limitations
Exit Warning Indicators .............................243 ........................................................................257
Switching Exit Warning On and Off ......244 Speed Sign Recognition Indicators ......258
Locating the Exit Warning Sensors ......244 Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Exit Warning - Troubleshooting ............244 Speed Warning ........................................258
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Cross Traffic Alert Speed Tolerance .....................................258
What Is Cross Traffic Alert ......................246 Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting ......................................258
How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work ......246
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions .............246
Driver Alert
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations ...............246
What Is Driver Alert ...................................260
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off
........................................................................246 How Does Driver Alert Work ...................260
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors Driver Alert Precautions ...........................260
........................................................................247 Driver Alert Limitations ............................260
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators ..................247 Switching Driver Alert On and Off .......260
Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting Driver Alert Indicators ................................261
........................................................................248 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting ...............261
Pre-Collision Assist Load Carrying

What Is Pre-Collision Assist ...................249 Load Carrying Precautions ......................262
How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work Locating the Safety Compliance
........................................................................249 Certification Labels ...............................263
Table of Contents
What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating Floor Mats .......................................................277

........................................................................263
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Crash and Breakdown
........................................................................263 Information
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating ..........................................................263 Roadside Assistance .................................278
Calculating Payload ..................................264 Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Off .................................................................279
Calculating the Load Limit ......................264
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................279
Post-Crash Alert System ..........................281
Luggage Compartment
Post-Collision Braking ...............................281
Luggage Compartment Precautions
........................................................................267 Automatic Crash Shutoff .........................282
Opening the Rear Luggage Recovery Towing .........................................282
Compartment ..........................................267 Transporting the Vehicle ..........................283
Closing the Rear Luggage Compartment Fail-Safe Cooling ........................................283
........................................................................269
Using the Rear Luggage Compartment Towing Your Vehicle
Emergency Release ...............................269
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions .........286
Luggage Compartment –
Troubleshooting .....................................269 Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle
........................................................................286
Emergency Towing ....................................286
Towing a Trailer
Towing a Trailer Precautions - Base/GT Fuses
..........................................................................271
Towing a Trailer Precautions - Dark Fuse Precautions ........................................287
Horse .............................................................271 Under Hood Fuse Box ...............................287
Loading Your Trailer .....................................271 Body Control Module Fuse Box .............292
Towing Weights and Dimensions ..........272 High Current Fuse Box ..............................294
Identifying Fuse Types ..............................295
Convertible Top Fuses – Troubleshooting .........................295
Opening the Convertible Top ..................273
Closing the Convertible Top ....................274 Maintenance
Maintenance Precautions .......................296
Driving Hints Opening and Closing the Hood .............296
Cold Weather Precautions .......................275 Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™
Driving on Snow and Ice ...........................275 ........................................................................297
Breaking-In ....................................................275 Under Hood Overview - 5.0L .................298
Driving Economically .................................275 Engine Oil ......................................................299
Driving Through Shallow Water - Base/ Engine Air Filter ...........................................300
GT .................................................................276 Coolant ...........................................................302
Driving Through Shallow Water - Dark Changing the Fuel Filter ...........................305
Horse ...........................................................276
10
Table of Contents
Drive Belt Routing Overview - 2.3L Inflating the Tires ........................................339

EcoBoost™ ..............................................306 Inspecting the Tire for Wear ...................340
Drive Belt Routing Overview - 5.0L ......307 Inspecting the Tire for Damage ..............341
12V Battery ....................................................307 Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems ......345
12V Battery – Troubleshooting .............309 Tire Rotation .................................................345
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................310
Exterior Bulbs ................................................312 Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit
Interior Bulbs .................................................312 What Is the Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit
........................................................................347
Track Use Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit Precautions
Track Use ........................................................313 ........................................................................347
Track Use - Dark Horse ..............................315 Locating the Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit
........................................................................347
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit Components
Vehicle Care ........................................................................348
Cleaning Products .......................................318 Using the Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit
Cleaning the Exterior ..................................319 ........................................................................348
Cleaning the Interior ..................................320
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............322 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Waxing Your Vehicle ..................................323 System
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Body Styling Kits System ........................................................353
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Body Styling Kit Precautions ..................324 Overview ....................................................353
Storing Your Vehicle Precautions ...............................................354
Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage ......325 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Removing Your Vehicle From Storage Limitations ................................................354
........................................................................326 Viewing the Tire Pressures ......................355
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Wheel and Tire Information Troubleshooting ......................................355
Locating the Tire label ...............................327
Department of Transportation Uniform Changing a Road Wheel
Tire Quality Grades .................................327 Changing a Flat Tire ...................................357
Information on the Tire Sidewall ..........328 Wheel Nuts ....................................................361
Glossary of Tire Terminology ..................333
Tire Replacement Requirements .........334 Capacities and Specifications
Using Summer Tires ..................................336
Using Snow Chains ....................................336 Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™
........................................................................363
Tire Care Engine Specifications - 5.0L ..................364
Checking the Tire Pressures ...................339 Suspension Specifications .....................365
11
Table of Contents
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....367 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot

Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L ............................368 Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........386
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................369 Name or Password ................................386
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot – Troubleshooting
5.0L ..............................................................370 ........................................................................387
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .......372 Audio System
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L ................................373 Audio System Precautions .....................388
Fuel Tank Capacity - 2.3L EcoBoost™ Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
........................................................................374 .......................................................................388
Fuel Tank Capacity - 5.0L ........................375 Selecting the Audio Source ....................388
Air Conditioning System Capacity and Playing or Pausing the Audio Source
Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .......376 .......................................................................388
Air Conditioning System Capacity and Adjusting the Volume ...............................388
Specification - 5.0L ................................377 Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off
Washer Fluid Specification ......................377 .......................................................................389
Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Switching Repeat Mode On and Off
Specification ............................................378 .......................................................................389
Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification Setting a Memory Preset ........................389
........................................................................379 Muting the Audio ........................................389
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Adjusting the Sound Settings ................389
and Specification ....................................379 Setting the Clock and Date ....................389
Brake Fluid Specification ........................380 FM Radio .......................................................390
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Switching the Display On and Off .......390
Specification ............................................380
Digital Radio .................................................390
Satellite Radio .............................................392
Vehicle Identification
Audio System – Troubleshooting ........394
Vehicle Identification Number ...............382
Center Display Overview
Connected Vehicle
Center Display Precautions ....................398
What Is a Connected Vehicle .................383
Center Display Limitations .....................398
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......383
Status Bar .....................................................398
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............383
Home Screen ...............................................399
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................383 Favorite ..........................................................399
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Information On Demand Screen ..........399
Network .....................................................383 Center Display Settings ...........................399
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting Rebooting the Center Display ...............400
........................................................................384
My Mustang
My Mustang Overview ...............................401
12
Table of Contents
Track Apps ....................................................402 Switching Android Auto On and Off .....422

Auxiliary Gauges .........................................408
Custom Drive Mode ..................................408 Personal Profiles
Cluster Theme ............................................409 How Do Personal Profiles Work ............423
My Color ........................................................409 Enabling or Disabling Personal Profiles
Exhaust Mode .............................................409 ........................................................................423
Creating a Personal Profile .....................424
Voice Interaction Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Remote Control ...................................424
Ford Assistant ................................................411
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Device ......................................................424
Alexa Built-In
What is Alexa Built-In ................................413 Navigation
Alexa Built-In Requirements ...................413 Connected Navigation ..............................425
Signing In to Your Account .......................413 Accessing Navigation ................................425
Using Alexa Built-In ....................................413 Navigation Map Updates .........................425
Alexa Built-In Settings ...............................413 Adjusting the Map ......................................425
Live Traffic .....................................................425
Phone Setting a Destination ................................425
Phone Precautions .....................................415 Waypoints .....................................................426
Connecting Your Phone ............................415 Route Guidance ..........................................426
Phone Menu ..................................................415
Making and Receiving a Phone Call ......417 Vehicle Software Updates
Sending and Receiving a Text Message Vehicle Software Updates .......................427
.........................................................................418
Software Update Settings .......................427
Switching Text Message Notification On
and Off ........................................................419 Software Update Indicators ...................428
Bluetooth® Vehicle System Reset

Connecting a Bluetooth® Device .........420 Performing a System Reset ....................429
Playing Media Using Bluetooth® .........420
Accessories
Apps Accessories ...................................................430
App Precautions ..........................................421
App Requirements ......................................421 Ford Protect
Accessing Apps ............................................421 What Is Ford Protect ..................................431
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device ...........421
Enabling Apps on an Android Device Scheduled Maintenance
.........................................................................421 General Maintenance Information .......433
Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........436
........................................................................422
13
Table of Contents
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled

Maintenance ............................................439
Customer Information
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program .....................................................443
The Mediation and Arbitration Program
........................................................................443
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Manual .......................................................444
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States .........................................................444
Reporting Safety Defects in Canada
........................................................................445
Third Party Software Copyright
Acknowledgment ..................................446
Radio Frequency Certification Labels
.......................................................................446
Perchlorate ...................................................494
Replacement Parts Recommendation
.......................................................................494
Mobile Communications Equipment
.......................................................................495
Federal Highway Administration
Regulation .................................................495
End User License Agreement ................496
Emission Law ................................................521
Export Unique Options .............................522
Warranty Information ................................522
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............524
14
Contacting Us
If you require assistance or clarification on New Zealand

policies or procedures, please contact the
customer relationship center. Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
United States Private Bag 76912
Manukau City 2241
Ford Motor Company Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ)
Customer Relationship Center E-mail: [email protected]
PO Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126 China - Imported Vehicle
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
TDD for the hearing impaired: Customer Relationship Center
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone Telephone: 400-690-1886
service provider) Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/
www.ford.com/help/contact/
China - Chang’An Ford
Ford Credit - US Only Customer Relationship Center
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing Telephone: 800-810-8168
and lease plans to help you acquire your Mobile: 400-887-7766
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business. Asia Pacific Direct Markets
(APDM)
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and E-mail: [email protected]
access to an account manager, visit
www.ford.com/finance. Caribbean, Central America and
Israel
Canada
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Centre Ford Export Operations
Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Attention: Owner Relations
P.O. Box 2000 1555 Fairlane Drive
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 Fairlane Business Park #3
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Allen Park, MI 48101
TDD for the hearing impaired: Fax: (313) 390-0804
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone Telephone: (313) 594-4857
service provider) E-mail: [email protected]
www.ford.ca
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico
Australia
Ford Motor Company
Ford Motor Company of Australia Pty Ltd. Ford Export Operations
Customer Relationship Centre Attention: Owner Relations
Private Mail Bag 5 1555 Fairlane Drive
Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061 Fairlane Business Park #3
Telephone: (13 FORD) 13 3673 Allen Park, MI 48101
E-mail: [email protected] Telephone: (800) 841-3673
E-mail: [email protected]
15
Contacting Us
Argentina Middle East

Telephone: 0800-888-3673 Ford Middle East Customer Relationship
Center
Brazil P.O. Box 21740
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Website: www.ford.com.br Telephone: 80004441066
Telephone: 0800-703-3673 Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi
E-mail: [email protected] Arabia: 8008443673
North Africa Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
Arabia: 800850078
E-mail: [email protected] Kuwait: 22280384
Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965
South Africa 1 898900
Fax: +971 4 3327266
Telephone: 0860011022 E-mail: [email protected]
Email: [email protected] www.me.ford.com
Sub-Saharan Africa South Korea
E-mail: [email protected] Customer Relationship Center
Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003
Puerto Rico E-mail: [email protected]
Ford International Business Development, Emergency Dispatch Service call:
Inc. 080-300-3673
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station Philippines
San Juan, PR 00922-1957 Telephone: 02-88669408
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) Email: [email protected]
Fax: (313) 390-0804
E-mail: [email protected] Taiwan
www.ford.com.pr
Telephone: 0800-032100
705 Zhonghua Rd., Sec. 1
Zhongli District, Taoyuan, Taiwan, 32068
Thailand
Telephone: 1383
Vietnam
Telephone: 1800588888
16
Introduction
ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION Our digital resources include a

comprehensive digital Owner’s Manual
dynamically created according to the
features on your vehicle by using the
WARNING: Driving while distracted vehicle identification number. See
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Locating the Vehicle Identification
and injury. We strongly recommend that Number (page 382). The digital Owner’s
you use extreme caution when using any Manual includes visual and full text search
device that may take your focus off the functions so that you can quickly locate
road. Your primary responsibility is the the information you are looking for. It also
safe operation of your vehicle. We includes links to a number of how-to
recommend against the use of any videos created to help you understand
hand-held device while driving and some of the advanced technologies on
encourage the use of voice-operated your vehicle.
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws Features and Options
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving. This publication describes product features
and options available throughout the range
WARNING: You risk death, fire, or of available models, sometimes even
serious injury to yourself and others if you before they are generally available. It could
do not follow the instruction highlighted describe options that are not available on
by the warning symbol. the vehicle you have purchased.
Thank you for choosing Ford. We Illustrations

recommend that you take some time to Some of the illustrations in this publication
get to know your vehicle in order to benefit could show features as used in different
from greater safety and pleasure from models, so they could appear different to
driving it. Use this publication to familiarize you on your vehicle.
yourself with the basics and then read the
digital version, that is available in your Location of Components
vehicle. You can also view the
comprehensive manual through the This manual may qualify the location of a
FordPass app and through the local Ford component as left-hand side or right-hand
website. side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
Note: To download the FordPass app, visit
your device's app store.
Note: To find the local Ford website, visit
https://corporate.ford.com/operations/
locations/global-links.html.
Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line
with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on all printed owner’s
information when selling this vehicle.
17
Introduction
E154903
A Right-hand side.
B Left-hand side.
USING THIS PUBLICATION

To quickly locate information about your
vehicle, use the word search within the
Owner's Manual application.
18
Symbols Glossary
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR Child safety door lock or unlock

VEHICLE
These are some of the symbols you may Child seat lower anchor
E139211
see on your vehicle.
Airbag Child seat tether anchor
E141128
E67017
Air conditioning system Cruise control

E162384 E332905
Air conditioning system lubricant Do not open when hot

E231157 type E139219
Anti-lock braking system Electric Parking brake

E67020
E139212
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine air filter

E139220
Battery
E67021 Engine coolant
Battery acid
E139227 Engine coolant temperature
E103308
Blower motor
Engine oil
E67022
Brake fluid - non petroleum

E139209 based Explosive gas
E139221
Brake system
E67024 Fan warning
E139228
Brake system
Fasten seatbelt
E270480
E71880
Cabin air filter
E139223 Flammable
E231160
Check fuel cap
Front fog lamps
19
Symbols Glossary
Fuel pump reset Malfunction Indicator Lamp

E67028
(MIL)
Fuse compartment Note operating instructions

E139214 E72343
Hazard flashers Panic alarm

E75790
Headlamp high beams Parking aid

E67019
E139213
Headlamps on Parking lamps
E71341
E270968
Heated rear window Passenger airbag activated

E270849
Hill descent control Passenger airbag deactivated

E163171 E270850
Horn control Power steering fluid

E270945
Interior luggage compartment Power windows front/rear

release E139216
Jack Power window lockout

E139231 E139225
Keep out of reach of children Requires registered technician

E231159
E161353
Lighting control Safety alert

E65963
Low fuel level See Owner's Manual

E72021
Low tire pressure warning See Service Manual

E139232 E231158
Maintain correct fluid level Side airbag

E139229
20
Symbols Glossary
Shield the eyes
E167012
Stability control
E138639
Stability control off
E130458
Trail control
E332910
E67018 Turn Signal
Windshield defrosting system

E73953
Windshield wiping system

E270969
Windshield wash and wipe

E270967
21
Data Privacy
• Events or errors in essential systems,

WARNING: Do not connect for example headlamps and brakes.
wireless plug-in devices to the data link • System responses to driving situations,
connector. Unauthorized third parties for example airbag deployment and
could gain access to vehicle data and stability control.
impair the performance of safety related • Environmental conditions, for example
systems. Only allow repair facilities that temperature.
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data Some of this data, when used in
link connector. combination with other information, for
example an accident report, damage to a
We respect your privacy and are vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
committed to protecting it. The be associated with a specific person.
information contained in this publication
Services That We Provide
was correct at the time of release, but as
technology rapidly changes, we If you use our services, we collect and use
recommend that you visit the local Ford data, for example account information,
website for the latest information. vehicle location and driving characteristics,
Your vehicle has electronic control units that could identify you. We transmit this
that have data recording functionality and data through a dedicated, protected
the ability to permanently or temporarily connection. We only collect and use data
store data. This data could include to enable your use of our services to which
information on the condition and status of you have subscribed, with your consent or
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance where permitted by law. For additional
requirements, events and malfunctions. information, see the terms and conditions
The types of data that can be recorded are of the services to which you have
described in this section. Some of the data subscribed.
recorded is stored in event logs or error For additional information about our
logs. privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
Note: Error logs are reset following a service website.
or repair.
Services That Third Parties
Note: We may provide information in Provide
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third We recommend that you review the terms
parties acting with lawful authority or and conditions and data privacy
through a legal process. Such information information for any services equipped with
could be used by them in legal proceedings. your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We
take no responsibility for services that third
Data recorded includes, for example: parties provide.
• Operating states of system
Where equipped, SiriusXM with 360L could
components, for example fuel level,
use the modem. To disable, turn off the
tire pressure and battery charge level.
SiriusXM with 360L or Vehicle Connectivity
• Vehicle and component status, for setting. See Enabling and Disabling the
example wheel speed, deceleration, Modem (page 383).
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
22
Data Privacy
SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

only, for more information, please review
Service data recorders in your vehicle are the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
capable of collecting and storing www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
diagnostic information about your vehicle. storage and use of service providers in
This potentially includes information about other jurisdictions who may be subject to
the performance or status of various legal requirements in Canada, the United
systems and modules in the vehicle, such States and other countries applicable to
as engine, throttle, steering or brake them, for example, lawful requirements to
systems. In order to properly diagnose and disclose personal information to
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company governmental authorities in those
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service countries.
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic EVENT DATA
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when This vehicle is equipped with an event data
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. recorder. The main purpose of an event
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford data recorder is to record, in certain crash
of Canada, in Canada) may, where or near crash-like situations, such as an
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic airbag deployment or hitting a road
information for vehicle improvement or obstacle; this data will assist in
with other information we may have about understanding how a vehicle’s systems
you, for example, your contact information, performed. The event data recorder is
to offer you products or services that may designed to record data related to vehicle
interest you. Data may be provided to our dynamics and safety systems for a short
service providers such as part suppliers period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data. The event data recorder in this vehicle is
We retain this data only as long as designed to record such data as:
necessary to perform these functions or to • How various systems in your vehicle
comply with law. We may provide were operating.
information where required in response to
• Whether or not the driver and
official requests to law enforcement or
passenger seatbelts were
other government authorities or third
buckled/fastened.
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used • How far (if at all) the driver was
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if depressing the accelerator and/or the
equipped), if you choose to use connected brake pedal.
apps and services, you consent that certain • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
diagnostic information may also be • Where the driver was positioning the
accessed electronically by Ford Motor steering wheel.
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic This data can help provide a better
information may be used to provide understanding of the circumstances in
services to you, personalizing your which crashes and injuries occur.
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
23
Data Privacy
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the Data recorded includes, for example:
event data recorder under normal driving • Music, videos or album art.
conditions and no personal data or • Contacts and corresponding address
information (for example name, gender, book entries.
age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, parties, such as law enforcement, • Navigation destinations.
could combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying data CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation. The modem has a SIM. The
To read data recorded by an event data modem was enabled when your
recorder, special equipment is required, vehicle was built and periodically
and access to the vehicle or the event data sends messages to stay connected to the
recorder is needed. In addition to the cell phone network, receive automatic
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such software updates and send vehicle-related
as law enforcement, that have such special information to us, for example diagnostic
equipment, can read the information if they information. These messages could
have access to the vehicle or the event include information that identifies your
data recorder. vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
SETTINGS DATA additional information, for example cell
phone network tower identification. For
Your vehicle has electronic control units additional information about our privacy
that have the ability to store data based policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
on your personalized settings. The data is refer to your local Ford website.
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB Note: The modem continues to send this
drive or digital music player. You can delete information unless you disable the modem
some of this data and also choose whether or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
to share it through the services to which data by changing the modem settings. See
you subscribe. Connected Vehicle (page 383).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
Comfort and Convenience Data interrupted for a number of reasons, for
Data recorded includes, for example: example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
• Seat and steering wheel position.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
• Climate control settings. modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
• Radio presets.
24
Data Privacy
MOBILE DEVICE DATA The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
If you connect a mobile device to your unless you delete them and are generally
vehicle, you can display data from your accessible only in your vehicle when you
device on the touchscreen for example, connect your cell phone or media device.
music and album art. You can share your If you no longer plan to use the system or
vehicle data with mobile apps on your your vehicle, we recommend you use the
device through the system. See App system reset function to erase the stored
Requirements (page 421). information. See Performing a System
Reset (page 429).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the System data cannot be accessed without
United States. The data is encrypted and special equipment and access to your
includes, for example, the vehicle vehicle's module.
identification number of your vehicle, the For additional information about our
SYNC module serial number, odometer, privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
enabled apps, usage statistics and website.
debugging information. We retain it only
as long as necessary to provide the service, Note: To find out if your vehicle has
to troubleshoot, for continuous connectivity technology, visit
improvement and to offer you products www.FordConnected.com.
and services that may be of interest to you
according to your preferences and where EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
allowed by law.
DATA - VEHICLES WITH:
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
EMERGENCY ASSISTANCE
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
When the emergency call system is active,
enables more mobile features and efficient
it may disclose to emergency services that
operation. The profile contains, for
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
example data from your phonebook, read
the deployment of an airbag or activation
and unread text messages and call history,
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
including history of calls when your cell
or updates to the emergency call system
phone was not connected to the system.
may also be capable of electronically or
If you connect a media device, the system verbally disclosing to emergency services
creates and retains a media device index operators your vehicle location or other
of supported media content. The system details about your vehicle or crash to assist
also records a short diagnostic log of emergency services operators to provide
approximately 10 minutes of all recent the most appropriate emergency services.
system activity. If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
25
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
Sustainability is a priority at Ford. We are
constantly looking for ways to reduce our
impact on the planet while providing
customers with great products and
delivering a strong business. You should
play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
26
Visual Search
STEERING WHEEL
B C D E F
A G
E375050
A See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 208). See Switching
Adaptive Cruise Control On and Off (page 213).
B See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 208). See Setting the Adaptive
Cruise Control Speed (page 214).
C See Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off (page 233). See
Switching Lane Centering On and Off (page 219).
D See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 226).
E See Using Ford Assistant (page 411).
F See Adjusting the Volume (page 388).
G See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 226).
27
Visual Search
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A B
G F E D C
E375051
A See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 108).

B See Status Bar (page 398).
C See Switching the Audio Unit On and Off (page 388).
D See Favorite (page 399).
E See My Mustang Overview (page 401).
F See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 154). See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 154).
G See Exterior Lighting Control (page 95).
28
Visual Search
VEHICLE INTERIOR
C D
A
E375055
A See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 129).

B See Applying the Electric Parking Brake (page 186). See Applying the
Electric Parking Brake (page 185).
C See Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear (page 176). See Shifting Into Reverse
(page 173).
D See Folding the Seat Backrest (page 137).
29
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - BASE, CONVERTIBLE
A B
D C
E375851
A See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 296).

B See Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Remote Control (page
78). See Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Key Blade (page 78).
See Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Central Locking (page
78).
C See Checking the Tire Pressures (page 339).
D See Exterior Lighting Control (page 95).
30
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - BASE, COUPE
A B
D C
E375058

78).
31
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - DARK HORSE
A B
D C
E382221

78).
32
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - GT, CONVERTIBLE
A B
D C
E375852

78).
33
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - GT, COUPE
A B
D C
E375853

78).
34
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - BASE, CONVERTIBLE
A B
D C
E375855
A See Opening the Rear Luggage Compartment from Outside Your Vehicle
(page 268).
B See Opening the Convertible Top (page 273).
C See Changing a Flat Tire (page 357).
D See Inspecting the Tire for Damage (page 341).
35
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - BASE, COUPE
C B
E375060
(page 268).
B See Changing a Flat Tire (page 357).
C See Inspecting the Tire for Damage (page 341).
36
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - DARK HORSE
C B
E382222
(page 268).
37
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - GT, CONVERTIBLE
A B
D C
E375854
(page 268).
B See Opening the Convertible Top (page 273).
C See Changing a Flat Tire (page 357).
D See Inspecting the Tire for Damage (page 341).
38
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - GT, COUPE
C B
E375856
(page 268).
39
Child Safety
CHILD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
WARNING: Always make sure your very quickly. Exposure of people or
child is secured properly in a device that animals to these high temperatures for
is appropriate for their height, age and even a short time can cause death or
weight. Child safety restraints must be serious heat related injuries, including
bought separately from your vehicle. brain damage. Small children are
Failure to follow these instructions and particularly at risk.
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child. WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
WARNING: All children are shaped an active airbag. Failure to follow this
differently. The National Highway Traffic instruction could result in personal injury
Safety Administration and other safety or death.
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on WARNING: Properly secure
probable child height, age and weight children 12 years old and under in a rear
thresholds, or on the minimum seating position whenever possible. If
requirements of the law. We recommend you are unable to properly secure all
that you check with a NHTSA Certified children in a rear seating position,
Child Passenger Safety Technician properly secure the largest child on the
(CPST) to make sure that you properly front seat. If you must use a forward
install the child restraint in your vehicle facing child restraint on the front seat,
and that you consult your pediatrician to move the seat as far back as possible.
make sure you have a child restraint Failure to follow these instructions could
appropriate for your child. To locate a result in personal injury or death.
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at WARNING: Always carefully follow
1-888-327-4236 or go to the instructions and warnings provided
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact by the manufacturer of any child
Transport Canada toll free at restraint to determine if the restraint
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca device is appropriate for your child's size,
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your height, weight, or age. Follow the child
area. Failure to properly restrain children restraint manufacturer's instructions and
in child restraints made especially for warnings provided for installation and
their height, age and weight, may result use in conjunction with the instructions
in an increased risk of serious injury or and warnings provided by your vehicle
death to your child. manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
40
Child Safety
• Keep the buckle release button

WARNING: Do not allow a pointing up and away from the child
passenger to hold a child on their lap restraint, with the tongue between the
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to child restraint and the release button,
follow this instruction could result in to prevent accidental unbuckling.
personal injury or death in the event of a • Put the seatbelt in the automatic
sudden stop or crash. locking mode.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,

books or towels to boost your child's
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR
height. Failure to follow this instruction POINTS
could result in personal injury or death.
WHAT ARE THE CHILD RESTRAINT
WARNING: Properly secure child ANCHOR POINTS
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles Anchor points are designed to allow you
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to to quickly and safely install a child
follow this instruction could result in restraint.
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT

section of the seatbelt or allow the child LOWER ANCHOR POINTS
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children

or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
When installing a child restraint with

seatbelts:
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child E316614
restraint.
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
41
Child Safety
LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT CHILD RESTRAINTS

TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINTS
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITION
INFORMATION
Install the child restraint tightly against the
vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint.
E316620
Rear Facing Child Restraints

Combined Weight of Child LATCH (Lower Anchors
Seatbelt Only
and Child Restraint Only)
Up to 65 lb (29 kg) X X
Over 65 lb (29 kg) X
Forward Facing Child Restraints

Combined Weight of LATCH (Lower Seatbelt and Top Seatbelt and LATCH
Child and Child Anchors and Top Tether Anchor (Lower Anchors and
Restraint Tether Anchor) Top Tether Anchor)
Up to 65 lb (29 kg) X X X
Over 65 lb (29 kg) X X
42
Child Safety
CHILD RESTRAINTS RECOMMENDATION
Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint Type
Use a child restraint (sometimes

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
called an infant carrier, convertible
age four or younger).
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly
fit in a child restraint (generally children who are
less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age Use a belt-positioning booster
four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) seat.
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly Use a vehicle seatbelt having the
fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally chil- lap belt snug and low across the
dren who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater hips, shoulder belt centered across
than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended the shoulder and chest, and seat
by child restraint manufacturer). backrest upright.
You are required by law to properly use

child restraints for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD
the United States, Canada and Mexico. RESTRAINTS
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster seats USING SEATBELTS
until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your
local and state or provincial laws for WARNING: Depending on where
specific requirements about the safety of you secure a child restraint, and
children in your vehicle. depending on the child restraint design,
When possible, properly restrain children you may block access to certain seatbelt
12 years of age and under in a rear seating buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
position of your vehicle. Accident statistics anchors, rendering those features
suggest that children are safer when potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
properly restrained in the rear seating injury, make sure occupants only use
positions than in a front seating position. seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a rear facing child restraint,
adjust the vehicle seats to avoid
interference between the child restraint Note: Although the child restraint
and the vehicle seat in front of the child illustrated is a forward-facing child restraint,
restraint. the steps are the same for installing a
rear-facing child restraint.
Perform the following steps when
installing a child restraint with seatbelts.
43
Child Safety
1. Position the child restraint in a seat

with a seatbelt.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

E142529 buckle for that seating position until
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and the latch engages. Make sure that you
then grasp it and the lap belt together. securely latch the tongue by pulling on
it.
E142530
E142875
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue 5. To put the retractor in the automatic
through the child restraint according locking mode, grasp the shoulder
to the child restraint manufacturer's portion of the belt and pull downward
instructions. Make sure you did not until you pull all of the seatbelt out.
twist the belt webbing. Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The seatbelt clicks as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
44
Child Safety
7. Pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to

make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
E142533
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. forward and back. There should be no
Force the seat down with extra weight, more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
for example, by pressing down or
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
kneeling on the child restraint while
Certified Child Passenger Safety
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
Technician to make certain the child
to force slack from the belt. This is
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
necessary to remove the remaining
check with Transport Canada for referral
slack that exists once you add the extra
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your USING LOWER ANCHORS AND
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean TETHERS FOR CHILDREN
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap, WARNING: Do not attach two child
attach it. safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
45
Child Safety
The lower anchors are at the rear section

WARNING: Depending on where of the rear seat between the cushion and
you secure a child restraint, and seat backrest.
depending on the child restraint design, LATCH compatible child restraints have
you may block access to certain seatbelt two rigid or webbing mounted
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower attachments. These attachments connect
anchors, rendering those features to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of equipped seating positions in your vehicle.
injury, make sure occupants only use This type of attachment method
seating positions where they are able to eliminates the need to use seatbelts to
be properly restrained. attach the child restraint.
However, you can still use the seatbelt to
WARNING: The center of the rear
attach the child restraint if the lower
seat is not designed as a seating position
anchors are not used. For forward-facing
and does not have seatbelts. The LATCH
child restraints, you must also attach the
anchors were not designed to be used
top tether strap to the proper top tether
with a child restraint in the center
anchor if a top tether strap has been
position and there is no tether anchor
provided with your child restraint.
available at the center. Do not attempt
to use the center as a seating position Follow the instructions later in this chapter
as this will increase the risk of injury or on attaching child restraints with tether
death in the event of a crash. straps.
The Lower Anchors and Tethers for COMBINING THE SEATBELT AND
Children (LATCH) system has three vehicle LOWER ANCHORS FOR
anchor points: ATTACHING CHILD RESTRAINTS
• Two lower anchors where the vehicle
seat backrest and seat cushion meet, When used in combination, you may attach
called the seat bight. either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided a proper installation
• One top tether anchor behind that is achieved. Attach the tether strap
seating position. afterward, if it is included with the child
restraint.
USING TETHER STRAPS

Many forward-facing child restraints
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child restraint and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
E187773
46
Child Safety
Contact the manufacturer of your child

restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in the vehicle.
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor. The tether strap
may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether
anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap snug without lifting the front of the
child restraint. Keeping the child restraint
just touching the vehicle seat gives the best
protection in a severe crash.
Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the tether strap. E369180
For vehicles with a hard top:

2. Locate the correct anchor for the
1. Route the tether strap over the back of selected seating position.
the seat.
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer's instructions.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
For vehicles with a convertible top:
Note: For easier access, attach the tether
strap with the convertible top up.
1. Route the tether strap over the top of
the seat backrest.
47
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint and meet
the following criteria.
• Generally children who are less than
57 in (1.45 m) tall.
• Are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12).
• Are between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg).
Many state and provincial laws require that
children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer yes to all of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E374068
2. Locate the correct anchor for the

selected seating position.
3. Remove the tether anchor cap.
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
E142595
If you do not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of injury to a child greatly • Can the child sit all the way back
increases in a crash. against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
If your child restraint system has a tether
the seat cushion?
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend • Can the child sit without slouching?
its use. • Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
48
Child Safety
Always use booster seats in conjunction

with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E70710
• High-back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
E68924
supports your child's head, a high-back
• Backless booster seats booster seat would be a better choice.
If your backless booster seat has a Children and booster seats vary in size and
removable shield, remove the shield. shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat never up across the stomach, and lets you
backrest or no head restraint, a backless adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
booster seat may place your child's head, and rest snugly near the center of the
as measured at the tops of the ears, above shoulder.
the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating The following drawings compare the ideal
position with a higher seat backrest or fit to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, to the neck and a shoulder belt that could
or consider using a high-back booster seat. slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142596
49
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not use any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check
with the booster seat manufacturer's
instructions.
50
Seatbelts
SEATBELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
WARNING: Always drive and ride assembly made up of one buckle and
with your seatback upright and the lap one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
belt snug and low across the hips. Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
WARNING: Children must always belt under the arm. Never use a single
be properly restrained. seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Do not allow a WARNING: Even with advanced

passenger to hold a child on their lap restraints systems, properly restrain
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to children 12 and under in a rear seating
follow this instruction could result in position. Failure to follow this could
personal injury or death in the event of a seriously increase the risk of injury or
sudden stop or crash. death.
WARNING: All occupants of your WARNING: Seatbelts and seats

vehicle, including the driver, should may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
always properly wear their seatbelts, sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
even when an airbag supplemental burn a small child. Check seat covers and
restraint system is provided. Failure to buckles before you place a child
properly wear your seatbelt could anywhere near them.
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death. WARNING: The center of the rear
seat is not designed as a seating position
WARNING: It is extremely and does not have seatbelts. The LATCH
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside anchors were not designed to be used
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people with a child restraint in the center
riding in these areas are more likely to be position and there is no tether anchor
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow available at the center. Do not attempt
people to ride in any area of your vehicle to use the center as a seating position
that is not equipped with seats and as this will increase the risk of injury or
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your death in the event of a crash.
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning WARNING: If your vehicle is
could result in serious personal injury or involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
death. and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an instruction could result in personal injury
unbelted person is significantly more or death.
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt. All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should properly wear their
seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
51
Seatbelts
The seatbelt system consists of: A web guide is included on the outermost
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts. side of the front seats. Depending on
occupant size and seating position, you
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front and may need to route the belt through the
rear seating positions. guide for a proper fit. If the seatbelt does
• Belt tension sensor at the front not route across the middle of the
passenger seating position. shoulder, route the belt through the web
A seatbelt warning light and guide.
chime. Convertible
E71880
Crash sensors and monitoring

system with a readiness
E67017 indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed

to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate in side
impacts and rollovers. E175860
Coupe
FASTENING AND
UNFASTENING THE
SEATBELTS
WARNING: Make sure that the

seatbelts are securely stowed away
when not in use and not outside your
vehicle when closing the doors.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers

not released by Ford Motor Company E175859
could prevent the seatbelt from

retracting correctly. This could cause the
seatbelt to become slack which could
increase the risk of injuries in a crash.
52
Seatbelts
Recaro Rear Seats
E380838
All seatbelts in your vehicle are three-point

combination lap and shoulder seatbelts.
E204921
Unfastening the Seatbelts

1. Press the red button on the buckle to
release the seatbelt.
2. Hold the seatbelt tongue and let it
retract completely and smoothly to its
stowed position.
SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE
A WHAT IS SENSITIVE LOCKING

MODE
B Sensitive locking mode is a seatbelt
retractor feature that allows shoulder belt
length adjustment according to your
E338014 movements and locking in response to
vehicle movement.
A Seatbelt tongue.
B Seatbelt buckle. HOW DOES SENSITIVE LOCKING
MODE WORK
1. Pull the seatbelt out steadily.
If the driver suddenly brakes, turns a corner
Note: It may lock if you pull it sharply or if sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact
the vehicle is on a slope. of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
2. Insert the tongue into the buckle. seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
3. Pull the seatbelt tight to remove any movement of the driver and passengers.
slack.
53
Seatbelts
In addition, the seatbelt retractor locks if ENGAGING AUTOMATIC LOCKING

you pull the seatbelt webbing out too MODE
quickly. If the retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract.
If the retractor does not unlock, pull the
seatbelt out slowly then feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC LOCKING

MODE E142591
This is a safety feature built into the 1. Fasten the combination lap and
seatbelt retractors that keeps the shoulder belt.
seatbelts pre-locked. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
WHEN TO USE AUTOMATIC out.
LOCKING MODE 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
Use this mode any time you install a child This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
restraint in a front outermost passenger automatic locking mode.
seating position or any rear seating
position. Properly restrain children 12 years
old and under in a rear seat whenever DISENGAGING AUTOMATIC
possible. LOCKING MODE
Note: Automatic locking mode is not Unbuckle the combination lap and
available on the driver seatbelt. shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive locking mode.
54
Seatbelts
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELTS This system monitors all seating positions

and provides audio and graphic feedback.
DURING PREGNANCY
SEATBELT REMINDER
INDICATORS
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly This lamp illuminates if you do
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion not fasten your seatbelt when
of the seatbelt snugly and low across E71880 you switch the power on. The
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of lamp switches off when you fasten your
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant seatbelt or about one minute has elapsed.
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure. When the initial warning expires for the
driver, the system provides more warnings
for the driver and front passenger. This
lamp illuminates if you or your front
passenger do not fasten the seatbelt
buckle and the vehicle speed exceeds
6 mph (9.7 km/h).
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do
not place large objects on the front
passenger seat.
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the power on, identifying
E206718
the number of seating positions
E142590 with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
Pregnant women should always wear their when a seating position changes from
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a unfastened to fastened.
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
SEATBELT REMINDER
HOW DOES THE SEATBELT

REMINDER WORK
E374286
WARNING: The system will only This warning displays if an occupant

provide protection when you use the unfastens a seatbelt buckle or it becomes
seatbelt correctly. unfastened.
55
Seatbelts
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an SEATBELT REMINDER AUDIBLE

occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle WARNINGS
to begin with, the warning will not display.
A warning tone sounds if you do not fasten
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
your seatbelt when you switch the power
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
on. The tone switches off when you fasten
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
your seatbelt or about one minute elapses.
warning lamp.
When the initial warning expires for the
Checking Seatbelt Status driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front passenger. This warning
To view the seatbelt status, use the tone sounds if you or your front passenger
touchscreen. do not fasten the seatbelt buckle and the
vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h).
This tone also sounds if an occupant
unfastens the rear seatbelt buckle or it
becomes unfastened.
SWITCHING THE SEATBELT

REMINDER ON AND OFF
WARNING: While the system

allows you to deactivate it, this system
E374287
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger

warnings independently switch off. When
you perform this procedure for one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as
E274703
this cancels the process.
A Seatbelt fastened. Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the seatbelt reminder. If the seatbelt
B Seatbelt not fastened. reminder has been previously disabled, it is
C Seatbelt recently unfastened. re-enabled during the use of MyKey.
D Fault. Read Steps 1-4 before proceeding with the
programming procedure.
Make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The power is off.
56
Seatbelts
• You close all vehicle doors. Read the child restraint manufacturer's
• The driver and front passenger instructions for additional inspection and
seatbelts are unfastened. maintenance information specific to the
child restraint.
1. Switch the power on. Do not start your
vehicle. We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
2. Wait about one minute until the crash be replaced. However, if the crash
seatbelt warning light switches off. was minor and an authorized dealer finds
After Step 2, wait an additional five that the belts do not show damage and
seconds before proceeding with Step continue to operate properly, they do not
3. Once you start Step 3, complete the need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
procedure within 30 seconds. not in use during a crash should also be
3. For the seating position you are checked and replaced if either damage or
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the improper operation is noted.
seatbelt three times at a moderate Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
speed, ending in the unbuckled state. Care (page 318).
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
switches on.
4. When the seatbelt warning light is on, SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation. WARNING: Persons who fit into
This switches the feature off for that the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
seating position if it is currently on. extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
This switches the feature on for that a crash.
seating position if it is currently off.
WARNING: Only use extensions
CHECKING THE SEATBELTS provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
Check the seatbelts and child restraints
model year and seating position. The use
periodically to make sure they work
of an extension intended for another
properly and are not damaged. Make sure
vehicle, model year or seating position
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
may not offer you the full protection of
necessary.
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
Check all of the following seatbelt
assemblies after a crash. WARNING: Never use seatbelt
• Retractors. extensions to install child restraints.
• Buckles. WARNING: Do not use extensions
• Front seatbelt buckle assemblies. to change the way the seatbelt fits
• Shoulder belt guide on seat backrest. across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
• Child restraint anchors and top tethers.
• Attaching hardware.
57
Seatbelts
If, because of body size or driving position,

it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
58
Personal Safety System™
WHAT IS THE PERSONAL

SAFETY SYSTEM
An advanced safety system that protects
occupants in frontal crashes.
HOW DOES THE PERSONAL

SAFETY SYSTEM WORK
This system provides an improved level of
frontal crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to reduce the
risk of airbag-related injuries. The system
analyzes occupant conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate
safety devices. During a crash, the
restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, and one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbags based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM

COMPONENTS
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, front
passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
59
Airbags
HOW DO THE FRONT AIRBAGS compounds (for example, baking soda)

that result from the combustion process
WORK that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
Contact with a deploying airbag may cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing
loss is also a possibility as a result of the
noise associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
E151127 particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
The driver and front passenger airbags position at the time of airbag deployment.
deploy during significant frontal and near Thus, it is extremely important that
frontal crashes. occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of: Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
• Driver and passenger airbag modules. required.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system HOW DO THE SIDE AIRBAGS
with readiness indicator. See Crash WORK
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
67).
The airbags are a supplemental restraint WARNING: Do not place objects
system and are designed to work with the or mount equipment on or near the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and airbag cover, on the side of the front or
right front passenger from certain upper rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; come into contact with a deploying
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
airbag. instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
airbag deploys. This is normal.
not released by Ford Motor Company
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly could prevent the deployment of the
upon activation. After airbag deployment, airbags and increase the risk of injuries
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery in a crash.
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
60
Airbags
The system consists of:

WARNING: Do not lean your head • A label or embossed side panel
on the door. The side airbag could injure indicating that your vehicle has side
you as it deploys from the side of the airbags.
seatback. • Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
of the front seat backrests. In certain
with a readiness indicator. See Crash
sideways crashes or rollovers, the airbags
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
inflate. The airbag was designed to inflate
67).
between the door panel and occupant to
further enhance the protection provided Note: For some models, the passenger
occupants in side impact crashes. sensing system deactivates the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an
Coupe
empty passenger seat.
HOW DO THE KNEE AIRBAGS

WORK
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,

do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: Close the glove box

E152533 door when your vehicle is moving. Failure
Convertible to follow this instruction could reduce
the effectiveness of the passenger knee
airbag and increase the risk of injury in a
crash.
A driver knee airbag is under or within the

instrument panel. A passenger knee airbag
is within or under the glove compartment.
During a crash, the restraints control
module may activate the driver and
passenger knee airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
E174777
driver and passenger knee airbag may
deploy but the driver front airbag may not
activate.
61
Airbags
As with front and side airbags, it is In certain sideways crashes or rollover

important to be properly seated and events, the Safety Canopy activates,
restrained to reduce the risk of death or regardless of which seats are occupied.
serious injury. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate
between the side window area and
Make sure the knee airbag is
occupants to further enhance protection
operating properly. See Crash
provided in side impact crashes and
E67017 Sensors and Airbag Indicator
rollover events.
(page 67).
HOW DOES THE SAFETY

CANOPY™ WORK - COUPE
WARNING: Do not place objects

or mount equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
E75004
personal injury in the event of a crash.
The system consists of:
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could • Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
injure you as it deploys from the the trim panels over the front and rear
headliner. side windows. They are identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
WARNING: All occupants of your roof pillar trim.
vehicle, including the driver, should • A flexible headliner which opens above
always properly wear their seatbelts, the side doors to allow air curtain
even when an airbag supplemental deployment
restraint system is provided. Failure to • Crash sensors and monitoring system
properly wear your seatbelt could with a readiness indicator. See Crash
seriously increase the risk of injury or Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
death. 67).
The Safety Canopy deploys during Properly restrain children 12 years old and
significant side crashes or when a certain under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
likelihood of a rollover event is detected airbags will not interfere with children
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy restrained using a properly installed child
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, or booster seat because it is designed to
behind the headliner, above each row of inflate downward from the headliner above
seats. the doors along the side window opening.
62
Airbags
AIRBAG PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate an active airbag. Failure to follow this
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury instruction could result in personal injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest or death.
close to the trim covering the airbag
module. WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
WARNING: All occupants of your supplementary restraint system or
vehicle, including the driver, should associated components. Failure to
always properly wear their seatbelts, follow this instruction could result in
even when an airbag supplemental personal injury or death.
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could WARNING: Several airbag system
seriously increase the risk of injury or components get hot after inflation. To
death. reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear WARNING: If a supplementary
seating position whenever possible. If restraint system component has
you are unable to properly secure all deployed, it will not function again. Have
children in a rear seating position, the system and associated components
properly secure the largest child on the inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
front seat. If you must use a forward follow this instruction could result in
facing child restraint on the front seat, personal injury or death.
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death. PROPERLY ADJUSTING THE
DRIVER AND FRONT
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
PASSENGER SEATS
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: National Highway
WARNING: Keep the areas in front Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do recommends a minimum distance of at
not affix anything to or over the airbag least 10 in (25 cm) between an
covers. Objects could become projectiles occupant's chest and the driver airbag
during airbag deployment. Failure to module.
follow this instruction could result in
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,

do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
63
Airbags
To properly position yourself away from Children must always be properly

the airbag: restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you children are safer when properly restrained
can while still reaching the pedals in the rear seating positions than in the
comfortably. front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
• Recline the seat slightly one or two injury in a crash.
degrees from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
important that they continue to sit SYSTEM
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat backrest, and WHAT IS THE FRONT PASSENGER
center themselves on the seat cushion, SENSING SYSTEM
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase This system detects a properly seated
the chance of injury in a crash event. For occupant and determines if the front
example, if an occupant slouches, lies passenger airbag should be enabled.
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash HOW DOES THE FRONT
greatly increases. PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WORK
CHILDREN AND AIRBAGS The system uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which illuminates indicating that
the front passenger frontal airbag is either
WARNING: Do not place a enabled or disabled.
rearward facing child restraint in front of Note: When you first switch the power on,
an active airbag. Failure to follow this the passenger airbag status indicator off
instruction could result in personal injury and on lamps illuminate for a short period
or death. to confirm they are functional.
E373264
The indicators are in the center of the

instrument panel.
E142846
64
Airbags
The front passenger sensing system is If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
designed to disable the front passenger passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
frontal airbag under these conditions: status indicator off lamp is illuminated, it
• The front passenger seat is is possible that the person is not sitting
unoccupied. properly in the seat. If this happens:
• The system determines an infant is • Switch your vehicle off and ask the
present in a child restraint. person to place the seat backrest in an
upright position.
• A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time. • Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
• If there is a problem with the airbag person's legs comfortably extended.
system or the passenger sensing
system. • Restart your vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
Note: Even with this technology, parents two minutes. This allows the system
are strongly encouraged to always properly to detect that person and enable the
restrain children in the rear seat. passenger frontal airbag.
• When the front passenger sensing • If the indicator off lamp remains
system disables the front passenger illuminated even after this, you should
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag advise the person to ride in the rear
status indicator illuminates the off seat.
lamp.
After all occupants have adjusted their
• If you have installed the child restraint seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
and the passenger airbag status important that they continue to sit upright,
indicator illuminates the on lamp, leaning against the seat backrest, and
switch your vehicle off, remove the centered on the seat cushion, with their
child restraint from your vehicle and feet comfortably extended on the floor.
reinstall the restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer's Sitting improperly can increase the chance
instructions. of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
The front passenger sensing system works sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
with sensors that are part of the front sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors chance of injury during a crash greatly
are designed to detect the presence of a increases.
properly seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should If you think that the state of the passenger
be enabled. airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• When the front passenger sensing
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag • Objects between the seat cushion and
status indicator illuminates the on the center console.
lamp. • Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
65
Airbags
• Cargo interference with the seat If it is necessary to modify an advanced

• Other passengers pushing or pulling on front airbag system to accommodate a
the seat. person with disabilities, contact your
Customer Relationship Center.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
The listed conditions could cause the SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat could appear WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
heavier or lighter due to the conditions of position or with the seatback reclined
listed. too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
Make sure the front passenger passenger sensing system, resulting in
sensing system is operating serious injury or death in the event of a
E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors crash. Always sit upright against your
and Airbag Indicator (page 67). seat back, with your feet on the floor.
If the airbag readiness light is on, do the WARNING: Any alteration or
following: modification to the front passenger seat
• Pull your vehicle over. may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
• Switch your vehicle off.
seriously increase the risk of injury or
• Check for any objects lodged death.
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat. WARNING: Do not place objects
• Remove the obstruction if found. under the front passenger seat or
between the seat and the center
• Restart your vehicle.
console. Failure to follow this instruction
• Wait at least two minutes and verify may interfere with the front passenger
that the airbag readiness light in the seat sensing system and increase the
instrument cluster is no longer risk of injury or death in a crash.
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the WARNING: Check the passenger
instrument cluster remains illuminated, airbag indicator lamp for proper airbag
there may be a problem due to the status. Failure to follow this instruction
front passenger sensing system. could result in personal injury or death.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle in for service
immediately.
66
Airbags
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM INDICATORS
Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Passenger Airbag

Indicator
Empty OFF: Illuminated Disabled

ON: Not Illuminated
Child OFF: Illuminated Disabled
ON: Not Illuminated
Adult OFF: Not Illuminated Enabled
ON: Illuminated
The restraints control module also

monitors the readiness of the above safety
CRASH SENSORS AND devices plus the crash and occupant
AIRBAG INDICATOR sensors. The safety system displays an
indicator in the instrument cluster when it
is ready. The system sends out a tone as
WARNING: Modifying or adding a backup if it is not working. The airbag
equipment to the front of your vehicle does not require routine maintenance.
could affect the performance of the One or more of the following may indicate
airbag system, increasing the risk of a system issue:
injury. This includes the hood, bumper
The readiness light does not
system, frame, front body structure, tow
immediately illuminate after you
hooks, hood pins, push bar and E67017 switch the power on.
snowplows.
• The readiness light either flashes or
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and stays on.
occupant sensors. These sensors provide
• You hear a series of five tones. The
information to the restraints control
tone pattern periodically repeats until
module which activates the following:
the problem, the light or both are
• Front seatbelt pretensioners. repaired.
• Driver airbag. If any of these things happen, even
• Passenger airbag. intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system immediately serviced.
• Knee airbag(s).
Unless serviced, the system may not
• Seat mounted side airbags. properly function in the event of a crash.
• Adaptive steering column.
• Safety Canopy airbags.
Based on the type of crash, the restraints
control module deploys the appropriate
safety devices.
67
Airbags
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners

or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, seatbelt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The front airbags activate only in
frontal and near-frontal crashes. The
front airbags may activate in rollovers,
side impacts or rear impacts if the
crash causes sufficient frontal
deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners activate in
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes,
and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag deploys based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The side airbags inflate in certain side
impact crashes or rollover events. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The Safety Canopy inflates in certain
side impact crashes or rollover events.
The Safety Canopy may activate in
other types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood
of rollover.
DISPOSING OF AIRBAGS
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
68
911 Assist
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST EMERGENCY CALL

REQUIREMENTS
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that
can call for help.
For more information, visit WARNING: Do not wait for 911
www.owner.ford.com. Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee risk of serious injury or death after a
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your five seconds of the crash, the system or
vehicle may be able to contact emergency phone may be damaged or
services by dialing 911 through a paired and non-functional.
connected Bluetooth® enabled phone.
WARNING: Always place your
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate phone in a secure location in your vehicle
the fuel pump shut-off. If a connected cell so it does not become a projectile or get
phone sustains damage or loses its damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC cause serious injury to someone or
searches for and tries to connect to a damage the phone which could prevent
previously paired cell phone. SYNC then 911 Assist from working properly.
attempts to call the emergency services.
Before making the call: WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
• SYNC provides about 10 seconds to system will not dial for help which could
cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the delay response time, potentially
call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. increasing the risk of serious injury or
• SYNC says the following, or a similar death after a crash.
message: SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your • SYNC is powered and working properly
screen or press and hold the phone at the time of the incident and
button on your steering wheel. throughout feature activation and use.
If you do not cancel the call and SYNC • The 911 Assist feature must be set on
makes a successful call a pre-recorded before the incident.
message plays for the 911 operator. The • You must pair and connect a
occupants in your vehicle are able to talk Bluetooth® enabled and compatible
with the operator. Be prepared to provide cell phone to SYNC.
your name, phone number and location
immediately because not all 911 systems • A connected Bluetooth® enabled
are capable of receiving this information phone must have the ability to make
electronically. and maintain an outgoing call at the
time of the incident.
During an emergency call the system
transmits vehicle data to the emergency
service.
69
911 Assist
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled

phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal
strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is off and the phone connected
to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
EMERGENCY CALL
LIMITATIONS
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
911 is the emergency number. The following
are limitations of this feature:
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
70
REMOTE CONTROL USING THE REMOTE CONTROL

LIMITATIONS
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
WARNING: Changes or remote control unattended in the vehicle.
modifications not expressively approved Children or pets could operate the power
by the party responsible for compliance windows, moonroof or other controls.
could void the user's authority to operate Failure to follow this instruction could
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the result in personal injury or death.
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical Use your remote control to access various
specifications were met. vehicle systems.
Note: The buttons on your remote may vary
This device complies with Part 15 of the depending on the vehicle region or options.
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). One-Stage Unlocking
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause Press the button to unlock all
harmful interference, and (2) This device doors. See Unlocking and
must accept any interference received,
E138629 Locking the Doors Using the
including interference that may cause Remote Control (page 78).
undesired operation.
Make sure a valid remote control is within
Two-Stage Unlocking (If Equipped)
3 ft (1 m) from the front door handles and Press the button to unlock the
rear of vehicle. driver's door. Press the button
The system may not function if: E138629 again within three seconds to
• The remote control remains stationary unlock all doors. See Unlocking and
for about a minute. Locking the Doors Using the Remote
Control (page 78).
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no Lock
charge.
• There is interference causing issues Press the button to lock all
with the remote control frequencies. doors. See Unlocking and
E138623 Locking the Doors Using the
• The remote control is too close to Remote Control (page 78).
metal objects or electronic devices, for
example keys or a cell phone.
Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. See Sounding the
E138624 Panic Alarm (page 72).
71
Remote Start (If Equipped) LOCATING YOUR VEHICLE

Press the button to remote start. Press the lock button twice
See Remotely Starting and within three seconds. The turn
E138625 Stopping the Vehicle (page E138623 signal lamps flash. We
117). recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle.
Luggage Compartment
Press the button twice to open
the luggage compartment.
CHANGING THE REMOTE
E138630 CONTROL BATTERY
REMOVING THE KEY BLADE

WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery

compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The remote control uses one coin-type

3-volt lithium battery, CR2450, or
equivalent.
E322866
Push the release button on your passive

key and pull the key blade out.
SOUNDING THE PANIC ALARM

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
E138624 again or switch the vehicle on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the vehicle is off.
72
E322866
1. Push the release button and pull the

key blade out.
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden

behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
73
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE

CONTROL
General Information
Make sure you are ready with the following
before programming the remote control.
• You must have two previously
E218402 programmed remote controls inside
your vehicle. Contact an authorized
3. Insert a screwdriver in the position dealer to have the spare remote control
shown and carefully remove the programmed if two previously
battery. programmed remotes are not
available.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward. • The new unprogrammed remote
controls must be readily accessible.
5. Reinstall the battery cover onto the
remote control and install the key • Make sure that your vehicle is off.
blade. • Make sure that you close all the doors
and that they remain closed
E107998 throughout the procedure.
Perform all steps within 30 seconds of
Note: Refer to local regulations before you starting the sequence. Stop and wait for
dispose of the remote control batteries. at least one minute before starting again
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the if you perform any steps out of sequence.
battery terminals or on the back surface of Read and understand the entire procedure
the circuit board. before you begin.
Note: Replacing the remote control battery Note: You can program a maximum of four
does not erase the programmed key from remote controls to your vehicle.
your vehicle. The remote control operates
as normal.
Note: A message appears in the
information display when the remote control
battery is low.
74
Note: If your programmed remote controls 5. Within 10 seconds, place a second

are lost or stolen and you do not have an programmed remote control in the
extra coded remote, you need to have your backup slot. Press and release the push
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Store button ignition switch.
an extra programmed remote away from 6. Wait five seconds and then press and
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent release the push button ignition switch
any inconvenience. Contact an authorized again. Keep the ignition on for at least
dealer to purchase additional spare or three seconds, but no more than 10
replacement remotes. seconds.
Steps for Programming Your Spare 7. Remove the remote control.
Remote Control 8. Place the unprogrammed remote
control in the backup slot and press
and release the push button ignition
switch.
Programming is now complete. With your
foot on the brake pedal, press the push
button ignition switch to verify the remote
control functions operate and your vehicle
starts with the new remote control.
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If
you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
KEYS AND REMOTE

CONTROLS AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
Key In Reminder
Sounds when the following conditions are
E386267 met:
1. Access the backup slot. • Vehicle is out of park (P).
2. Place the first programmed remote in • You switch the vehicle off.
the backup slot in the center console • You open the driver's door.
with the buttons facing up. With your • You have left the key inside the vehicle.
foot off the brake pedal, press and
release the push button ignition switch.
3. Wait five seconds and then press and
release the push button ignition switch
again.
4. Remove the remote control.
75
REMOTE REV (IF EQUIPPED) 1. Start the engine.

Note: Remote Rev is not available until
system reaches optimal temperature after
WHAT IS REMOTE REV a cold start. For ambient temperatures of
Allows you to remotely command engine 41°F (5°C) and above, it may take up to one
speed using your remote control to enjoy minute to reach the appropriate system
the engine sound from outside of the temperatures to enable the feature. For
vehicle. ambient temperatures lower than 41°F
(5°C) the system takes longer to reach the
appropriate temperature, depending on the
REMOTE REV LIMITATIONS ambient temperature.
The system does not function, or 2.
deactivates, in the following conditions:
E138629 Press the unlock button on
• The engine is off. the remote control.
• The remote control is not working. 3.
• The remote control is out of range.
E138623 Within three seconds, press
• The transmission is not in park (P).
the lock button on the remote control.
• The accelerator or brake pedal is
Note: Engine RPM quickly increases to
pressed.
confirm that the feature is enabled.
• The engine oil temperature is too high
or too low. 4.
• The engine coolant temperature is too E138629 With remote rev enabled,
high or too low. press the unlock button on the remote
• The catalytic converter temperature is control.
too high or too low. 5.
• The engine speed is not at stable idle
condition. E138623 Within three seconds, press
the lock button on the remote control.
• The automatic engine shutdown is
activated. Note: The engine accelerates strongly.
• Any system fault is detected. Note: You can still lock or unlock your
vehicle when using the feature.
USING REMOTE REV Note: If your vehicle has active exhaust, it
automatically switches to track position to
enhance engine sound and feature
WARNING: Do not start the engine experience. It returns to the initial position
in a closed garage or in other enclosed once the feature is disabled.
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
or death.
76
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – TROUBLESHOOTING
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Key Battery Low Replace Replace remote control battery.

Soon
77
Doors and Locks
OPERATING THE DOORS UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE

DOORS USING THE KEY BLADE
FROM OUTSIDE YOUR
VEHICLE If there is a power door lock fault you can
use the key blade to lock and unlock the
doors.
UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE
DOORS USING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
You can only use the remote control when
your vehicle is stationary.
Unlocking the Doors

Press the button to unlock all
E267112
doors. One long flash of the turn
signal lamps confirms that your
vehicle has unlocked.
E375574
One-Stage Unlocking
Press the button to unlock all A Lock.
doors. B Unlock.
E138629
Two-Stage Unlocking (If Equipped)

OPERATING THE DOORS
Press the button to unlock the FROM INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
driver's door. Press the button
E138629 again within three seconds to
unlock all doors. UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE
DOORS USING THE CENTRAL
LOCKING
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all The power door lock control is on the front
E267111 doors. One short flash of the doors.
turn signal lamps confirms your Press the button to unlock all
vehicle is locked. E267112
doors.
A tone sounds when you press the lock Press the button to lock all
button twice within three seconds on the E267111 doors.
remote control confirms your vehicle is
locked. Note: The central locking only operates if
Note: For more information on operating the front doors are fully closed.
the doors from outside your vehicle See
Keyless Entry (page 82).
78
Doors and Locks
OPENING THE DOORS FROM 1. All doors are closed and the ignition is
INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE on.
2. Your vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
Pull the interior door handle to unlock and (20 km/h).
open a door.
Autolock repeats if:
AUTOUNLOCK 1. Your vehicle is stopped.
2. Any door is opened and closed again.
WHAT IS AUTOUNLOCK 3. Your vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Autounlock is a feature that centrally
unlocks the vehicle doors when your
vehicle comes to a stop and you open the MISLOCK
driver door.
WHAT IS MISLOCK
AUTOUNLOCK REQUIREMENTS
Mislock is a locking feature that warns you
Autounlock unlocks all the doors after: if your vehicle has not locked.
1. The vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). MISLOCK LIMITATIONS
2. Your vehicle comes to a stop. The turn signals will not flash when you
3. You open the driver door. press the lock button once and the hood
or any door is open.
Note: Autounlock operates for only 10
minutes after the ignition is switched off. If you switch mislock off, the horn does not
sound if you press the lock button on the
remote control when a door is open.
SWITCHING AUTOUNLOCK ON
AND OFF
SWITCHING MISLOCK ON AND
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. OFF
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Switch Autounlock on or off.
3. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off.
AUTOLOCK
DOORS AND LOCKS AUDIBLE
WHAT IS AUTOLOCK
WARNINGS
Autolock is a locking feature that centrally
locks your vehicle doors when driving. Door Ajar Audible Warning
Sounds when any front door is not fully
AUTOLOCK REQUIREMENTS closed and your vehicle is moving.
Autolock locks all the doors after:
79
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS – Door Ajar Warning Lamp

TROUBLESHOOTING Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on and remains on if any
E249859
DOORS AND LOCKS – WARNING door or the hood is open.
LAMPS
DOORS AND LOCKS – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Driver Door Ajar Displays if a door is open. Fully close the door.
Passenger Door Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar
Rear Right Door Ajar
Hood Ajar Displays if a hood is open. Fully close the hood.
80
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS –

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Can accessories such as steps or
handles be used with the latch
assembly?
• Do not use the door latch assembly to
attach any accessory, such as handles
or steps, as this can cause damage to
your vehicle.
81
Keyless Entry
KEYLESS ENTRY LIMITATIONS Opening the Luggage

Compartment with Passive Key (If
Make sure your remote control is within 3 ft Equipped)
(1 m) from the front door handles and the
luggage compartment.
The system could not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no
charge.
• There is interference causing issues
with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to E375544
metal objects or electronic devices, for
example keys or a cell phone. Press the exterior luggage compartment
release button of the luggage
compartment handle. The luggage
USING KEYLESS ENTRY compartment unlocks and opens. See
Opening the Rear Luggage
Unlocking the Doors Compartment from Outside Your
Vehicle (page 268).
Locking the Doors
E381322
With your passive key or authorized phone

within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, gently
E381323
press the touchpad on the door window
trim to unlock and open the door. With your remote control or authorized
phone within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle,
touch the lock icon on the door window
trim to lock the door. The keyless entry
system requires a brief delay to
authenticate your device.
Note: The door activation switch flashes
once to indicate the vehicle locks.
Note: Do not use the outside door handle
as a roof cargo strap.
82
Keyless Entry
Double Locking
With your remote control or authorized
phone within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle,
touch the lock icon twice within three
seconds to double lock your vehicle.
83
Easy Entry and Exit
HOW DOES EASY ENTRY AND

EXIT WORK
This feature moves the driver seat
rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch
the ignition off. The driver seat returns to
its previous position when you switch the
ignition on.
SWITCHING EASY ENTRY AND

EXIT ON AND OFF
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Select Easy Entry/Exit.
If you press any adjustment or memory
button when in easy exit mode, the system
cancels the operation.
84
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT HOW DOES THE ANTI-THEFT

ALARM SYSTEM WORK
SYSTEM
When armed, the anti-theft alarm is
WHAT IS THE PASSIVE ANTI- triggered in any of the following ways:
THEFT SYSTEM • If someone opens a door, the liftgate
or the hood without a correctly coded
The passive anti-theft system prevents key or remote control.
someone from starting your vehicle with
an incorrectly coded key. • If you turn the power on without a
correctly coded key.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key • If the interior sensors detect movement
in your vehicle. Always take the keys and inside your vehicle.
lock all the doors when leaving your vehicle.
• If the inclination sensors detect an
attempt to raise your vehicle.
HOW DOES THE PASSIVE ANTI-
THEFT SYSTEM WORK • If someone disconnects your vehicle's
12V battery or the battery backup
The passive anti-theft system arms when alarm.
you switch the ignition off. If the anti-theft alarm is triggered, the
It disarms when you switch the ignition on alarm horn sounds for 30 seconds and the
with a correctly coded key. turn signals flash for 5 minutes.
Note: The system is not compatible with Any further attempts to carry out one of
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. the above sounds the alarm again.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take the keys and WHAT IS THE PERIMETER ALARM
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
The perimeter alarm is designed to detect
unauthorized access to your vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM
WHAT ARE THE INTERIOR
WHAT IS THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM SENSORS (If Equipped)
SYSTEM
The interior sensors are designed to detect
The anti-theft alarm system warns you of any movement inside your vehicle.
an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. The interior sensors are in the overhead
console.
Note: Do not cover the interior sensors.
85
Security
WHAT ARE THE INCLINATION In all sensors, all equipped sensors are on
SENSORS (If Equipped) when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not arm the alarm with all sensors
The inclination sensor is designed to detect if passengers, animals or other moving
an attempt to raise your vehicle, for objects are inside your vehicle.
example to remove a wheel or to tow it
away. Perimeter Sensing
In perimeter sensing, the interior sensors
ARMING THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM
are off when you arm the alarm.
SYSTEM
All the other equipped sensors activate
The alarm is ready to arm when you switch when you arm the alarm in this mode.
your vehicle off.
Lock your vehicle with your remote control SETTING THE ALARM SECURITY
to arm the alarm. LEVEL
DISARMING THE ANTI-THEFT
ALARM SYSTEM 2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Alarm System.
Disarm the alarm by performing any of the
following actions: 4. Press Motion Sensors.
• Unlock the doors or luggage 5. Press a setting.
compartment with the remote control.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your WHAT IS ASK ON EXIT
vehicle.
You can choose which level of security you
require after you switch the ignition off.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM Note: If you do not choose a setting, the
SETTINGS (IF EQUIPPED) system defaults to all sensors.
WHAT ARE THE ALARM SECURITY SWITCHING ASK ON EXIT ON AND

LEVELS OFF
You can select two levels of alarm security, 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
all sensors and perimeter sensing. 2. Press Vehicle.
All Sensors 3. Press Alarm System.
4. Switch Ask on Exit on or off.
All sensors is the standard setting.
86
Security
SECURITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
SECURITY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
No Key Detected The system has not detected a correctly coded key.
Starting System Fault The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
Alarm, Start Vehicle. ized entry.
Alarm
87
Security
SECURITY – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
What should I do if there is a
potential alarm problem with my
vehicle?
• Take all remote controls to an
authorized dealer if there is a potential
alarm problem with your vehicle.
What should I do if my vehicle is

unable to start with a correctly
coded key?
• Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
88
Steering Wheel
USING THE CONTROLS ON THE See Audio System (page 388).

STEERING WHEEL E265045
See Audio System (page 388).

See Cruise Control (page 208).
E265044
E332905
See Instrument Cluster
See Adaptive Cruise Control Display (page 114).
(page 210). E265041
E144529
See Adaptive Cruise Control Display (page 114).
(page 210). E266187

See Cruise Control (page 208). Display (page 114).
See Adaptive Cruise Control
E246884 E266186
(page 210). See Intelligent See Drive Mode Control (page

Speed Limiter (page 229). E347142
226).
See Cruise Control (page 208).
E246885 See Drive Mode Control (page
(page 210). See Intelligent 226).
E400558
Speed Limiter (page 229).
See Drive Mode Control (page
See Cruise Control (page 208). 226).
E400559
E308130
(page 210). See Intelligent
Speed Limiter (page 229). ADJUSTING THE STEERING
See Lane Centering (page 218). WHEEL
See Lane Keeping System
E308131
(page 232).
See Intelligent Speed Limiter WARNING: Do not adjust the
(page 229). steering wheel when your vehicle is
E396410 moving.
See Horn (page 90).
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
E270945 correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
See Ford Assistant (page 411). Position (page 129).
E142599
See Adjusting the Volume

(page 388).
E280803
See Adjusting the Volume

(page 388).
E280802
89
Steering Wheel
Note: Depending on the remote start

settings, the heated steering wheel may
remain on after remote starting your vehicle.
It may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if it was on the last time the engine
was switched off.
E375576
1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
HORN
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
E270945
to activate the horn.
SWITCHING THE HEATED

STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
To activate the heated steering

wheel, press the button on the
E369755 touchscreen near the climate
controls. The button illuminates when the
heated steering wheel is on. To turn it off,
press the heated steering wheel button
again.
Note: The engine must be running to use
the heated steering wheel.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature
of the steering wheel.
90
Wipers and Washers
WIPERS AUTOWIPERS
WIPER PRECAUTIONS WHAT ARE AUTOWIPERS

Do not operate the wipers on a dry Autowipers turns on and controls the
windshield. This could scratch the glass or speed and frequency of the windshield
damage the wiper blades. Use the wipers.
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield. AUTOWIPERS SETTINGS
Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
Switch the windshield wipers off before 2. Press Vehicle Settings.
entering a car wash. 3. Press Wipers.
4. Switch Rain Sensing on or off.
SWITCHING WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: When you switch the feature off, the
ON AND OFF wipers do not operate based on the rain
sensor. When you switch on the windshield
wipers to the intermittent wipe position with
the feature off, the wipers use the wipe
speed set by the rotary control.
E295996
A Single wipe.
B Intermittent wipe/Auto wipe.
C Normal wipe.
D High-speed wipe.
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wipers.
E270969
91
Wipers and Washers
ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY OF CHECKING THE WIPER

THE RAIN SENSOR
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

the blade to check for roughness.
REPLACING THE FRONT

B WIPER BLADES
Make sure your vehicle is off before
E308824
beginning this procedure.
Note: Do not manually move the wiper
A High sensitivity.
arms. To place the wiper arms in a service
B Low sensitivity. position, switch your vehicle on in accessory
mode, switch on the wipers and switch your
Use the rotary control to set the rain sensor vehicle off when the wipers are at their
sensitivity. highest position.
When you select high sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
When you select low sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield.
E72899
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the

wiper blade locking button.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
92
Wipers and Washers
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does USING THE WINDSHIELD WASHER
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
WASHERS
WASHER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: If you operate your

vehicle in temperatures below 41°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired E308825
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident. Pull the lever toward you to
E270967
operate the windshield washer.
Do not operate the washers when the
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
after the wipers stop to clear any remaining
the washer pump to overheat.
washer fluid when switched on. See
Keep the outside of the windshield clean. Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the (page 93).
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield. SWITCHING THE COURTESY WIPE
ON AND OFF
3. Press Wipers.
4. Switch Courtesy Wipe on or off.
Note: When you switch the feature on, the
wipers make an additional single wipe at
the end of the washer request. When you
switch it off, the wipers finish the current
washer request.
93
Wipers and Washers
ADDING WASHER FLUID WIPERS AND WASHERS –

Why are there streaks and smears
on the windshield?
• The wiper blades could be dirty, worn
or damaged. Check the wiper blades.
See Checking the Wiper Blades
(page 92). If the wiper blades are dirty,
clean them with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth. If
the wiper blades are worn or damaged,
install new ones. See Replacing the
Front Wiper Blades (page 92).
E375553
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

See Washer Fluid Specification (page
377).
WIPERS AND WASHERS –

TROUBLESHOOTING
WIPERS AND WASHERS –

WARNING LAMPS
Illuminates when the windshield
E132353 washer fluid is low.
94
Exterior Lighting
EXTERIOR LIGHTING Push the lever forward again or pull the

lever toward you to switch the high beams
CONTROL off.
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
Note: Continuous activation only with
headlamps on.
SWITCHING HEADLAMP EXIT

E327629
DELAY ON AND OFF
A Lamps off. To switch headlamp exit delay on, pull the
B Parking lamps on. turn signal lever toward you after switching
your vehicle off.
C Autolamps on.
To switch headlamp exit delay off, pull the
D Headlamps on. turn signal lever toward you again or switch
your vehicle on.
Rotate the control to make a selection.
Note: The headlamps turn off after three
Note: The lighting control defaults to minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
autolamps every time you switch your after the last door closes.
vehicle on.
HEADLAMP INDICATORS
HEADLAMPS
Lamps On
USING THE HIGH BEAM Illuminates when you switch the
HEADLAMPS E71341 low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
Headlamp High Beam

Illuminates when you switch the
E67019
high beam headlamps on.
E328253
Push the lever away from you to

E67019
switch the high beams on.
95
Exterior Lighting
HEADLAMPS – Why do my headlamps turn off

when I have them switched on
TROUBLESHOOTING when I switch my vehicle off?
HEADLAMPS – FREQUENTLY • The battery saver turns the headlamps

ASKED QUESTIONS off after a short period of time after you
switch your vehicle off.
Why is there condensation in the
headlamps? AUTOLAMPS
• Headlamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air WHAT ARE AUTOLAMPS
pressure. Condensation can be a
natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp WARNING: The system does not
assembly through the vents, there is a relieve you of your responsibility to drive
possibility that condensation can occur with due care and attention. You may
when the temperature is cold. When need to override the system if it does not
normal condensation occurs, a fine turn the headlamps on in low visibility
mist can form on the interior of the conditions, for example daytime fog.
lens. The fine mist eventually clears
and exits through the vents during
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
normal operation.
light situations or when the windshield
How much condensation is wipers operate.
acceptable?
AUTOLAMP SETTINGS
• The presence of a fine mist, for
example no streaks, drip marks or large 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
droplets. A fine mist covers less than
50% of the lens. 2. Press Vehicle Settings.
3. Press Lighting.
How long does it take for the 4. Press Autolamp Delay.
acceptable condensation to clear?
5. Press a setting.
• Clearing time can take as long as 48
hours under dry weather conditions.
How much condensation is

unacceptable?
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
What should I do if unacceptable

condensation is present?
• Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
96
Exterior Lighting
EXTERIOR LAMPS SWITCHING THE DAYTIME

RUNNING LAMPS ON AND OFF -
VEHICLES WITH: CONFIGURABLE
USING THE TURN SIGNAL LAMPS DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running

lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
E242676
E67018 Push the lever up or down to 3. Press Lighting.
switch the turn signal lamps on.
4. Switch Daytime Running Lights on or
off.
Set the lever to the middle position to
switch the turn signal lamps off. The daytime running lamps turn on when
all of the following occur:
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
turn signal lamps flash three times. • You switch the system on.
• You switch your vehicle on.
Turn Signal Lamp Indicator • The transmission is not in park (P) for
E67018 It flashes when you switch the vehicles with automatic transmissions
turn signal lamps on. or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing • The lighting control is in the autolamps
warns of a failed turn signal lamp. position.
• The headlamps are off.
Note: Other lighting control positions do
not turn on the daytime running lamps.
97
Exterior Lighting
SWITCHING THE DAYTIME EXTERIOR LAMPS ON AUDIBLE

RUNNING LAMPS ON AND OFF - WARNING
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) (If Equipped) Sounds when you open the driver door and
the exterior lamps are on.
WARNING: The daytime running AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

lamps system does not activate the rear CONTROL
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the HOW DOES AUTOMATIC HIGH
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all BEAM CONTROL WORK
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash. Automatic high beam control turns the
high beams on if it is dark enough and no
Daytime running lamps are always on other traffic is present. If it detects an
unless you switch on the headlamps or approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail
your vehicle is in park (P). lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system
turns the high beams off.
SWITCHING WELCOME LIGHTING A camera sensor, centrally mounted
ON AND OFF behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
Welcome lighting turns on the exterior the high beams on and off.
lamps when you approach your vehicle
with an authenticated device.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Lighting.
4. Switch Welcome Lighting on or off.
Note: Welcome lighting still displays when
you use your remote control to unlock your
vehicle.
EXTERIOR LAMP INDICATORS

Turn Signal Lamp
E67018 It flashes when you switch the
turn signal lamps on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed turn signal lamp.
98
Exterior Lighting
WARNING: The system may not

switch the high beams off if the lights of
oncoming vehicles are hidden by
obstacles, for example guard rails.
WARNING: You may need to

override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: In situations with poor

visibility, such as fog, heavy rain or other
inclement weather, you may need to
override or completely switch off the
system.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
The system turns the high beams on if all
of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough
that you require high beams.
E327596 • There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
A Without automatic high beam • The vehicle speed is greater than
control. approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
B With automatic high beam
control. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL LIMITATIONS
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM The system turns the high beams off if any
CONTROL PRECAUTIONS of the following occur:
• You switch the system off.
• You set the lighting control to any
WARNING: The system does not position except autolamps.
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may • The ambient light level is high enough
need to override the system if it does not that you do not require high beams.
turn the high beams on or off. • The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or a leading
vehicle's tail lamps.
99
Exterior Lighting
• The system detects severe rain, snow OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC HIGH

or fog. BEAM CONTROL
• The system detects street lighting.
• The camera has reduced visibility.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH

BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Lighting. E248603
4. Switch Auto High Beam on or off. Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM Push the lever away from you again to
CONTROL INDICATORS switch the high beams off.
Illuminates to confirm when the Push the lever away from you for a third
E146105 system is ready to assist. time to switch automatic high beam
control back on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Front Camera Low Visib- The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If
ility Clean Screen the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked
Front Camera Tempor- The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time
arily Not Available for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to
appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc- The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
tion Service Required as soon as possible.
100
Interior Lighting
SWITCHING ALL OF THE

INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
On
Press the button on the
E259649 overhead console toward the
icon. E299443
Set the switch to the middle position.

Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off When you switch the interior lamp function
on, the interior lamps turn on if:
Press the button on the • You open a door.
overhead console toward the
icon. • You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition off.
SWITCHING THE FRONT
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL LIGHTING
BRIGHTNESS
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
E249791 E291299
Press the edge of the lamp lens.

E296433
INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION

AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
WHAT IS THE INTERIOR LAMP
FUNCTION SWITCHING AMBIENT LIGHTING
The interior lamp function switches the
ON AND OFF
courtesy and door lamps on or off. 1. From the My Mustang menu, press
MyColor. See My Mustang Overview
SWITCHING THE INTERIOR LAMP (page 401).
FUNCTION ON AND OFF 2. Press Ambient Light.
The switch is on the overhead console. 3. Use the arrows to select a color and
brightness.
101
Interior Lighting
Note: Setting the brightness to zero turns

off the ambient lighting.
INTERIOR LIGHTING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTERIOR LIGHTING –
Why do my courtesy lamps or
interior lamps turn off when I have
them switched on when I switch
my vehicle off?
• The battery saver turns the courtesy
lamps and interior lamps off after a
short period of time after you switch
your vehicle off.
102
Windows
OPENING AND CLOSING THE Press the window control switch to open
the window. Lift the window control
WINDOWS - CONVERTIBLE switch to close the window.
Note: The power windows operate with the
ignition on, and for several minutes after you
WARNING: Do not leave children switch the ignition off or until you open a
or pets unattended in your vehicle and front door.
do not let children play with the power
windows. Failure to follow this Note: Use the single control to open and
instruction could result in personal injury close both rear windows.
or death. To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
one window is open, slightly open the
WARNING: When closing the opposite window.
power windows, verify that they are free
of obstructions and make sure children One-Touch Open
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings. Failure to follow this Fully press the window control switch and
instruction could result in personal injury release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
or death. window.
WARNING: If an obstruction is One-Touch Close

detected, release the switch and reverse Fully lift the window control switch and
the window immediately. Failure to release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
follow this instruction could result in window.
Resetting One-Touch Close
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
remote control unattended in the vehicle. Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of
Children or pets could operate the power starting the sequence.
windows and could become trapped in 1. Press and hold the window control
a closing window. Failure to follow this switch until the window is fully open.
or death. 2. Lift and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully closed. The
glass auto retracts.
3. Once auto retract is completed, lift and
hold the window control switch until
the window is fully closed. Hold the
window control switch for a few
seconds.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
E180087
103
Windows
OPENING AND CLOSING THE One-Touch Open

WINDOWS - COUPE Fully press the window control switch and
release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
or pets unattended in your vehicle and
One-Touch Close
do not let children play with the power Fully lift the window control switch and
windows. Failure to follow this release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
instruction could result in personal injury window.
or death.
Resetting One-Touch Close
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify that they are free Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of
of obstructions and make sure children starting the sequence.
and pets are not in the proximity of the 1. Press and hold the window control
window openings. Failure to follow this switch until the window is fully open.
2. Lift and hold the window control switch
or death.
until the window is fully closed. The
glass auto retracts.
WARNING: If an obstruction is
detected, release the switch and reverse 3. Once auto retract is completed, lift and
the window immediately. Failure to hold the window control switch until
follow this instruction could result in the window is fully closed. Hold the
personal injury or death. window control switch for a few
seconds.
WARNING: Do not leave a key or Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
remote control unattended in the vehicle. does not close when you use one-touch.
Children or pets could operate the power
windows and could become trapped in
a closing window. Failure to follow this GLOBAL OPENING
or death. WHAT IS GLOBAL OPENING
Press the window control switch You can use the remote control to open
to open the window. Lift the the windows with the ignition off.
window control switch to close
the window.
USING GLOBAL OPENING
Note: The power windows operate with the
ignition on, and for several minutes after you 1. Press and release the unlock button on
switch the ignition off or until you open a the remote control.
front door. 2. Press and hold the unlock button on
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when the remote control.
one window is open, slightly open the 3. Release the button when the windows
opposite window. start to open.
104
Windows
Press the lock or the unlock button on the

remote control to stop global opening.
Note: You can use global opening for a
short period of time when you unlock your
vehicle using the remote control.
SWITCHING GLOBAL OPENING ON

AND OFF
3. Press Windows.
4. Switch Remote Open on or off.
WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK
WHAT IS WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK

The window stops and reverses if it detects
an obstruction when closing.
OVERRIDING WINDOW BOUNCE-

BACK
WARNING: If you override

bounce-back, the window does not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
1. Close the window until it reaches the

point of resistance and let it reverse.
2. Lift and hold the window control switch
within two seconds to override
bounce-back and close the window.
Bounce-back is now disabled and you
can close the window manually.
Note: The window goes past the point of
resistance and you can fully close it.
Note: If the window does not close, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
105
Interior Mirror
INTERIOR MIRROR
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not adjust the

mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR
MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
WHAT IS THE AUTO-DIMMING

INTERIOR MIRROR
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR
MIRROR LIMITATIONS
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
106
Exterior Mirrors
ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
MIRRORS mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
WARNING: Do not adjust the Memory Mirrors

mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Saving a Preset Position (page 140).
Directional Indicator Mirrors

When your vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the turn signal.
Puddle Lamps
The puddle lamps turn on when you
approach your vehicle with a remote
control or phone. If your vehicle has
auto-folding mirrors, the puddle lamps are
E375555
only on if the mirrors are unfolded and turn
off when the mirrors fold.
A Left-hand mirror.
B Right-hand mirror.
AUTO-DIMMING EXTERIOR
C Adjustment control.
MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust the mirrors, switch your vehicle
on, with the push button start in accessory WHAT IS THE AUTO-DIMMING
mode or your vehicle running. EXTERIOR MIRROR
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control light turns on. The driver exterior mirror dims when the
interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
FOLDING THE EXTERIOR

MIRRORS
WARNING: Objects in the mirror

are closer than they appear.
107
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW
E375407
A Gear indicator.
B Outside air temperature.
C Information on demand area.
D Compass.
E Speedometer.
F Fuel gauge.
G Distance to empty.
H Odometer.
I Drive mode indicator.
J Transmission position indicator.
K Tachometer.
L Engine coolant temperature.
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
Indicates the vehicle speed.
Indicates the engine speed.
108
Instrument Cluster
Secondary Speedometer WHAT IS DISTANCE TO EMPTY

You can select a secondary speedometer Indicates the approximate distance your
that displays other measurement units. vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
Note: When only the primary speedometer the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
is shown, the units are the same as the trip cause the value to not only decrease but
distance units selected. See Changing the also increase or stay constant for periods
Measurement Unit (page 115). of time.
FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE GAUGE
WHAT IS THE FUEL GAUGE
Indicates the engine coolant temperature.
Indicates approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER WARNING LAMPS
FUEL GAUGE LIMITATIONS
Warning lamps alert you to a vehicle
The fuel gauge may not provide an condition that could become serious.
accurate reading when your vehicle is on Some lamps illuminate when you start
an incline. your vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER refer to the respective system warning
DOOR lamp for further information.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump

symbol indicates on which side of your INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. WARNING LAMPS
WHAT IS THE LOW FUEL Anti-Lock Brake System

REMINDER If it illuminates when you are
E67020
driving, this indicates a
A low fuel level reminder displays and
malfunction. Your vehicle
sounds when the distance to empty
continues to have normal braking without
reaches 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km),
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km).
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at See Anti-Lock Braking System (page
different fuel gauge positions depending on 181).
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal. Battery
It illuminates when you switch
E67021
the ignition on.
109
Instrument Cluster
If it illuminates when the engine is running, Fasten Seatbelt

this indicates your vehicle requires service.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as It illuminates and a tone sounds
possible. until you fasten the seatbelts.
E71880
Brake System Front Airbag

Illuminates when you apply the See Airbags (page 60).
parking brake and the ignition is
E270480
on. If it illuminates when your E67017
vehicle is moving, make sure the
E67024
parking brake is released. If the Frost Warning Lamp
parking brake is released, this
indicates low brake fluid level or the brake
system requires service. Have your vehicle WARNING: Even if the temperature
checked as soon as possible. rises to above 39°F (4°C) there is no
guarantee that the road is free of hazards
Note: Indicators may vary depending on caused by inclement weather.
region.
Door Ajar It illuminates when the outside

air temperature is 39°F (4°C) or
It illuminates when you switch below.
the ignition on and remains on if
any door is open. Hood Ajar
Electric Parking Brake Illuminates when the ignition is

on and you do not have the hood
E159324
It illuminates or flashes when the completely closed.
E146190
electric parking brake requires
service. Low Beam Malfunction
E67024
Illuminates when there is a
malfunction with the low beam
Note: Indicators may vary depending on E181350 headlamp bulb.
region.
Driver Alert Low Fuel Level

Illuminates when you switch the It illuminates when the fuel level
driver alert off. is low.
E387606
Engine Coolant Temperature

If it illuminates, safely stop your
E103308 vehicle and switch the vehicle
off.
110
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT

It illuminates when your tire CLUSTER INDICATORS
E139232 pressure is low. If illuminated,
check your tire pressure as soon Indicators notify you of various features
as possible. If it begins to flash at anytime, that are active on your vehicle.
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Low Washer Fluid Level INDICATORS
It illuminates when the washer Adaptive Cruise Control
E132353 fluid is low.
(page 210).
E144524
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Illuminates when the ignition is Automatic High Beam
E67028
on and the engine is off, this is
normal. If it illuminates when the See Automatic High Beam
engine is on this indicates the emission
E146105 Control (page 98).
control system requires service. If it flashes,
have your vehicle checked immediately. Auto Hold
See Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Warning Lamps (page 159). Auto Hold Active
See Auto Hold (page 195).
Oil Pressure E323448
It illuminates when the engine

E67022
oil pressure is low. Auto Hold Unavailable
See Auto Hold (page 195).
Powertrain Malfunction E323449
Illuminates when the powertrain

or four-wheel drive require Auto-Start-Stop
service. Have the system
checked as soon as possible. See Auto-Start-Stop (page
161).
E121377
Trunk Ajar
Illuminates when the ignition is Blind Spot Monitor
on and you do not have the trunk See Blind Spot Information
E159323 completely closed. E323542
System (page 239).
111
Instrument Cluster
Cruise Control Launch Control

See Cruise Control (page 208). Launch Control Ready
E332905 See Track Apps (page 402).
Drift Brake E375124
Illuminates when you switch the Launch Control Active

drift brake on.
E380329 See Track Apps (page 402).
Front Fog Lamp E375125
Launch Control Not Ready

See Track Apps (page 402).
E379192
High Beam
See Using the High Beam Launch Control Ready With Traction
E67019
Headlamps (page 95). Control Off
Hill Start Assist E379193
Illuminates when the system is

Launch Control Active With Traction
not available.
E387607 Control Off
Lamps On
E379194
See Exterior Lighting Control
E71341 (page 95). Launch Control Not Ready With
Traction Control Off
Lane Centering See Track Apps (page 402).
See Lane Centering (page 218). E379195
E297977
Over Speed Warning
Lane Keeping System It illuminates if the vehicle speed
See Lane Keeping System exceeds the over speed
(page 232).
E280486 threshold.
E308131
Over speed thresholds vary depending on
region.
112
Instrument Cluster
Reverse Brake Assist
E293490
Stability Control and Traction

Control
See Stability Control (page
198). See Traction Control
E138639 (page 197).
E130458
Shift Indicator
Illuminates to inform you that
shifting to a higher gear as
indicated may give better fuel
economy and lower CO2
emissions. It does not illuminate during
periods of high acceleration, braking or
when you press the clutch pedal.
Turn Signal Lamps

E67018 See Using the Turn Signal
Lamps (page 97).
113
Instrument Cluster Display
USING THE INSTRUMENT CUSTOMIZING THE

CLUSTER DISPLAY CONTROLS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
WARNING: Driving while distracted Adding and Removing Screens
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
you use extreme caution when using any 2. Press Instrument Cluster.
device that may take your focus off the 3. Press Choose Screens.
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We 4. Select the screens you prefer.
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
are aware of all applicable local laws
devices while driving.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E374718
OK Button
Press to make a selection.
Scroll Buttons
Press the up or down buttons to scroll
through information on demand screens
or pop-up menu options.
114
Personalized Settings
CHANGING THE LANGUAGE

2. Press General.
3. Press Language.
4. Select a language.
CHANGING THE
MEASUREMENT UNIT
2. Press General.
3. Press Measurement Units.
4. Select a measurement unit.
CHANGING THE
TEMPERATURE UNIT
2. Press General.
3. Press Temperature Units.
4. Select a temperature unit.
CHANGING THE TIRE

PRESSURE UNIT
2. Press General.
3. Press Tire Pressure Units.
4. Select a pressure unit.
115
Trip Computer
ACCESSING THE TRIP

COMPUTER
The trip computer is available as a
configurable screen in your instrument
cluster. See Customizing the
Instrument Cluster Display (page 114).
Once the screens have been added, use
the instrument cluster display controls on
the steering wheel to view each trip screen.
RESETTING THE TRIP

COMPUTER
2. Press Instrument Cluster.
3. Press Trip 1 or Trip 2.
4. Press Reset Values.
5. Select which values to reset.
CONFIGURING THE TRIP

COMPUTER
2. Press Instrument Cluster.
3. Press Trip 1 or Trip 2.
4. Press Configure View.
5. Select the views you prefer.
Note: There is a minimum of one and a
maximum of 4 items that can be selected
at one time.
116
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WHAT IS REMOTE START Note: To remote start with FordPass, make

sure that the modem is enabled. See
The system allows you to remotely start Connecting FordPass to the Modem
your vehicle and to adjust the interior (page 383).
temperature according to the settings that
you chose. REMOTELY STARTING AND
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
REMOTE START
PRECAUTIONS Remotely Starting the Vehicle
Press the button on the remote
control.
WARNING: Do not start the engine E138623
in a closed garage or in other enclosed Within three seconds, press the

areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always button on the remote control.
open the garage door before you start E138625
the engine. Failure to follow this Within three seconds, press the
instruction could result in personal injury button again.
or death. Note: You can also use FordPass to start
the vehicle.
Note: The vehicle doors lock when you
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS successfully remote start your vehicle.
Remote start does not work under the Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice.
following conditions: Note: The parking lamps turn on when the
• The alarm horn is sounding. vehicle is running.
• The hood is open. Note: The horn sounds if the system fails
• The transmission is not in park (P). to start.
• The ignition is on. Note: All other vehicle systems remain off
when you have remotely started the vehicle.
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage. Note: The vehicle remains secured when
• Remote start is not enabled. you have remotely started the vehicle. A
valid key must be inside your vehicle to
Note: Do not use remote start if the fuel switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle.
level is low.
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle
ENABLING REMOTE START Press the button on the remote
control.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. E138625
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Switch Remote Start on or off.
117
Remote Start (If Equipped)
EXTENDING THE REMOTE 2. Press Vehicle Settings.

START DURATION 3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Seats.
To extend the remote start duration during 5. Press Auto or Off.
remote start, do the following:
Note: If you switch the heated seat settings
Press the button on the remote on, the heated seats turn on during cold
control. weather.
E138623
Within three seconds, press the Note: You cannot adjust the heated seat
button on the remote control. settings when you remotely start your
E138625 vehicle.
Within three seconds, press the
button again. Heated Steering Wheel Settings
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
duration extends by another 15 minutes.
This provides a total of 30 minutes. 2. Press Vehicle Settings.
Note: Remote start can only be extended 3. Press Remote Start Setup.
once. 4. Press Seats and Steering Wheel.
Note: A maximum of two remote starts, or 5. Press Auto or Off.
one remote start with an extension, are Note: If you switch the heated steering
allowed. To reset the restart procedure wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel
switch the vehicle to on, then to off. turns on during cold weather.
Note: You cannot adjust the heated
REMOTE START SETTINGS steering wheel settings when you remotely
start your vehicle.
Climate Control Settings
Remote Start Duration
2. Press Vehicle Settings. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Remote Start Setup. 2. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press Climate Control. 3. Press Remote Start Setup.
5. Press Auto or Last settings. 4. Press Duration.
Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the 5. Press the duration you prefer.
system attempts to heat or cool the interior
to 72°F (22°C). When you switch the vehicle
on, the climate control system returns to
the last used settings.
Note: If you switch the last settings on, the
system remembers the last used settings.
Heated Seat Settings

118
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE SWITCHING AIR

CONTROL UNIT CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
E372889
Note: To keep the system and its

Note: Depending on your vehicle options, components fully functional, switch air
the controls may look different from what conditioning on and let your vehicle idle at
you see here. least once per month for a minimum of two
minutes.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
Press the button to activate the
selection screen. Press the button to activate the
E265283
selection screen.
Press the button. E265283

touchscreen to switch the
windshield air vents on.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
Make sure that the instrument
AIR ON AND OFF E244097 panel air vents are switched off.
Press the button to activate the Make sure that the footwell air
selection screen. E244098 vents are switched off.
E265283
Press the button to recirculate

air currently in the passenger
compartment. SWITCHING MAXIMUM
Note: Recirculated air may turn off DEFROST ON AND OFF
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to Press the button on the
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may touchscreen.
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to Air flows through the windshield air vents,
improve heating or cooling efficiency. and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
119
Control (DATC)
Note: You can also press the button on the SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
instrument panel to switch the maximum
defrost on or off. SPEED
Note: To prevent window fogging, you Press the button on the
cannot select recirculated air when touchscreen to set the blower
maximum defrost is on. E408927
motor speed.
Note: The heated rear window and air Slide the control to set the blower motor
conditioning also turn on when you select speed.
maximum defrost.
Note: You can press + or - to set the blower
motor speed.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF SWITCHING THE HEATED
Press the button to activate the MIRRORS ON AND OFF (IF
selection screen. EQUIPPED)
E265283
Press the button. When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
See Switching the Heated Rear Window
Note: When you switch maximum cooling On and Off (page 120).
off, air conditioning remains on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
Note: In certain conditions, for example, with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
cold weather, maximum cooling may not when it is frozen in place.
activate or could run slow when switched
on. This helps reduce power consumption Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
from the battery. glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
SWITCHING THE HEATED caused to the mirror housing or glass.
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF Note: The engine must be running or your
vehicle must be ready to drive to switch the
Press the button to clear the rear system on.
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time. SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
Press the temperature controls on either
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
side of the climate control to set the
remove decals from the inside of the heated
temperature for that side.
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not Slide the control to set the
covered by the vehicle Warranty. temperature.
E408928
Note: The engine must be running or your Note: You can press + or - to set the
vehicle must be ready to drive to switch the temperature.
system on.
120
Control (DATC)
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR Press the button on the

E244098 touchscreen.
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
AUTO MODE
selection screen.
E265283 SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND
Press the button on the OFF
touchscreen.
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
Directing Air to the Instrument button to adjust auto mode.
Panel Air Vents
Adjust the blower motor control or air
Press the button to activate the distribution control to switch auto mode
selection screen. off.
E265283

E244097 touchscreen. AUTO MODE INDICATORS
The indicators are on the Auto Mode
Directing Air to the Footwell Air button.
Vents
selection screen.
E265283
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
ated. minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is moderate.
ated.
Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
121
Control (DATC)
SWITCHING DUAL MODE ON AND Automatic Climate Control

OFF
• Adjusting the settings when your
Press the button to activate the vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold
selection screen. is not necessary. Automatic mode is
E265283 best recommended to maintain set
Press the button. temperature.
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the
E265280 interior to the temperature you select
Note: When dual mode is off, setting the as quickly as possible.
temperature using the driver side controls, • For the system to function efficiently,
sets the temperature for both sides. the instrument panel and side air vents
Note: Setting the temperature using the should be fully open.
passenger side controls, sets the passenger • If you press AUTO during cold outside
temperature and switches dual mode on. temperatures, the system directs air
flow to the windshield and side window
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS air vents.In addition, the blower motor
may run at a slower speed until the
General Hints engine warms up.
• If you press AUTO during hot
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may temperatures and the inside of the
cause the windows to fog up. vehicle is hot, the system uses
• You may feel a small amount of air recirculated air to maximize interior
from the footwell air vents regardless cooling. Blower motor speed may also
of the air distribution setting. reduce until the air cools.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
Quickly Heating the Interior
vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air 1. Press AUTO.
always switched on.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• Do not place objects under the front setting you prefer.
seats as this may interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats. Recommended Settings for
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from Heating
the air intake area at the base of the
1. Press AUTO.
windshield.
• To improve the time to reach a
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
comfortable temperature in hot
a starting point, then adjust the setting
weather, drive with the windows open
as necessary.
until you feel cold air through the air
vents. Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
122
Control (DATC)
Recommended Settings for

Cooling
1. Press AUTO.
as necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in

Cold Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
as necessary.
123
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Electronic Automatic Temperature
Control (EATC)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE SWITCHING AIR

CONTROL UNIT CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
E372889
Note: To keep the system and its

Note: Depending on your vehicle options, components fully functional, switch air
the controls may look different from what conditioning on and let your vehicle idle at
you see here. least once per month for a minimum of two
minutes.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
selection screen. Press the button to activate the
E265283
selection screen.
Press the button. E265283

touchscreen to switch the
windshield air vents on.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
Make sure that the instrument
AIR ON AND OFF E244097 panel air vents are switched off.
Press the button to activate the Make sure that the footwell air
selection screen. E244098 vents are switched off.
E265283
Press the button to recirculate

air currently in the passenger
compartment. SWITCHING MAXIMUM
Note: Recirculated air may turn off DEFROST ON AND OFF
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to Press the button on the
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may touchscreen.
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to Air flows through the windshield air vents,
improve heating or cooling efficiency. and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
124
Control (EATC)
Note: You can also press the button on the SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
instrument panel to switch the maximum
defrost on or off. SPEED
Note: To prevent window fogging, you Slide the control to set the
cannot select recirculated air when blower motor speed.
maximum defrost is on. E408927
Note: You can press + or - to set the blower
Note: The heated rear window and air
motor speed.
conditioning also turn on when you select
maximum defrost.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM MIRRORS ON AND OFF
COOLING ON AND OFF When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
See Switching the Heated Rear Window
selection screen.
E265283 On and Off (page 120).
Press the button. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
Note: In certain conditions, for example, petroleum-based cleaning products. The
cold weather, maximum cooling may not vehicle warranty may not cover damage
activate or could run slow when switched caused to the mirror housing or glass.
on. This helps reduce power consumption
from the battery. Note: The engine must be running or your
system on.
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
Press the button to clear the rear Slide the control to set the
window of thin ice and fog. The temperature.
heated rear window turns off E408928
after a short period of time. Note: You can press + or - to set the
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor temperature.
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not Directing Air to the Windshield Air
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Vents
Note: The engine must be running or your
selection screen.
system on. E265283
125
Control (EATC)
Press the button on the AUTO MODE

touchscreen.
SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND
Directing Air to the Instrument OFF
Panel Air Vents
Press the button to switch auto
Press the button to activate the mode on. Repeatedly press the
selection screen. button to adjust auto mode.
E265283
Press the button on the Adjust the blower motor control or air
E244097 touchscreen. distribution control to switch auto mode
off.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents AUTO MODE INDICATORS
Press the button to activate the The indicators are on the Auto Mode
selection screen. button.
E265283

E244098 touchscreen.
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
ated. minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is moderate.
ated.
Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your

CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air
General Hints always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may seats as this may interfere with the
cause the windows to fog up. airflow to the rear seats.
• You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless
of the air distribution setting.
126
Control (EATC)
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
the air intake area at the base of the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
windshield. a starting point, then adjust the setting
• To improve the time to reach a as necessary.
comfortable temperature in hot
weather, drive with the windows open
Quickly Cooling the Interior
until you feel cold air through the air 1. Press MAX A/C.
vents.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
Automatic Climate Control period of time.
• Adjusting the settings when your Recommended Settings for

vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold Cooling
is not necessary. Automatic mode is
best recommended to maintain set 1. Press AUTO.
temperature. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
interior to the temperature you select a starting point, then adjust the setting
as quickly as possible. as necessary.
• For the system to function efficiently, Defogging the Side Windows in
the instrument panel and side air vents Cold Weather
should be fully open.
• If you press AUTO during cold outside 1. Press and release defrost or maximum
temperatures, the system directs air defrost.
flow to the windshield and side window 2. Adjust the temperature control to the
air vents.In addition, the blower motor setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
may run at a slower speed until the a starting point, then adjust the setting
engine warms up. as necessary.
• If you press AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system uses
recirculated air to maximize interior
cooling. Blower motor speed may also
reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior

1. Press AUTO.
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for

Heating
1. Press AUTO.
127
Interior Air Quality
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
LOCATING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
The cabin air filter is behind the glovebox.
Note: The filter access door is above the
passenger footwell under the instrument
panel.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 433).
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
128
Front Seats
FRONT SEAT PRECAUTIONS SITTING IN THE CORRECT

POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat

backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event
of a crash.
E68595
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest. When you use them properly, the seat,
Failure to follow this instruction could head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
result in personal injury or death in the provide optimum protection in the event
event of a sudden stop or crash. of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver guidelines:
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle • Sit in an upright position with the base
is moving. This may result in sudden seat of your spine as far back as possible.
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle. • Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees
from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
129
Front Seats
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can ADJUSTING THE HEAD
press the pedals fully. RESTRAINT
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap WARNING: Fully adjust the head
tightly across your hips. restraint before you sit in or operate your
Make sure that your driving position is vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
comfortable and that you can maintain full of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
control of your vehicle. not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
MANUAL SEATS WARNING: The head restraint is a

safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head

restraints for all passengers before you
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright

E396321 driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
The head restraints consist of: the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
A An energy absorbing head that you remain comfortable. If you are
restraint. extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
B Guide sleeve adjust and release its highest position.
button. Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
C Two steel stems. To lower the head restraint:
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
130
Front Seats
MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD

AND FORWARD
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully

locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in
a crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
E327919
For vehicles with tilting head restraints:

1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the preferred position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
E308316
restraint releases to the upright position.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST
1. Pull up the head restraint until it

reaches its highest position. WARNING: Do not place cargo or
2. Press and hold the adjust and release any objects behind the seatback before
button. returning it to the original position.
3. Pull up the head restraint. WARNING: Reclining the seatback
can cause an occupant to slide under the
INSTALLING THE HEAD seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe
RESTRAINT personal injuries in the event of a crash.
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves

and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
131
Front Seats
ACCESSING THE REAR SEATS
E175315
E207088
ADJUSTING THE SEAT HEIGHT
Pull the release handle and fold the front
seat backrest to access the rear seats. The
seat backrest has memory and locks in the
original position.
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
E324469
E396321
The head restraints consist of:

A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C Two steel stems.
132
Front Seats
ADJUSTING THE HEAD

RESTRAINT - VEHICLES WITH:
FRONT 4-WAY HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head

restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
E327919
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it 1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
should be installed and properly driving or riding position.
adjusted when the seat is occupied. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
Failure to adjust the head restraint your head to the preferred position.
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts. After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
WARNING: Adjust the head again to release it to the rearward, untilted
restraints for all passengers before you position.
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize Note: Do not attempt to force the head
the risk of neck injury in the event of a restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints continue tilting it forward until the head
when your vehicle is moving. restraint releases to the upright position.
To raise the head restraint, pull the head

restraint up.
ADJUSTING THE HEAD
RESTRAINT - VEHICLES WITH:
To lower the head restraint: FRONT FIXED HEAD RESTRAINTS
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To tilt the head restraint:
E174407
The non-adjustable head restraints consist

of a trimmed foam covering over the upper
structure of the seat backrest.
133
Front Seats
Properly adjust the seat backrest to an

upright driving or riding position, so that
the head restraint is positioned as close as
possible to the back of your head.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT

1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and unlock
button.
3. Pull up the head restraint. E384941
INSTALLING THE HEAD ADJUSTING THE SEAT HEIGHT

RESTRAINT
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD

AND FORWARD
E384942
ADJUSTING THE LUMBAR

SUPPORT
E384940
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST
WARNING: Do not place cargo or

any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
E384943
134
Front Seats
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Select your preferred heat level or off. You
can also slide the menu bar up to control
the heat intensity.
HEATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
More indicator lights indicate the warmer
temperature of the seat.
WARNING: Use caution when using Note: The heated seats turn on during a
the heated seat if you are unable to feel remote start if they are enabled.
pain to your skin because of advanced Note: The heated seats may turn on when
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord you start your vehicle if they were on when
injury, medication, alcohol use, you previously switched your vehicle off.
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even Note: When you switch on the auto setting,
at low temperatures, especially if used the heated seats turn on to match your
for long periods of time. Failure to follow climate control setting.
this instruction could result in personal
injury. VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat VENTILATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat. Do not:
Failure to follow this instruction could • Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
result in personal injury. cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
WARNING: Do not place anything • Place cargo or objects under the seats.
on the seat that blocks the heat, for They may block the air intake causing
example a seat cover or a cushion. This the air vents to not work properly.
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury. SWITCHING THE VENTILATED
SEATS ON AND OFF
Do not:
The vehicle must be running to use this
• Place heavy objects on the seat. feature.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
Press this symbol on the
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
touchscreen to switch on the
seat to dry. E374075 ventilated seats.
SWITCHING THE HEATED SEATS Select your preferred fan speed or off. You
ON AND OFF can also slide the menu bar up to control
the fan speed.
The vehicle must be running to use this
More indicator lights indicate higher fan
feature.
speeds.
Press this symbol on the
Note: The ventilated seats turn on during
touchscreen to switch on the
E374074 a remote start if they were on when you
heated seats.
previously switched your vehicle off.
135
Front Seats
Note: The ventilated seats may turn on

when you start your vehicle if they were on
when you previously switched your vehicle
off.
Note: When you switch on the auto setting,
the ventilated seats turn on to match your
climate control setting.
136
Rear Seats - Coupe
MANUAL SEATS
FOLDING THE SEAT BACKREST
WARNING: When folding the seat

backrest down, take care not to get your
fingers caught in the mechanism.

seats and the seat backrests are secure
and fully locked in their catches.
E175611
1. Pull the strap to release the seat

backrest.
2. Fold the seat backrest down.
UNFOLDING THE SEAT BACKREST

Push the top of the seat backrest rearward
and make sure it latches into place. Pull
down on the backrest to make sure that it
has locked into position.
137
Rear Occupant Alert System
WHAT IS THE REAR REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The rear occupant alert system monitors The system does not detect the presence
the vehicle conditions and notifies you to of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
check for rear seat occupants when you It monitors the activity of turning the
switch the ignition off. The notifications ignition on and off.
are in the form of warnings inside the Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
vehicle. there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
conditions are met.
HOW DOES THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
WORK SYSTEM SETTINGS
The system monitors the activity of turning 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
the ignition on and off to indicate the 2. Press Vehicle.
potential presence of an occupant in the
rear seat. 3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
A message displays in the touchscreen and Note: The default setting is ON.
an audible warning sounds when you Note: Performing a factory reset causes the
switch the ignition off. system to switch on again.
Semiannual Reminder
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS When you switch the system off, a
message appears every six months as a
reminder that the system is off. You can
switch the system back on or leave it off.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.

or pets unattended in your vehicle.
138
Rear Occupant Alert System
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM INDICATORS
E350472
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off

after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the
graphic may look different from what you
see here.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The audible warning is an alert tone within
the vehicle, which sounds when you switch
your vehicle off. The warning sounds for a
short period of time.
139
Memory Function (If Equipped)
HOW DOES THE MEMORY SAVING A PRESET POSITION

FUNCTION WORK
1. Switch the ignition on.
The memory function recalls the position 2. Adjust the memory features to your
of these features: preferred position.
• Driver seat. 3. Press and hold the preferred preset
• Power mirrors. button until you hear a single tone.
A confirmation message appears in the
information cluster display.
MEMORY FUNCTION
PRECAUTIONS You can save up to three preset memory
positions at any time.
WARNING: Before activating the RECALLING A PRESET

memory seat, make sure that the area POSITION
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants Press and release a preset button.
are clear of moving parts.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
WARNING: Do not use the memory position when the ignition is off, or when you
function when your vehicle is moving. place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not
moving.
LOCATING THE MEMORY Note: Pressing any of the memory feature
FUNCTION BUTTONS controls during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if you linked it to a
preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked remote control is
present.
Note: Using a linked remote control to
recall your memory position when the
ignition is off moves the seat and steering
column to the easy entry position.
Linking a Preset Position to your

E331901
Remote Control
The memory function buttons are on the You can save preset memory positions for
driver door. up to three remote controls.
140
Memory Function (If Equipped)
1. With the ignition on, move the memory

positions to the preferred positions.
2. Press and hold the preferred preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control is in range, the memory function
moves to the settings of the first key to
initiate a memory recall.
141
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER GARAGE DOOR OPENER

INTRODUCTION PRECAUTIONS AND
FREQUENCIES
HomeLink Wireless Control
System Garage Door Opener Precautions
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common handheld garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter integrated WARNING: Do not use the system
into the driver-side sun visor. with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
E188211 FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance
How Does The Garage Door Opener
Work
WARNING: Changes or
The system includes two primary features, modifications not expressively approved
a garage door opener and a platform for by the party responsible for compliance
remote activation of devices within the could void the user's authority to operate
home. You can program garage doors as the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
well as entry gate operators, security radio certification number only signifies
systems, entry door locks and home or that Industry Canada technical
office lighting. specifications were met.
Additional assistance can be found online
at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling This device complies with Part 15 of the
the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
Garage Door Opener Limitations following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
Canadian radio-frequency laws require (2) this device must accept any
transmitter signals to time out, or quit, interference received, including
after several seconds – which may not be interference that may cause undesired
long enough for HomeLink to pick up the operation.
signal. U.S. gate operators time-out in the
same manner.
142
This equipment complies with FCC Note: This clears all stored codes. You
radiation exposure limits set forth for an cannot erase individual buttons.
uncontrolled environment. End Users must Note: You can program a maximum of
follow the specific operating instructions three devices. To change or replace any of
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This the three devices after they have been
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm) initially programmed, you must either clear
from the user and must not be co-located all codes, or reprogram each individual
or operating in conjunction with any other button.
antenna or transmitter.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE erase the programmed function buttons for
DOOR OPENER security reasons.
To clear all stored codes in the garage door Reprogramming the Garage Door
opener in your vehicle, use the clear Opener
function. To override one button, use the
If a button on your garage door opener has
reprogram function.
already been programmed, you can
Note: Make sure that the garage door and override it. To program a device to a
security device are free from obstruction previously trained button:
when you are programming. Do not program
1. Press and hold the desired button for
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
approximately 20 seconds until the
Clearing the Garage Door Opener indicator begins to flash.
2. Without releasing the button, proceed
to Step 3 of Programming the
Garage Door Opener to your
Handheld Transmitter.
Programming the Garage Door

Opener to your Handheld
Transmitter
Note: The programming steps below
assume you are programming a HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
E188213 may need to clear or reprogram your
To clear all stored codes in the garage door HomeLink buttons.
opener in the vehicle: Note: Put a new battery in the handheld
1. Press and hold the outer two function transmitter. This allows for quicker training
buttons simultaneously for and accurate transmission of the
approximately 10 seconds until the radio-frequency signal.
indicator above the buttons flashes Note: Make sure that the garage door and
rapidly. security device are free from obstruction
2. When the indicator flashes, release the when you are programming. Do not program
buttons. the system with the vehicle in the garage.
143
Note: If the indicator stays on, the

programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door.
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
E188213 vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
To program your in-vehicle HomeLink
function button with your handheld Programming the Garage Door
transmitter: Opener to your Garage Door
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the Opener Motor
garage, switch your vehicle on, but do
not start your vehicle. Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
2. Press and release one of the three when you are programming. Do not program
HomeLink function buttons that you the system with the vehicle in the garage.
would like to program.
Note: The indicator should begin to flash.
If the indicator does not flash, press and
hold the function button for 20 seconds until
the indicator begins to flash.
3. Hold your handheld garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program. E142659
4. Press and hold the handheld 1. Press the learn button on the garage
transmitter button you want to door opener motor and then you have
program while watching the indicator 30 seconds to complete the next two
on HomeLink. Continue to hold the steps.
handheld button until the HomeLink
indicator flashes rapidly or is 2. Return to your vehicle.
continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door.
144
2. Release the handheld transmitter

button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need
to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
E188212 4. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
3. Press and hold one of the three
HomeLink function buttons you want Additional assistance can be found online
to program for two seconds, then at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling
release. the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
4. Repeat Step 3. Depending on your
brand of garage door opener, you may GARAGE DOOR OPENER
need to repeat this sequence a third ADDITIONAL ASSISTANCE
time.
Additional assistance can be found online Video Setup Instructions
at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling
the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. Universal Garage Door Opener: HomeLink
Universal Garage Door Opener: HomeLink
Programming the Garage Door for Genie Intellicode 2
Opener to your Gate Opener Motor
Universal Garage Door Opener Homelink for
Gate Operator / Canadian Genie Intellicode
Programming Additional assistance can be found online
Canadian radio-frequency laws require at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised that you
unplug the device during the cycling process
to prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release your handheld
transmitter, every two seconds, until
the HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
145
USB Ports
LOCATING THE USB PORTS PLAYING MEDIA USING THE

USB PORT
Data Transfer USB Ports
E250655
WARNING: Driving while distracted
The USB ports could be in the following and injury. We strongly recommend that
locations: you use extreme caution when using any
• On the lower instrument panel. device that may take your focus off the
• Inside the center console.
safe operation of your vehicle. We
Note: These USB ports can also charge recommend against the use of any
devices. hand-held device while driving and
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have encourage the use of voice-operated
data transfer capabilities. systems when possible. Make sure you
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF that may affect the use of electronic
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified devices while driving.
cables and adapters may not work.
Connect your device to a data transfer USB
Charge Only USB Ports port.
Press the audio button on the
E263583
home screen.
E100027
The USB ports could be in the following
locations: Select Sources.
• On the lower instrument panel. Select the USB option.
• Inside the center console.
• On the windshield, behind the rear view Press to play a track. Press again
mirror. to pause the track.
Press to skip to the next track.

Press and hold to fast forward
through the track.
Press once to return to the
beginning of a track. Repeatedly
press to return to previous
tracks.
Press and hold to fast rewind.
E361781
CHARGING A DEVICE
Connect your device to the USB port.
146
USB Ports
Data Transfer USB Ports
E250655
You can charge your device through the

data transfer USB port when SYNC is on.
Charge Only USB Ports
E263583
You can charge your device through the

charge only USB port when the vehicle is
in accessory mode or when the vehicle is
running.
147
Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET Below the Instrument Panel
The power outlet can power devices using

a 12 V outlet adapter.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
When you switch the vehicle on, you can
use the socket to power 12 V appliances
with a stable current rating of 15 A. Do not
use the power point over the vehicle
capacity of 12 V DC 180 watts or a fuse E395979
could blow. Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points. This could result in damage
Inside the Center Console
to vehicle systems. Do not hang any
accessory from the accessory plug. Always
keep the power point caps closed when
not in use. Do not insert objects other than
an accessory plug into the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods. E395978
LOCATING THE POWER

OUTLETS
The power outlets are located in the media
bin below the instrument panel and inside
the center console bin.
148
Wireless Accessory Charger
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS Do not place metal objects, for example

remote controls, coins and candy
ACCESSORY CHARGER wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
The wireless accessory charger allows you heat up and degrade the charging
to charge one compatible Qi wireless performance, in addition to causing
charging device on the charging area. interruptions in charging.
Charging could be interrupted, degraded,
WIRELESS ACCESSORY or could stop if any of the following occur:
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS • The system detects a foreign object.
• The device is misaligned on the
charging area.
WARNING: Wireless charging
• The device moves on the active
devices can affect the operation of
charging area when the vehicle is in
implanted medical devices, including
motion.
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we • The vehicle ambient temperature is too
recommend that you consult with your high.
physician. • You attempt to charge a non-Qi
compatible device on the wireless
WARNING: Remove all metal charger.
objects like coins and keys from the
charging surface and remove any metal Note: During charging, the device and the
objects attached to your mobile phone charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
before placing the device on the charging battery gets hotter than usual, the device
surface. Some mobile devices or cases may stop charging.
may attract metal objects. Metal objects
on the charging surface or attached to LOCATING THE WIRELESS
the phone may become hot while
charging is active. If an object is left on ACCESSORY CHARGER
or near the charging surface or attached
to the phone while the device is charging, The charging area is in the center
let the objects cool before removing to console media bin below the
prevent personal injury.
E297549
instrument panel.
Keep the charging area clean and remove

foreign objects prior to charging a device. CHARGING A WIRELESS
Do not place items with a magnetic strip
DEVICE
or radio-frequency identification chip, for
Place the device on the center of the
example passports, parking tickets,
charging surface with the charging side
transportation passes or credit cards, near
down. The charging stops after your device
the charging area when charging a device.
reaches a full charge.
Damage could occur to the magnetic strip
or radio-frequency identification chip. You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running or when the touchscreen is on.
149
Displays on the status bar when

E263583 wireless charging is in progress.
Displays on the status bar when

wireless charging has been
E372644
interrupted.
Note: The charging performance may be
affected if your device is in a case. It may be
necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
charge your device.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the
use of unofficial software or firmware. You
should verify charging functionality with your
specific devices in-vehicle.
150
Storage
CUP HOLDERS CENTER CONSOLE
CUP HOLDER PRECAUTIONS OPENING THE CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING: Use caution when

stowing items or hot drinks in the cup
holders. Items could become loose or
spill during hard braking, acceleration or
crashes. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
OPENING THE GLOVE

COMPARTMENT
E375578
Lift the latch to open the center console.
LOCKING THE CENTER CONSOLE

(If Equipped)
E375577
Pull the latch to the left to open the glove

compartment.
E375579
The center console locks when you

electronically lock the doors. The center
console unlocks when you use the remote
control to unlock the driver door.
151
Storage
Note: You cannot lock the center console LOCATING THE GLASSES HOLDER
when the vehicle is on. - COUPE
GLASSES HOLDER
LOCATING THE GLASSES HOLDER

- CONVERTIBLE
E375581
The glasses holder is in the overhead

console.
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
E375580
Press near the center of the door to open

it. Pull out the tray.
152
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING AND STOPPING Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above
the altitude of 5,000 ft (1,524 m) and under
THE ENGINE – PRECAUTIONS the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is
recommended to use the alternative engine
oil. See Capacities and Specifications
WARNING: Extended idling at high (page 363).
engine speeds can produce very high If you stop your vehicle and leave the
temperatures in the engine and exhaust engine idling for long periods, we
system, creating the risk of fire or other recommend that you do one of the
damage. following:
WARNING: Do not park, idle or • Open the windows at least 1 in
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other (2.5 cm).
dry ground cover. The emission system • Set your climate control to outside air.
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
WARNING: Do not start the engine SWITCH
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: Do not use starting

fluid, for example ether, in the air intake
system. Such fluid could cause
immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.
E340581
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger Switching the Ignition Off
compartment. If you smell exhaust
When the ignition is on or in accessory
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
mode, press the push button ignition
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
switch once without your foot on the brake
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
pedal.
The powertrain control system meets all Switching the Ignition to
Canadian interference-causing equipment Accessory Mode
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise. When the ignition is off, press the push
button ignition switch once without your
foot on the brake pedal.
153
All electrical circuits and accessories are 2. Press the push button ignition switch.
operational and the warning lamps and Note: The engine may continue cranking
indicators illuminate. for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: Your vehicle has a battery saver Note: The engine takes longer to start at
feature that shuts your vehicle off when it lower temperatures. It may crank for several
detects a certain amount of battery drain, seconds when very cold.
or after about 30 minutes of inactivity in
accessory mode.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE -
Note: The system may not function if the AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
remote control is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell Before starting your vehicle, check the
phone. following:
Note: You need a valid key inside your • Make sure that the headlamps and
vehicle to switch the ignition on and start electrical accessories are off.
the engine. • Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in
STARTING THE ENGINE park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE - Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in
neutral.
1. Fully press the clutch pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E340581
2. Press the push button ignition switch.

Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
E340581
154
RESTARTING THE ENGINE AFTER We recommend that you do the following

STOPPING IT for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
The system allows you to start the engine that is product certified by
within 20 seconds of switching it off, even Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
if it does not detect a valid passive key. Canadian Standards Association
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine (CSA). This extension cord must be
off, fully press the brake or clutch pedal suitable for use outdoors, in cold
and press the push button ignition switch. temperatures, and be clearly marked
After 20 seconds, you can no longer start Suitable for Use with Outdoor
the engine if the system does not detect a Appliances. Do not use an indoor
valid passive key. extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
When you start the engine, it remains
fire hazard.
running until you press the push button
ignition switch, even if your vehicle does • Use as short an extension cord as
not detect a valid passive key. If you open possible.
and close a door when the engine is • Do not use multiple extension cords.
running, the system searches for a valid • Make sure that when in operation, the
passive key. extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
EQUIPPED)
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, do not remove the wiring from
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER its original location. Do not close the
PRECAUTIONS hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
WARNING: Failure to follow engine • Make sure the heater, heater cord and
block heater instructions could result in extension cord are firmly connected.
property damage or serious personal
injury. • Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
WARNING: Do not use your heater been operating for about 30 minutes.
with ungrounded electrical systems or • Make sure the system is unplugged and
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of properly stowed before starting and
electrical shock. driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
WARNING: Do not fully close the block heater cord plug when not in use.
hood, or allow it to drop under its own • Make sure the heater system is
weight when using the engine block checked for proper operation before
heater. This could damage the power winter.
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage.
155
HOW DOES THE ENGINE BLOCK

HEATER WORK
The engine block heater warms the engine
coolant. This allows the climate control
system to quickly respond. The equipment
includes a heater element installed in the
engine block and a wire harness. You can
connect the system to a grounded 110 volt
AC electrical source.
Note: The engine block heater is most
effective when outdoor temperatures are E340581
below 0°F (-18°C). We recommend the use
of engine block heater to improve engine 4. Press the push button ignition switch.
cold start performance.
STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN
USING THE ENGINE BLOCK YOUR VEHICLE IS STATIONARY -
HEATER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Make sure the receptacle terminals are 1. Shift into park (P).
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with 2. Apply the parking brake.
a dry cloth if necessary.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours speed.
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN

YOUR VEHICLE IS STATIONARY - E340581
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
1. Shift into neutral.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle
speed.
156
STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN

YOUR VEHICLE IS MOVING - YOUR VEHICLE IS MOVING -
MANUAL TRANSMISSION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Switching off the WARNING: Switching off the

engine when your vehicle is still moving engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle. could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags, electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine. restart the engine.
E340581 E340581
1. Press and hold the push button ignition 1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch until the engine stops, or press switch until the engine stops, or press
it three times within two seconds. it three times within two seconds.
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to 2. Shift into neutral (N) and use the
bring your vehicle to a safe stop. brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe
3. Apply the parking brake. stop.
3. Shift into park (P).
157
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the
30-second countdown has expired by
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC ENGINE doing any of the following:
STOP
• Pressing the brake pedal or accelerator
Automatic engine stop switches the engine pedal.
off if it has been idling for an extended • Pressing the OK or RESET button
period to help you save fuel. during the countdown.
HOW DOES AUTOMATIC ENGINE ACCESSING THE PASSIVE KEY

STOP WORK BACKUP POSITION
Automatic engine stop turns the engine
off. The ignition also turns off to save If you are unable to start the engine, do the
battery power. Before the engine shuts following:
down, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display showing a timer
counting down. If you do not intervene
within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down.
Another message appears in the
instrument cluster display to inform you
that the engine has shut down to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC ENGINE

STOP ON AND OFF
3. Switch 30min Max Idle on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. If you switch it off,
it turns on each time you switch the ignition
on.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC ENGINE E386267
STOP
1. Open the center console storage
Note: You cannot permanently switch off compartment lid.
the automatic engine stop feature. When 2. Remove the plastic mat from the
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at console floor.
the next ignition cycle. 3. With the buttons facing upward and
the unlock button facing the front of
your vehicle, place the passive key into
the backup slot.
158
4. With the key in this position, press the If it flashes, engine misfire could be
brake pedal then press the push button occurring. Increased exhaust gas
ignition switch to switch the ignition on temperatures could damage the catalytic
and start your vehicle. converter or other vehicle components.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration,
and have your vehicle checked as soon as
STARTING AND STOPPING possible.
THE ENGINE –
TROUBLESHOOTING Powertrain Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when the engine
STARTING AND STOPPING THE is running, this indicates a
ENGINE – WARNING LAMPS powertrain fault. If it flashes
when you are driving, immediately reduce
Malfunction Indicator Lamp the vehicle speed. Avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration, and have
If it illuminates when the engine
E67028
is running, the on-board
diagnostics system is detecting If both lamps illuminate when the engine
a malfunction of the vehicle emission is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it
control system. is safe to do so. Continuing to drive your
vehicle could cause reduced power or the
engine to stop. Switch the ignition off and
attempt to restart the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays if you exceed the starting time limit. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for 15 minutes. If you cannot start
the engine after 15 minutes passes, have your vehicle imme-
diately checked.
Starting System Fault Displays if you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly
coded key. The system has detected a fault that requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
No Key Detected Displays if the system does not detect a valid passive key.
159
STARTING AND STOPPING THE Note: The engine cranks for a short period
ENGINE – FREQUENTLY ASKED of time and then it stops.
QUESTIONS 4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized
to minimize vehicle emissions and
maximize cabin comfort and fuel
economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time
before the starting system temporarily E340581
disables. If you exceed the starting
time limit, a message may appear and 5. Press the push button ignition switch.
you cannot attempt to start the engine Why does the system not detect a
for at least 15 minutes. passive key?
Why do I experience different driving If the system does not detect a passive
characteristics? key and you are unable to start the
If you disconnect the battery, your engine, insert the passive key into the
vehicle may exhibit some unusual backup position and press the push
driving characteristics for about 5 mi button ignition switch to start the
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is engine. See Accessing the Passive
because the engine management Key Backup Position (page 158).
system must realign itself with the
engine. You can disregard any unusual
driving characteristics during this
period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine after
three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
do the following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
160
Auto-Start-Stop
WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP
WARNING: Apply the parking
The system is designed to help reduce fuel brake, shift into park (P), switch the
consumption and CO2 emissions by ignition off and remove the key before
stopping the engine when it is idling, for you open the hood or have any service
example at traffic lights. or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
AUTO-START-STOP instruction could result in personal injury
PRECAUTIONS - MANUAL or death.
TRANSMISSION
SWITCHING AUTO-START-
WARNING: Apply the parking STOP ON AND OFF
brake, shift into neutral, switch the
ignition off and remove the key before The system turns on when you switch the
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow ignition on.
this instruction could result in personal Press the button to switch the
injury or death. system off.
E121377
WARNING: Apply the parking Note: OFF illuminates in the switch.

brake, shift into neutral, switch the Note: Deactivating the system using the
ignition off and remove the key before button lasts only one key cycle.
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not Press the button again to switch the
switch the ignition off, the engine could system back on.
restart at any time. Failure to follow this Note: The system turns off if it detects a
instruction could result in personal injury malfunction. If the system malfunctions,
or death. have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
AUTO-START-STOP
PRECAUTIONS - AUTOMATIC STOPPING THE ENGINE -
TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION
1. Stop your vehicle.
2. Shift into neutral.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the 3. Release the clutch pedal and the
ignition off and remove the key before accelerator pedal.
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the
this instruction could result in personal system, shift into neutral and release the
injury or death. clutch pedal whenever you stop your vehicle
for more than three seconds.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine stops.
161
Auto-Start-Stop
STOPPING THE ENGINE - RESTARTING THE ENGINE -

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Stop your vehicle, keep your foot on the Press the clutch pedal.
brake pedal and the transmission in drive A message appears in the instrument
(D). cluster display if the system requires you
to take action.
Message Condition Action
Auto StartStop Press a The system needs to restart Press the accelerator pedal,
Pedal to Start Engine the engine but requires your brake pedal or clutch pedal
confirmation. to restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Select The system needs to restart Shift into neutral to restart
Neutral To Start Engine the engine but cannot the engine.
because the transmission is
in gear.
162
Auto-Start-Stop
RESTARTING THE ENGINE - The Auto-Start-Stop indicator

illuminates green when the
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION E121377
engine stops. It flashes amber
and a message appears when you need to
Release the brake pedal or press the take action.
accelerator pedal.
A message appears in the instrument The Auto-Start-Stop indicator
cluster display if the system requires you illuminates gray with a
E146361
to take action. strikethrough when the system
is not available.
AUTO-START-STOP Note: You can display the reason why the
system is not available in the information
INDICATORS display.
WARNING: The system may

require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
AUTO-START-STOP – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUTO-START-STOP – INFORMATION MESSAGES - MANUAL

TRANSMISSION
Auto StartStop Manual The system is not func- Restart the engine yourself.
Restart Required tioning.
163
Auto-Start-Stop
AUTO-START-STOP – A message appears in the instrument

INFORMATION MESSAGES - cluster display if the system requires you
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION to take action.
Auto StartStop Press Brake The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal to
to Start Engine the engine but requires your restart the engine.
confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press a The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal or the
Pedal to Start Engine the engine but requires your accelerator pedal to restart
confirmation. the engine.
164
Auto-Start-Stop
AUTO-START-STOP – Can I permanently switch the

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS system off?
Why does the engine not always No. The system plays an important role in
stop when I expect it to? reducing the fuel consumption and the CO2
emissions.
The system is designed to work in a way
that complements other vehicle systems, Will the frequent engine starts
allowing them to operate at optimum cause parts to wear out?
performance.
Your vehicle has an enhanced battery and
The system does not stop the engine if: starter motor that are designed for the
• The driver door is open. increased number of engine starts.
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
• The heated windshield is on.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
• The battery charge is low.
• The battery temperature is outside the
optimal operating range.
• The engine is required to run to
maintain interior climate and reduce
fogging.
Why does the engine sometimes

restart when I do not expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way
that complements other vehicle systems,
allowing them to operate at optimum
performance.
The system restarts the engine if:
• You switch the heated windshield on.
• You switch maximum defrost on.
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
neutral.
maintain adequate brake system
assistance.
maintain interior climate and reduce
fogging.
165
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL AND REFUELING • Fuels can be harmful if absorbed

through the skin. If you splash fuel on
PRECAUTIONS your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
injury or death if misused or mishandled. contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
WARNING: Fuel may contain Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
benzene, which is a cancer-causing for the treatment of alcoholism.
agent. Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
WARNING: Read and follow all the injury or sickness. Immediately call a
instructions on the pump island. physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
FUEL QUALITY
vehicle.
• Switch the engine off before refueling. SELECTING THE CORRECT FUEL
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel E161513
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases, Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded
excessive or prolonged breathing of gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and octane rating of 87.
permanent injury. Some fuel stations, particularly those in
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
remove contact lenses, if worn, flush rating below 87. The use of these fuels
with water for 15 minutes and seek could result in engine damage that will not
medical attention. Failure to seek be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
166
Fuel and Refueling
For best overall vehicle and engine The use of fuels with metallic compounds
performance, premium fuel with an octane such as methylcyclopentadienyl
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The manganese tricarbonyl, which is a
performance gained by using premium fuel manganese-based fuel additive, will impair
is most noticeable in hot weather as well engine performance and affect the
as other conditions, for example when emission control system.
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
(page 271).
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
FUNNEL
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
the recommended octane rating, contact
compartment floor covering.
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal FILLING A PORTABLE FUEL
vehicle and engine performance. CONTAINER
For additional information, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
was not designed can impair the emission fuel pump nozzle can produce static
control system, cause loss of vehicle electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
performance, and cause damage to the filling an ungrounded fuel container.
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty. Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
Do not use: produce a spark, when filling an
• Diesel fuel. ungrounded fuel container:
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Only use an approved fuel container to
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
or E85 fuel. container on the ground when filling it.
• Fuels containing methanol. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
• Fuels containing metallic-based area).
additives, including manganese-based
compounds. • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl • Do not use a device that holds the fuel
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
167
Fuel and Refueling
ADDING FUEL FROM A PORTABLE

FUEL CONTAINER
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle

of a fuel container or an aftermarket
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
WARNING: Do not pry open the

fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal E157452
injury or death.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel fuel filler inlet.
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
disposal facility. container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from 5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Locating 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 167). back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel add a
system and can damage it. minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart
the engine.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following: Note: You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after refueling
1. Fully open the fuel filler door. to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
168
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING
WARNING: Keep children away
REFUELING SYSTEM OVERVIEW from the fuel pump. Never let children
pump fuel.
WARNING: Do not pry open the

A B fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Stay outside your

vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle.
C WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
E384542 pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
A Fuel filler door.
WARNING: Stop refueling when
B Fuel filler inlet. the fuel pump nozzle automatically
C Fuel tank filler pipe. shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
REFUELING YOUR VEHICLE overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel

WARNING: When refueling always tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
shut the engine off and never allow may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank and fire.
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
WARNING: Wait at least five
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
seconds before removing the fuel pump
extremely hazardous under certain
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
into the fuel tank.
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns
violently and a fuel fire can cause severe 1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
injuries. 2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
169
Fuel and Refueling
E119081
5. When the pump shuts off, wait five

seconds, then raise the fuel pump
nozzle and slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
E139202 your vehicle immediately checked.
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle FUEL TANK CAPACITY
resting on the fuel tank filler pipe.
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
E327438
to increase driving range.
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
A when refueling. Holding the fuel FUEL AND REFUELING –
pump nozzle in position B can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel TROUBLESHOOTING
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
FUEL AND REFUELING –
WARNING LAMPS
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
170
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL AND REFUELING –

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Refueling System Warning
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
instrument cluster display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:

1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel
(page 167). This action should dislodge
any debris that may be preventing the
fuel tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
171
Catalytic Converter
WHAT IS THE CATALYTIC • Use the correct fuel. See Fuel Quality
(page 166).
CONVERTER
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
The catalytic converter is part of your vehicle is moving.
vehicle's emissions system and filters • Avoid running out of fuel.
harmful pollutants from the exhaust gas. • Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
CATALYTIC CONVERTER according to the specified schedule.
PRECAUTIONS Note: Do not make any unauthorized
changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who
manufactures, repairs, or services a fleet of
WARNING: Do not park, idle or vehicles are not permitted to intentionally
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other remove an emission control device or
dry ground cover. The emission system prevent it from working.
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER –
WARNING: The normal operating TROUBLESHOOTING
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system CATALYTIC CONVERTER –
until it has cooled. Use special care when WARNING LAMPS
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
high temperature after only a short system that monitors the emission control
period of engine operation and stays hot system. If any of the following warning
after the engine is switched off. lamps illuminate, this may indicate that
the on-board diagnostics system has
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may detected an emission control system
result in entry of harmful and potentially malfunction.
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust E103308
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes. E67021
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter:

E67028
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug reduced power or the engine to stop.
lead disconnected. Failure to respond to a warning lamp may
• Do not push-start or tow-start your cause damage that your vehicle Warranty
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump may not cover. Have your vehicle checked
Starting the Vehicle (page 280). as soon as possible.
172
Manual Transmission (If Equipped)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
PRECAUTIONS
Do not rest your hand on the gearshift lever
or use the gearshift lever to hang and
support objects. This could cause damage
to the transmission not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
or use the clutch pedal to keep your vehicle
stationary when waiting on a hill. This
could cause damage to the clutch not
covered by the vehicle warranty. E99067
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal could
cause increased shift efforts, or premature 3. Raise the collar and shift into reverse.
transmission wear to components or
damage to the transmission. CHECKING THE MANUAL
If any gear is not fully engaged, fully press TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
the clutch pedal and shift into neutral.
Release the clutch pedal for a moment,
fully press the clutch pedal again and shift
into desired gear.
SHIFTING INTO REVERSE

Do not shift into reverse when your vehicle
is moving. This could cause damage to the
transmission not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the clutch pedal and shift
into neutral.
E360040
Transmission fluid fill level is 0.12 in

(3 mm) from the oil fill plug.
173
Manual Transmission (If Equipped)
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

LEVEL
The clutch and brake systems share the
same fluid reservoir. See Checking the
Brake Fluid (page 182).
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
See Manual Transmission Fluid
Capacity and Specification (page 378).
CLUTCH FLUID CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 363).
174
Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) if a fuse is blown.
PRECAUTIONS
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) unless the key or remote control is inside
your vehicle.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully Note: The electronic parking brake could
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to apply when you power your vehicle on with
follow this instruction could result in the selector in park (P).
personal injury, death or property Note: The electronic parking brake could
damage. apply if you shift to park (P) without fully
pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal Note: The electronic parking brake could
simultaneously. Applying both pedals apply if you shift to park (P) on a slope.
simultaneously for more than a few Note: Do not manually release the parking
seconds limits vehicle performance, brake when the selector is in park (P). See
which may result in difficulty maintaining Automatically Releasing the Electric
speed in traffic and could lead to serious Parking Brake (page 188).
injury.
WARNING: Apply the parking REVERSE (R)

brake, shift into park (P), switch the
vehicle off and remove the key or remote
control before you leave your vehicle. WARNING: Shift into reverse (R)
Failure to follow this instruction could only when your vehicle is stationary.
In reverse (R) power is transmitted to the
driven wheels.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
POSITIONS NEUTRAL (N)
PARK (P)
WARNING: In neutral (N) your
vehicle is free to roll.
WARNING: Shift into park (P) only
when your vehicle is stationary. In neutral (N) power is not transmitted to
the driven wheels.
In park (P) power is not transmitted to the
driven wheels. DRIVE (D)
Note: A tone sounds if you attempt to exit In drive (D) power is transmitted to the
your vehicle without the vehicle in park (P). driven wheels.
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) if the 12 V battery has run out of charge.
175
LOW (L) - VEHICLES WITHOUT: 3. Move the transmission selector lever

PADDLE SHIFTERS to select a position.
In low (L) your vehicle decelerates more

noticeably than in drive (D) when the SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO
accelerator pedal is released. GEAR - VEHICLES WITH:
Note: We recommend using this mode for PADDLE SHIFTERS
driving on hilly or mountainous roads or
when towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer The transmission selector lever is on the
(page 271). center console.
MANUAL (M) - VEHICLES WITH:

PADDLE SHIFTERS
In manual (M) you can select a specific
gear. See Manually Shifting Gears (page
177).
Note: We recommend using this mode for
driving on hilly or mountainous roads or
when towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
(page 271).
E373789
SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
GEAR - VEHICLES WITHOUT:
2. Press the button on the transmission
PADDLE SHIFTERS selector lever.
The transmission selector lever is on the 3. Move the transmission selector lever
center console. to select a position.
POSITION INDICATORS -
VEHICLES WITHOUT: PADDLE
SHIFTERS
E379771

2. Press the button on the transmission E341619
selector lever.
176
The instrument cluster displays the current Note: Prolonged driving with high engine
position. speed could cause vehicle damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Note: Drive modes could affect when the
vehicle shifts into the requested gear.
POSITION INDICATORS -
VEHICLES WITH: PADDLE
SHIFTERS
The instrument cluster displays the current
position.
E144821
Note:
E317778 The position could illuminate on the
selector. Manually Shifting Gears in Drive (D)
Use this feature to temporarily change
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION gears.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS Note: We recommend using this feature for
engine braking or driving on hilly or
Transmission Not in Park (P) mountainous roads.
Audible Warning • Pull any paddle to switch the feature
Sounds if any of the following occur: on.
• You switch your vehicle off before • Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift.
shifting into park (P). • Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift.
• You open the driver door before shifting • Hold the (+) paddle for a few seconds
into park (P). to switch the feature off.
Note: The feature switches off after a short
MANUALLY SHIFTING GEARS period of time if you do not pull either
paddle.
SHIFTING USING THE PADDLE Manually Shifting Gears in Manual (M)
SHIFTERS (If Equipped)
Use this feature to select a specific gear.
The instrument cluster displays the current Note: We recommend using this feature for
gear. The current gear flashes when your engine braking, driving on hilly or
vehicle cannot shift into the requested mountainous roads, or when towing a trailer.
gear. Your vehicle will not shift if the See Towing a Trailer (page 271).
requested gear raises or lowers the engine
speed beyond the limit. • Pull any paddle to switch the feature
on.
Your vehicle could shift when you fully • Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift.
press the accelerator or brake pedal.
177
• Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift.

• Shift to drive (D) to switch the feature
off.
BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
WHAT IS BRAKE SHIFT

INTERLOCK
Brake shift interlock allows you to shift
your vehicle out of park (P) in the event of E373897
an electrical malfunction or emergency.
3. Lift the shifter boot upward.
BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not drive your

vehicle until you verify that the
stoplamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this

procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
apply the parking brake prior to doing
this procedure. Use wheel chocks if
appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is

fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
USING BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK

E373790
1. Set the parking brake.
4. Locate the release lever on the front
2. Insert a screwdriver between the shifter side of the transmission selector lever.
boot material and trim ring to access
the retainer tabs from the top panel 5. Using a screwdriver, move the release
trim ring. lever back toward the front of the
transmission selector lever.
178
6. When holding the release lever in the

backward position, move the
transmission selector lever out of the
park (P) position and into another gear.
179
Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

Traction-Lok™ and TORSEN™
Axles
These axles provide improved traction on
slippery and loose surfaces, particularly
when one wheel is on a poor traction
surface. Under normal conditions, these
axles function like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of tire sizes other than the
manufacturer’s specified tire size on these
axles could result in a permanent reduction
in effectiveness. This loss does not affect
your normal driving and should not be
noticeable.
180
Brakes
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS The warning lamp also momentarily

illuminates when you switch the ignition
Wet brakes result in reduced braking on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a does not illuminate when you switch the
few times when leaving a car wash or ignition on, or begins to flash at any time,
driving from standing water to dry the have the system checked by an authorized
brakes. dealer.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and The warning lamp illuminates
regulations in the country where your vehicle when you engage the parking
was originally built, the stoplamps could
E270480
brake and the ignition is on.
flash during heavy braking. The hazard E67024 If it illuminates when your vehicle
warning flashers could also turn on when is moving, make sure the parking
your vehicle comes to a stop. brake is disengaged. If the
parking brake is disengaged, this indicates
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM low brake fluid level or a brake system
fault. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS The warning lamp also momentarily
illuminates when you switch the ignition
The anti-lock braking system does not on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it
eliminate the risk of crash when: does not illuminate when you switch the
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in ignition on, or begins to flash at any time,
front of you. have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake In the event the accelerator pedal
pedal could pulse and travel further. becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
INDICATORS stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
This system helps you maintain steering switch the engine off and apply the parking
control during emergency stops by keeping brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
the brakes from locking. any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
If the warning lamp illuminates to the nearest authorized dealer.
E67020
when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Your Note: Brake over accelerator will not
vehicle continues to have normal braking function in Drag and Track modes.
without the anti-lock brake system
function. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
181
Brakes
LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID

RESERVOIR
See Under Hood Overview (page 297).
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
WARNING: Do not use any fluid

other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid

from a sealed container. Contamination
E170684
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake 1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the 2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
loss of vehicle control, serious personal where the brake fluid level is relative
injury or death. to the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
to touch your skin or eyes. If this reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
happens, rinse the affected areas tight, unless you are adding fluid.
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician. Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
WARNING: The brake system Specifications (page 363).
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
See Brake Fluid Specification (page 380).
182
Brakes
BRAKES – It also momentarily illuminates when you

switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
TROUBLESHOOTING is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
BRAKES – WARNING LAMPS flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving your vehicle

with the warning lamp on is dangerous. E270480
A significant decrease in braking The brake indicator momentarily
performance may occur. It may take you E67024
illuminates when you switch the
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your ignition on to confirm the lamp
vehicle checked as soon as possible. is functional. It may also illuminate when
Driving extended distances with the you apply the parking brake and the
parking brake engaged can cause brake ignition is on. If it illuminates when your
failure and the risk of personal injury. vehicle is moving, make sure the parking
brake is disengaged. If the parking brake
If the ABS indicator illuminates is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
E67020
when you are driving, this level or a brake system fault. See an
indicates a malfunction. Your authorized dealer.
vehicle continues to have normal braking
without the anti-lock braking system
function. See an authorized dealer.
BRAKES – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Check Brake System The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
183
Brakes
BRAKES – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
Is it normal for my brakes to make
noise?
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding, or
squeal sound is present, the brake lining
could be worn. Have the system checked.
There is an electrical motor sound

when I press on the brake pedal or
activate the park brake switch. Is
this normal?
Yes, those sounds are the electronic brake
booster or the electronic park brake
operating.
Note: Brake dust could accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is normal as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning Wheels (page
319).
184
Electric Parking Brake
WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC APPLYING THE ELECTRIC

PARKING BRAKE PARKING BRAKE - MANUAL
TRANSMISSION, VEHICLES
The electric parking brake is used to hold
your vehicle on slopes and flat roads. WITH: ECOBOOST™
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC PERFORMANCE PACKAGE
PARKING BRAKE - MANUAL
TRANSMISSION, VEHICLES WARNING: Always set the parking
WITHOUT: ECOBOOST™ brake fully and make sure you shift the
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT gearshift lever to first gear. Switch the
ignition off and remove the key whenever
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If you drive extended

WARNING: Apply the parking distances with the parking brake applied,
brake, shift into first gear, switch the you could cause damage to the brake
ignition off and remove the keys or system.
remote control before you leave your
vehicle. E267156
The electric parking brake
handle is on the center console.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied, 1. Pull the handle up.
you could cause damage to the brake
system. The red warning lamp flashes during
operation and illuminates when the parking
The switch is on the center brake is applied.
E267156
console. Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
1. Pull the switch up. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
The red warning lamp flashes during facing uphill, select first gear and turn the
operation and illuminates when the parking steering wheel away from the curb.
brake is applied. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
Note: You can apply the electric parking facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn
brake when the ignition is off. the steering wheel toward the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing uphill, select first gear and turn the
steering wheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn
the steering wheel toward the curb.
185
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC Note: The electric parking brake could

apply when you shift into park (P). See Park
PARKING BRAKE - (P) (page 175).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION,
VEHICLES WITHOUT: APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
ECOBOOST™ PERFORMANCE PARKING BRAKE -
PACKAGE/GT PERFORMANCE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION,
PACKAGE VEHICLES WITH: ECOBOOST™
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT
WARNING: Apply the parking brake PERFORMANCE PACKAGE
and make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
Power the vehicle off and remove the
keys or remote control whenever you WARNING: Apply the parking brake
leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this and make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
instruction could result in personal injury Power the vehicle off and remove the
or death. keys or remote control whenever you
leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this
WARNING: If you drive extended instruction could result in personal injury
distances with the parking brake applied, or death.
you could cause damage to the brake
system. WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
WARNING: The electric parking you could cause damage to the brake
brake does not operate if the vehicle system.
battery has run out of charge.
WARNING: The electric parking
WARNING: If the parking brake is brake does not operate if the vehicle
fully released, but the brake warning battery has run out of charge.
may not be working properly. Have your WARNING: If the parking brake is
vehicle checked as soon as possible. fully released, but the brake warning
E267156
The electric parking brake switch may not be working properly. Have your
is on the center console. vehicle checked as soon as possible.
1. Pull the switch up. E267156

The electric parking brake
handle is on the center console.
The red warning lamp flashes during
1. Pull the handle up.
brake is applied.
The red warning lamp flashes during
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
brake is applied.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the power is off.
186
Note: The electric parking brake could The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone
apply when you shift into park (P). See Park sounds and the stoplamps turn on when
(P) (page 175). you use the electric parking brake in an
emergency.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
PARKING BRAKE IN AN the handle.
EMERGENCY - VEHICLES Note: Do not apply the electric parking
WITHOUT: ECOBOOST™ brake when your vehicle is moving, except
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE vehicle, you could cause damage to the
brake system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
Pull the switch up and hold it. MANUALLY RELEASING THE
The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE -
sounds and the stoplamps turn on when VEHICLES WITHOUT:
you use the electric parking brake in an ECOBOOST™ PERFORMANCE
emergency.
PACKAGE/GT PERFORMANCE
The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
PACKAGE
the switch.
1. Switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not apply the electric parking 2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the 3. Push the switch down.
electric parking brake to slow or stop your The red warning lamp turns off.
vehicle, you could cause damage to the
brake system. Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
PARKING BRAKE IN AN 2. Pull the switch upward and hold it.
EMERGENCY - VEHICLES 3. Shift into gear.
WITH: ECOBOOST™ 4. Press the accelerator pedal until engine
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT has developed sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE the hill.
You can use the electric parking brake to 5. Release the switch and pull away in a
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency. normal manner.
Pull the electric parking brake handle up
and hold it.
187
MANUALLY RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE - AUDIBLE WARNING
VEHICLES WITH: ECOBOOST™
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone
PERFORMANCE PACKAGE continues after you have released the
parking brake, this indicates a malfunction.
1. Switch the ignition on. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
3. Push the electric parking brake handle
down. RELEASING THE ELECTRIC
The red warning lamp turns off. PARKING BRAKE IF THE
VEHICLE BATTERY HAS RUN
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer OUT OF CHARGE
2. Pull the electric parking brake handle WARNING: The electric parking
upward and hold it. brake does not operate if the vehicle
3. Shift into gear. battery has run out of charge.
4. Press the accelerator pedal until engine Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
has developed sufficient torque to battery to release the electric parking brake
prevent your vehicle from rolling down if the vehicle battery has run out of charge.
the hill. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
5. Release the handle and pull away in a 280).
normal manner.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING TROUBLESHOOTING
THE ELECTRIC PARKING
BRAKE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
WARNING LAMPS
1. Close the driver door.
2. Shift into gear. Brake System
3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull It illuminates red when you apply
away in a normal manner. the parking brake and your
E270480
vehicle is on. If the lamp flashes
when the parking brake has been
E67024
released, this indicates the
parking brake system requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
188
Electric Parking Brake When the lamp illuminates

E146190
yellow, it indicates a malfunction
E67024
in the electric parking brake.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – INFORMATION MESSAGES - VEHICLES

WITHOUT: ECOBOOST™ PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT PERFORMANCE
PACKAGE
Message Details
Park Brake Malfunction The electric parking brake has malfunctioned. Have your
Service Now vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Not Released The electric parking brake has not released. Manually release
the electric parking brake. If the message continues to appear,
have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Not Applied The electric parking brake has not applied. Apply the electric
parking brake. If the message continues to appear, have your
Park Brake Use Switch to The electric parking brake has not automatically released.
Release Manually release the electric parking brake.
To Release: Press Brake You have not pressed the brake pedal. Press the brake pedal
and Switch to release the parking brake.
Park Brake Limited Func- The electric parking brake has malfunctioned. Have your
tion Service Required vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Maintenance The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
Mode mode that is used to allow service of the brakes. Have your
Park Brake System Over- The electric parking brake has overheated. Wait for the elec-
heated tric parking brake to cool down.
Park Brake Released The electric parking brake is released.
Release Park Brake The electric parking brake has not released. Manually release
Park Brake Applied The electric parking brake is applied.
189
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – INFORMATION MESSAGES - VEHICLES

WITH: ECOBOOST™ PERFORMANCE PACKAGE/GT PERFORMANCE
PACKAGE
Message Action
Park Brake Malfunction The electric parking brake has malfunctioned. Have your
Service Now vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Not Released The electric parking brake has not released. Manually release
Park Brake Not Applied The electric parking brake has not applied. Apply the electric
parking brake. If the message continues to appear, have your
Park brake handle fault The electric parking brake handle has malfunctioned. Drive
Drive to release park to release the electric parking brake.
brake
Press brake pedal Push You have not pressed the brake pedal. Press the brake pedal
handle down to release and push the handle down to release the parking brake.
park brake
Park Brake Limited Func- The electric parking brake has malfunctioned. Have your
tion Service Required vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Brake maintenance The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
mode mode that is used to allow service of the brakes. Have your
Park Brake System Over- The electric parking brake has overheated. Wait for the elec-
heated tric parking brake to cool down.
Park Brake Off The electric parking brake is released.
Release Park Brake The electric parking brake has not released. Manually release
Park Brake On The electric parking brake is applied.
Drift brake not available The drift brake has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
Service required as soon as possible.
190
Cross Traffic Braking
WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC

BRAKING WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
The system is designed to reduce impact reverse (R) and when using the sensing
damage or assist in avoiding a collision by system.
using the sensors on the rear of your
vehicle to detect a possible collision and WARNING: The system may not
applying the brakes. operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC care and attention. Failure to take care
BRAKING WORK may result in a crash.
The system only reacts for vehicles WARNING: Traffic control systems,
approaching from the sides when you shift fluorescent lamps, inclement weather,
into reverse (R). air brakes, external motors and fans may
affect the correct operation of the
If the system detects a vehicle approaching sensing system. This may cause reduced
your vehicle, it provides a warning through performance or false alerts.
the cross traffic alert system. See What Is
Cross Traffic Alert (page 246). WARNING: Some situations and
The system only applies the brakes for a objects prevent hazard detection, for
short period of time when an event occurs. example, inclement weather,
Take action as soon as you notice the unconventional vehicle types and
system applying the brakes in order to pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
remain in control of your vehicle, the necessary. Failure to follow this
system does not do this for you. instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
Note: You need to enable cross traffic alert death.
for the system to function.
WARNING: Do not use the system
CROSS TRAFFIC BRAKING with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example
PRECAUTIONS a trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is
not able to make corrections for the
additional length of the accessories.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The Note: Certain add-on devices around the
system is designed to be an aid and does bumper or fascia may create false alerts.
not relieve you of your responsibility to For example, large trailer hitches, bicycle or
drive with due care and attention. Failure surfboard racks, license plate brackets,
to follow this instruction could result in bumper covers or any other device that may
the loss of control of your vehicle, block the normal detection zone of the
personal injury or death. system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
191
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to 2. Press Driver Assistance.

the bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned 3. Switch Cross Traffic Braking on or
or bent, it could alter the sensing zone off.
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension
OVERRIDING CROSS TRAFFIC
changes can impact the angle of the sensors BRAKING
and may change the normal detection zone
of the system resulting in inaccurate There could be instances when
measurement of obstacles or false alerts. unexpected or unwanted braking occurs.
Firmly pressing the accelerator pedal or
Note: When you connect a trailer, the switching the feature off overrides the
system may detect the trailer and provide system.
an alert, or the system turns off. If the
system does not turn off, switch the system
off manually after you connect the trailer. CROSS TRAFFIC BRAKING
Note: You may experience reduced system INDICATORS
performance on road surfaces that limit
deceleration. For example, roads with ice, If the system determines that a collision
loose gravel, mud or sand. with an obstacle may occur, full braking
may apply. Bring your vehicle to a stop a
safe distance away from the obstacle.
SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC
A message and warning
BRAKING ON AND OFF indicator appear when the
E293490
system applies the brakes.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
CROSS TRAFFIC BRAKING – TROUBLESHOOTING
CROSS TRAFFIC BRAKING – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Reverse Brake Assist Not Available See Drive the vehicle on a straight road for a
Manual short period. Make sure the parking aids and
cross traffic alert systems are on. If the
message remains on, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Fault Displays when a system error has occurred.
possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Off Displays when cross traffic braking is off.
192
CROSS TRAFFIC BRAKING –

Why is cross traffic braking unavailable?
• Make sure the cross traffic alert system
is on. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
246).
• The vehicle has sustained a rear end
impact. Contact an authorized dealer
to have the sensors checked for proper
coverage and operation.
• An ABS, traction control or stability
control event may have occurred. Cross
traffic braking resumes operation when
the event is complete.
• Make sure there are no blocked or
faulted sensors. See Cross Traffic
Alert (page 246).
• You recently had your vehicle serviced,
or the battery disconnected. Drive your
vehicle a short distance to resume
system operation.
Note: If the answers to why the system is
unavailable do not assist in returning cross
traffic braking to available, have the system
193
Hill Start Assist
WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST

WARNING: The system turns off if
Hill Start Assist applies the brakes to hold there is a malfunction.
your vehicle after you bring it to a stop on
a slope. This makes it easier for you to pull
away without using the parking brake. SWITCHING HILL START
ASSIST ON AND OFF -
HOW DOES HILL START MANUAL TRANSMISSION
ASSIST WORK
You can switch hill start assist on and off
When the system activates, your vehicle on the touchscreen:
remains stationary for a few seconds after 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
you release the brake pedal. This gives you
time to move your foot from the brake 2. Press Driver Assistance.
pedal to the accelerator pedal. The brakes 3. Switch Hill Start Assist on or off.
release when you apply the accelerator
Note: The system remembers the last
pedal and the vehicle begins to move
setting when you start your vehicle.
forward, or the system exceeds the time
allowed for automatically applying the
brakes. SWITCHING HILL START
The system activates when your vehicle is ASSIST ON AND OFF -
in any forward gear and facing uphill, or AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and
facing downhill. Hill start assist is active when you switch
the ignition on. You cannot switch the
HILL START ASSIST system on or off.
PRECAUTIONS
HILL START ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
HILL START ASSIST –
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
WARNING: You must remain in Message Details

your vehicle when the system turns on.
Hill Start Assist Not Displays when
At all times you are responsible for
Available system is not avail-
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
able. Have your
system, and intervening if required.
vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
194
Auto Hold (If Equipped)
HOW DOES AUTO HOLD WORK USING AUTO HOLD

Auto hold applies the brakes to hold your 1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
vehicle after you bring the vehicle to a stop. The auto hold active indicator
This can help when waiting on a hill or in illuminates in the information display.
traffic. 2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
SWITCHING AUTO HOLD ON auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
AND OFF
3. Apply the accelerator and drive off in
a normal manner. The system releases
the brakes and the auto hold active
WARNING: The system does not indicator switches off.
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the Note: The system only activates if you
parking brake. apply enough brake pressure on the brake
pedal to bring the vehicle to a standstill.
WARNING: You must remain in Note: Under certain conditions, the system
your vehicle when the system turns on. could apply the electric parking brake. The
At all times you are responsible for brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
controlling your vehicle, supervising the electric parking brake releases when you
system, and intervening if required. press the accelerator pedal. See
Failure to follow this instruction could Automatically Releasing the Electric
result in the loss of control of your Parking Brake (page 188).
Note: The system switches off if you shift
into reverse (R) or neutral (N) while pressing
You can switch the system on or off by
the brake pedal.
accessing the menu on the touchscreen.
There could be actions that can cause the
auto hold system not to work when the
2. Press Driver Assistance. following occur:
Note: You can only switch the system on • Your vehicle is in stay in temporary
after you close the driver door and fasten neutral mode.
your seatbelt. • The driver door is open or the driver
Note: The system remembers the last seatbelt is unbuckled.
setting when you start your vehicle. • You shift into reverse (R) or neutral (N)
Note: When using an automatic car wash, before the system is active.
make sure to switch auto hold off, or shift
to neutral (N) with the brake pedal applied AUTO HOLD INDICATORS
to ensure auto hold is not active.
E323448
active.
195
Auto Hold (If Equipped)

E323449
on but cannot hold your vehicle
at a standstill at this particular
time.
196
Traction Control
WHAT IS TRACTION CONTROL Press the switch again to turn the traction
control system back on to normal
The traction control system helps to avoid operation.
drive wheel spin and loss of traction. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
HOW DOES TRACTION beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
CONTROL WORK
TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system INDICATOR
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces power at the System Indicator Lights
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces power in order to
E375919
increase traction.
SWITCHING TRACTION TRACTION CONTROL –

CONTROL ON AND OFF TROUBLESHOOTING
TRACTION CONTROL – WARNING

WARNING: Operating your vehicle LAMPS
with the traction control disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle System Messages
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury The traction control light
and death. temporarily illuminates on
E138639 start-up and flashes when
activated by a driving condition.
E130458
The traction control off light temporarily
The traction control system turns on each illuminates on start-up and stays on:
time you switch the ignition on.
• When you switch the traction control
The button for the stability and traction system off.
control system is on the instrument panel.
• When you select an alternative stability
Press and release the button to switch control mode.
traction control off. The stability control
• If a problem occurs in the system.
system remains fully active, to switch it off,
press and hold the button for a few
seconds, then release.
When you switch traction control off, a
message and an illuminated icon appear
on the instrument cluster.
197
Stability Control
HOW DOES STABILITY • The stability and traction control light

flashes.
CONTROL WORK
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced power.
WARNING: Vehicle modifications The stability control system has several
involving braking system, aftermarket features built into it to help you maintain
roof racks, suspension, steering system, control of your vehicle:
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics Electronic Stability Control
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic Electronic stability control enhances your
stability control system. In addition, vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral
installing any stereo speakers may slides by applying brakes to one or more
interfere with and adversely affect the of the wheels individually and, if necessary,
electronic stability control system. reducing power.
Reducing the effectiveness of the Curve Control
electronic stability control system could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle Curve control enhances your vehicle’s
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury ability to follow the road when cornering
and death. severely or avoiding objects in the roadway.
Curve control operates by reducing power
WARNING: Remember that even and, if necessary, applying brakes to one
advanced technology cannot defy the or more of the wheels individually.
laws of physics. It's always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to Traction Control
inappropriate driver input for the
Traction control enhances your vehicle’s
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
ability to maintain traction of the wheels
road condition can cause you to lose
by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
See What Is Traction Control (page 197).
of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator's ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
If a driving condition activates either the

stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
198
Stability Control
SWITCHING STABILITY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
E130458
The system turns on each time you switch
the power on.
Press and hold the stability and traction
control button for a few seconds and then
release to switch the system off.
Shifting into reverse (R) will disable the
system.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Switching
Traction Control On and Off (page 197).
E72903
STABILITY CONTROL
A Vehicle without stability control INDICATOR
skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control If it does not illuminate when you
maintaining control on a slippery switch the power on, or remains
E375918
surface. on, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
STABILITY CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
STABILITY CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Service AdvanceTrac Displays when the system detects a condi-
tion that requires service. Have the system
serviced as soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off The status of the system when you disable
it.
AdvanceTrac On The status of the system when you enable
it.
AdvanceTrac SPORT MODE The system is in sport mode.
199
Steering
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

WARNING: If the system detects
HOW DOES ELECTRIC POWER an error, you may not feel a difference in
STEERING WORK the steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
The electric power steering system assists soon as possible. Failure to do so may
the brake system to help operate result in loss of steering control.
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Adapt your speed and driving behavior
according to reduced steering assist.
If your vehicle loses electrical power or
detects a concern when you are driving, Extreme continuous steering may increase
the system switches to reduced steering the effort to steer. This occurs to prevent
assist or manual steering. Additionally, internal overheating and damage to the
whenever disconnecting the battery or steering system. If this occurs, you will not
installing a new one, you must drive your lose the ability to steer your vehicle
vehicle a short distance before the system manually nor will it cause damage to the
relearns the strategy and reactivates all system. Normal steering and driving allows
systems. the system to cool down and steering
assist returns to normal.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING Note: There is no fluid reservoir to check or
PRECAUTIONS fill.
STEERING –
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks
TROUBLESHOOTING
that continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays STEERING – WARNING
in the information display. Stop your INDICATORS
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the vehicle off. After at least 10 The electric power steering
seconds, switch the vehicle on and system indicator illuminates if
watch the information display for a E223375
the system detects a fault during
steering system warning message. If a the continuous diagnostic checks.
steering system warning message Note: If a red warning message displays,
returns, have the system checked as stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
soon as possible. so.
200
Steering
STEERING – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. Have your
Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have your
Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. Have your
Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now The steering system has detected a condi-
tion that could prevent you from starting
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
201
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PARKING AID PRECAUTIONS Note: If your vehicle sustains damage

leaving the sensors misaligned, this will
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
reverse (R) and when using the sensing the rear parking aid detects the trailer and
system. provides an alert. Disable the parking aid
when you connect a trailer to prevent the
WARNING: The system may not alert.
detect objects with surfaces that absorb Note: Connected trailers might be detected
reflection. Always drive with due care by the vehicle and parking aid turns off
and attention. Failure to take care may automatically in those instances.
result in a crash.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
WARNING: Traffic control systems, around the bumper or fascia may create
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, false alerts. For example, large trailer
air brakes, external motors and fans may hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
affect the correct operation of the brackets, bumper covers or any other device
sensing system. This may cause reduced could block the normal detection zone of
performance or false alerts. the parking aid system. Aftermarket spare
tires or spare tire covers mounted to the rear
WARNING: The system may not tailgate could cause false alerts from the
detect small or moving objects, park aid system. Remove the add-on device
particularly those close to the ground. to prevent false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
WARNING: The parking aid system and large accumulations of dirt. If the
can only assist you to detect objects sensors are covered, the system's accuracy
when your vehicle is moving at parking can be affected.
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking Do not clean the sensors with sharp
aid system. objects.
WARNING: The system may not SWITCHING PARKING AID ON

function if the sensor is blocked.
AND OFF
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not Muting the Audible Tone
function. Rain, snow and spray can all Shift into reverse (R) and press
limit sensor performance. the button on the rear view
E383616
camera display screen to switch
WARNING: If damage occurs in the the system's audible tone on and off.
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as Note: You can only switch the audible tone
possible. on and off. The parking aid system remains
on at all times.
202
REAR PARKING AID LOCATING THE REAR PARKING

AID SENSORS
WHAT IS THE REAR PARKING AID
Rear parking sensors detect objects behind
your vehicle when in reverse (R).
REAR PARKING AID LIMITATIONS

There is a decreased coverage area at the
outer corners.
The rear parking aid sensors are active
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 71 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper. E130178
The rear parking aid detects large objects
when you shift into reverse (R) and any of The rear parking aid sensors are in the rear
the following occur: bumper.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a
low speed. REAR PARKING AID AUDIBLE
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object WARNINGS
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
at a low speed.
approaches an object. As your vehicle
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a moves closer to an object, the rate of the
low speed and an object is moving tone increases. The warning tone
towards your vehicle, for example continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
another vehicle at a low speed. (30 cm) or less from the rear bumper.
The system shall provide no audible If your vehicle remains stationary for a few
warning for the object behind the vehicle seconds, the audible warning turns off. If
when in neutral (N) gear. your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
Note: When the parking aid system sounds
a tone, the audio system could reduce the
set volume.
203
PARKING AID INDICATORS • As the distance to the object

decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grey.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R). When you
stop your vehicle, visual indication turns
off after four seconds.
If the parking aids are not available, the
distance indicator blocks do not display.
PARKING AIDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
PARKING AIDS – INFORMATION

MESSAGES
E366441
If a fault is present in the parking aids, a
The system provides object distance warning message appears in the
indication through the center display. instrument cluster or the touchscreen.
Message Action
Park Aid Fault The system detects a condition that

requires service. Have your vehicle checked
Sensor Blocked Inclement weather, ice, mud, or water is
blocking the sensor, causing the system to
become unavailable. You can typically
clean the sensor to resolve.
204
Rear View Camera
WHAT IS THE REAR VIEW LOCATING THE REAR VIEW

CAMERA CAMERA
The rear view camera provides a video The rear view camera is on the luggage
image of the area behind your vehicle when compartment door. It provides a video
the transmission is in reverse (R). image of the area behind your vehicle.
REAR VIEW CAMERA REAR VIEW CAMERA GUIDE

PRECAUTIONS LINES
Note: Active guide lines and fixed guide
WARNING: The rear view camera lines are only available when the
system is a reverse aid supplement transmission is in reverse (R).
device that still requires the driver to use Note: The centerline is only available if the
it in conjunction with the interior and active or fixed guide lines are on.
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
Note: When the battery is disconnected,
the fixed guidelines may not function until
WARNING: Objects that are close
you restart your vehicle. Make sure the
to either corner of the bumper or under
center display shuts down in between
the bumper, might not be seen on the
ignition cycles.
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system. Note: When the battery is disconnected,
the active guidelines may not function until
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle you drive your vehicle a short distance and
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction exceed 12.4 mph (20 km/h).
WARNING: Use caution when the

tailgate is ajar. If the tailgate is ajar, the
camera is out of position and the video
image could be incorrect. All guide lines
disappear when the tailgate is ajar.
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when

turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
Note: If the image comes on while the

transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
205
Rear View Camera
Use caution while reversing. Objects in the

red zone are closest to your vehicle and
objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects get closer to your vehicle as they
move from the green zone to the yellow or
red zones. Use the side view mirrors and
rear view mirror to get better coverage on
both sides and rear of your vehicle.
REAR VIEW CAMERA

SETTINGS
ZOOMING THE REAR VIEW

CAMERA IN AND OUT
WARNING: When manual zoom is

on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Selectable settings for this feature are

zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the
E306774 symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is zoom off.
A. Active guide lines.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
B. Centerline. object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
C. Fixed guide line: Green zone. image keeps the bumper in the image to
D. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone. provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
E. Fixed guide line: Red zone.
(R).
F. Rear bumper.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
Active guide lines only show with fixed the transmission is in reverse (R).
guide lines. To use active guide lines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guide lines Note: Only the centerline shows when you
toward an intended path. If the steering enable manual zoom.
wheel position changes while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the SWITCHING REAR VIEW CAMERA
intended path. DELAY ON AND OFF
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines do not 2. Press Driver Assistance.
display when the steering wheel position 3. Press Rear View Camera.
is straight.
206
Rear View Camera
4. Switch Rear View Camera Delay on or

off.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
207
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL SETTING THE CRUISE

CONTROL SPEED
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: When you are going
Requirements downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed system does not apply the brakes.
is greater than 20 km/h in metric units or
15 mph in imperial units. Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either button to set the
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL E246884 current speed.
ON AND OFF
E246885
WARNING: Do not use cruise Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This Note: The indicator changes color in the
could result in loss of vehicle control, instrument cluster display.
serious injury or death.
Changing the Set Speed
The cruise controls are on the steering Press and release the button to
wheel. E246884 increase the set speed in small
increments.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press the button to activate the Press and hold the button to accelerate.
system. When the system Release the button when you reach your
E332905
activates, the set speed is equal preferred speed.
to the current vehicle speed or 20 km/h (15 Press and release the button to
mph), whichever is greater. If the speed is E246885 decrease the set speed in small
too low, or other conditions are not correct increments.
for cruise control activation, the system
enters standby mode. Press and hold the button to decelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
Switching Cruise Control Off preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
Press the button when the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
system is active or switch the
E332905 change. When you release the accelerator
ignition off.
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
Note: When you switch cruise control off, you previously set.
the set speed clears.
208
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED

Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
E308130
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED

Press the button.
E308130
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
E71340
209
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL WORK - MANUAL WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
TRANSMISSION entering or leaving a highway, on roads
with intersections or roundabouts, roads
Adaptive cruise control uses a radar sensor without visible lanes of travel, roads that
to adjust your vehicle speed to maintain a are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
set gap between you and the vehicle in slopes.
front of you in the same lane.
WARNING: The system is not a
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE crash warning or avoidance system.
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
WORK - AUTOMATIC other than those recommended because
TRANSMISSION this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go in a loss of vehicle control, which could
uses radar and camera sensors to maintain result in serious injury.
a set gap between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you while following it to WARNING: Do not use the system
a complete stop. Stop and go can also be in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
set to follow a vehicle directly in front of rain, spray or snow.
you and adjust the set speed, while you are
at a complete stop. When Following a Vehicle
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL WARNING: When following a

PRECAUTIONS vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
WARNING: You are responsible for Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
controlling your vehicle at all times. The to follow this instruction could result in
system is designed to be an aid and does personal injury or death.
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure Hilly Condition Usage
the loss of control of your vehicle, You should select a lower gear when the
personal injury or death. system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes,
WARNING: Do not use adaptive for example in mountainous areas.
cruise control on winding roads, in heavy
traffic or when the road surface is
slippery. This could result in loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
210
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

LIMITATIONS WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
Sensor Limitations structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: On rare occasions,

detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system

malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
WARNING: Large contrasts in

outside lighting can limit sensor E371924
performance.
1. Camera.
WARNING: The system only warns
2. Radar sensor.
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning The camera is on the windshield behind
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes the interior mirror.
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
or death. Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
detect stationary or slow moving Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h). dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
WARNING: The system does not paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
detect pedestrians or objects in the road. sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
WARNING: The system does not the camera or the sensor. When something
detect oncoming vehicles in the same blocks the sensor, the system cannot
lane. detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control
WARNING: The system may not – Information Messages (page 224).
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
211
The radar sensor has a limited field of view. If something hits the front end of your
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect vehicle or damage occurs, the
a vehicle later than expected in some radar-sensing zone may change. This could
situations. The lead vehicle image does cause missed or false vehicle detection.
not illuminate if the system does not Optimal system performance requires a
detect a vehicle in front of you. clear view of the road by the
Detection issues can occur: windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF
- MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 208).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

On
system. When the system
E144529
activates, the set speed is equal
to whichever is greater, the current vehicle
speed, or 20 km/h when in metric units or
15 mph when in imperial units. If the speed
is too low, or other conditions are not
E71621 correct for adaptive cruise control
activation, the system enters standby
A When driving on a different line mode.
than the vehicle in front.
B With vehicles that edge into your The indicator, current gap setting and set
lane. The system can only detect speed appear in the instrument cluster
these vehicles once they move display.
fully into your lane.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
C There may be issues with the Off
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out Press the button when the
of a bend or curve in the road. system is in standby mode or
E144529
switch the ignition off.
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly.
212
Note: When you switch the system off, the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
set speed clears.
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE The system may cancel if:
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF • The tires lose traction.
- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION • You apply the parking brake.
The system may cancel and set the parking
The cruise controls are on the steering brake if:
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 208).
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control the driver door after adaptive cruise
On control stops your vehicle.
• Adaptive cruise control holds your
Press the button to activate the vehicle at a stop continuously for more
system. When the system than three minutes.
E144529
activates, the set speed is equal
to whichever is greater, the current vehicle The system may deactivate or prevent
speed, or 20 km/h when in metric units or activating when requested if:
15 mph when in imperial units. If the speed • The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
is too low, or other conditions are not
• The brake temperature is too high.
correct for adaptive cruise control
activation, the system enters standby • There is a failure in the system or a
mode. When you are below 20 km/h when related system.
in metric units or 15 mph when in imperial
units, adaptive cruise control does not
activate unless you are following another
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
vehicle. CRUISE CONTROL SPEED -
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster Drive to the speed you prefer.
display.
Press the SET+ or SET- buttons
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control E246884 to set the current speed.
Off
Press the button when the E246885
system is in standby mode or

E144529
switch the ignition off. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: When you switch the system off, the The indicator, current gap setting and set
set speed clears. speed appear in the instrument cluster
display.
213
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE

CRUISE CONTROL SPEED -
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the SET+ or SET- buttons
E246884 to set the current speed.
E246885
E372630
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a The indicator, current gap setting and set
vehicle detected in front of you. speed appear in the instrument cluster
Note: When adaptive cruise control is display.
active, the speedometer may vary slightly A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
from the set speed displayed in the vehicle detected in front of you.
Manually Changing the Set Speed

Press the SET+ button to
increase the set speed in small
E246884
increments. Press and hold the

SET+ button to increase set speed in large
increments. Release the button when the
indicated set speed reaches the preferred
speed.
Press the SET- button to
E246885decrease the set speed in small E372630
SET- button to decrease the set speed in Note: When adaptive cruise control is
large increments. Release the button when active, the speedometer may vary slightly
the indicated set speed reaches the from the set speed displayed in the
preferred speed. instrument cluster display.
You can also press the accelerator or brake Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer. from a Complete Stop
Press the SET+ or SET- button to select
the current speed as the set speed. Press the SET+ or SET- buttons
E246884 while keeping the brake pedal
The system may apply the brakes to slow fully pressed.
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed continuously displays in the E246885
instrument cluster display when the
system is active.
214
The set speed adjusts to 20 km/h when in

metric units or 15 mph when in imperial
units.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Note: The system activates from a
complete stop only when it detects a lead
vehicle in close proximity.
Manually Changing the Set Speed

E372631
Press the SET+ button to
increase the set speed in small
E246884
The selected gap appears in the
increments. Press and hold the instrument cluster display as shown by the
SET+ button to increase set speed in large bars in the image.
increments. Release the button when the
indicated set speed reaches the preferred Note: The gap setting is time dependent
speed. and therefore, the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Press the SET- button to Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
E246885decrease the set speed in small appropriate to the driving conditions.
SET- button to decrease the set speed in Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
large increments. Release the button when
the indicated set speed reaches the Graphic Gap Distance Dynamic
preferred speed. Display, Behavior
Bars Indic-
You can also press the accelerator or brake ated
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer. Between
Press the SET+ or SET- button to select Vehicles
the current speed as the set speed.
1 Closest. Sport.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set 2 Close. Normal.
speed continuously displays in the
instrument cluster display when the 3 Medium. Normal.
system is active. 4 Far. Comfort.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE Each time you switch the system on, it
CRUISE CONTROL GAP selects the last chosen gap setting.
Press the button to cycle Following a Vehicle

through the four gap settings. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain the gap setting.
215
Note: When you are following a vehicle and Your vehicle speed returns to the
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive previously set speed and gap setting. The
cruise control may provide a small, set speed displays continuously in the
temporary acceleration to help you pass. information display when the system is
active.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until: Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates the set speed and intend to return to it.
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out RESUMING THE SET SPEED -
of the lane you are in. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow Press the button.
down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap E308130
distance from the vehicle in front of you.
The system only applies limited braking. Your vehicle speed returns to the
You can override the system by applying previously set speed and gap setting. The
the brakes. set speed displays continuously in the
instrument cluster display when the
Note: The brakes may emit noise when system is active.
applied by the system.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
If the system determines that its maximum the set speed and intend to return to it.
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the Resuming the Set Speed from a
instrument cluster display and an indicator Complete Stop (If Equipped)
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action. If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than a few seconds, your vehicle
CANCELING THE SET SPEED accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
Press the button or tap the brake
pedal. If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
E308130 complete stop and remains stationary for
The set speed does not erase. more than a few seconds, an indicator and
message displays.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED -

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Press the button.
E308130
216
E375927
Message Action
Stopped Cruise control does not resume automatic-

ally when this display is active.
Press button to resume If the lead vehicle begins to move, you are
prompted to press the resume button.
Press and release the button or use the
accelerator pedal to resume following the
lead vehicle.
Auto-Resume Displays when on a limited access highway
after following a vehicle to a complete stop.
In this situation, the vehicle resumes
following the lead vehicle without a button
press or pressing the accelerator pedal. The
system can remain in auto-resume state
for approximately 30 seconds, after which
it no longer automatically resumes.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you

override the set speed and gap distance.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
WARNING: If you override the When you override the system, the
system by pressing the accelerator indicator remains blue, the set speed is
pedal, it does not automatically apply dimmed and the lead vehicle icon does not
the brakes to maintain a gap from any appear in the instrument cluster display.
vehicle ahead.
217
The system resumes operation when you LANE CENTERING (IF EQUIPPED)
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle. HOW DOES LANE CENTERING
WORK
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
INDICATORS uses the vehicle's front radar sensor and
front windshield camera sensor, together
Illuminates when you switch with the steering sensor to operate.
adaptive cruise control on. The Using these sensors, the system applies
E144529
color of the indicator changes to continuous steering assistance towards
indicate the system status. driving in the middle of the lane you choose
on highway roads.
White indicates the system is on but
inactive. Note: The gap setting for adaptive cruise
control with lane centering, operates in the
Blue indicates that you set the speed and same way as normal adaptive cruise control.
the system is active.
LANE CENTERING PRECAUTIONS
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL WARNING: Do not use the system
if any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
WARNING: Normal cruise control wheel could affect the functionality or
will not brake when your vehicle is performance of the system. Failure to
approaching slower vehicles. Always be follow this instruction could result in the
aware of which mode you have selected loss of control of your vehicle, personal
and apply the brakes when necessary. injury or death.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
2. Press Driver Assistance. to lane centering unless stated otherwise
3. Press Cruise Control. or contradicted by a lane centering
precaution. See Adaptive Cruise Control
4. Press Normal Cruise Control. Precautions (page 210).
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise LANE CENTERING
E332905
control indicator if you select REQUIREMENTS
normal cruise control. The gap setting
does not display, and the system does not You must keep your hands on the steering
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic wheel at all times.
braking remains active to maintain set
speed. The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
218
Lane centering only activates when all of • If the front windshield camera and/or
the following occur: the front radar are blocked.
• Adaptive cruise control with lane • When using a spare tire.
centering is enabled in the touchscreen. • Inclement weather conditions
See Switching Lane Centering On including, but not limited to, high wind,
and Off (page 219). heavy rain, and fog.
• You have adaptive cruise control with • Driving into direct sunlight.
stop and go enabled and set.
• When modification to the steering
• The steering sensor detects your hands system has been made, including
on the steering wheel. alterations to the steering wheel.
• The system detects both lane markings • When towing a trailer.
when driving on a straight road.
See Lane Centering Precautions (page
• Your vehicle is initially centered in the 218).
lane between two visible line markings.
Note: The system steering assistance is
Note: If the system does not detect valid limited and may not have sufficient effort
lane line markings, the system remains in for all driving situations and/or conditions,
standby until valid line markings are such as driving through tight curves or
available. driving through curves at high speeds.
Note: If the system does not detect your Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
hands on the steering wheel, apply a slight may deviate from the lane center.
force to the steering wheel.
SWITCHING LANE CENTERING ON

LANE CENTERING LIMITATIONS AND OFF
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply
Keep your hands on the steering wheel at
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
all times.
or contradicted by a lane centering
limitation. See Adaptive Cruise Control The controls are on the steering wheel.
Limitations (page 211). Press the button.
Lane centering may not correctly operate
E308131
in any of the following conditions:
• The lane width is too narrow or wide. The indicator appears in the instrument
• The curve in the road is too tight. cluster display. When the system is on, the
color of the indicator changes to indicate
• The system does not detect the the system status.
minimum required lane markings or
when lanes merge or split. You can override the system at any time
by steering your vehicle.
• When the required steering effort to
maintain lane center exceeds the lane Note: The correct requirements must be
centering system limit. met before you can switch the system on.
See Lane Centering Requirements (page
• When driving in areas that are under
218).
construction or when road work is in
progress.
219
Enabling and Disabling Lane If your vehicle starts to slow

Centering down after system cancellation,
E308130
you must take full control of the
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. vehicle. To re-enable adaptive cruise
2. Press Driver Assistance. control with lane centering after
cancellation, press and release the resume
3. Press Cruise Control.
button.
4. Press Lane Centering Assist.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
LANE CENTERING ALERTS • The lane becomes too wide or narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
You must keep your hands on the steering markings.
wheel at all times.
• Lane markings cross over one another.
When the system is active and detects no
steering activity for a period of time, the • The curve of the road is too sharp.
system alerts you to put your hands on the Note: If your vehicle slows down due to your
steering wheel. If you do not react inactivity twice within a key cycle, the
appropriately to the warnings the adaptive system disables. To reset the system, when
cruise control with lane centering system the vehicle is stationary, return the gear
cancels and slows your vehicle down to selector to park (P) and turn the vehicle off.
idle speeds while maintaining steering Then, restart the vehicle with your foot on
control. See Lane Centering Automatic the brake pedal.
Cancellation (page 220).
The system also alerts you if your vehicle LANE CENTERING MANUAL
crosses lane line markings without CANCELLATION
detected steering activity.
When you perform the following actions,
Note: The system could detect a light grip
adaptive cruise control with lane centering
or light touch on the steering wheel as
will cancel:
hands-off driving.
• The brake pedal is pressed.
LANE CENTERING AUTOMATIC • Adaptive cruise control button on the
CANCELLATION steering wheel is switched off.
The lane centering system is momentarily
When an external condition cancels the suppressed when either of the following
system, and your hands are on the steering actions are performed:
wheel, a tone sounds and a message
appears in the instrument cluster display. • Turn signal indicator is latched or
tapped.
When an external condition cancels the
system, and your hands are not on the • You steer the vehicle out of lane.
steering wheel, the system immediately
alerts you to take control of the vehicle. If LANE CENTERING INDICATORS
this alert is ignored, the system slows the
vehicle while maintaining steering Illuminates when you switch
assistance when lane markings are lane centering on. The color of
E308131
available. When no lane markings are the indicator changes to indicate
available, the vehicle comes to a stop. the system status.
220
Gray status indicates the system is on but PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST

in standby mode. PRECAUTIONS
Blue status indicates the system is enabled
and applying steering assistance to keep
the vehicle in the center of the lane. WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
Amber status with an audible tone, that
system is designed to be an aid and does
then changes to gray status, indicates a
system automatic cancellation.
drive with due care and attention. Failure
the loss of control of your vehicle,
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST personal injury or death.
HOW DOES PREDICTIVE SPEED WARNING: Pay close attention to

ASSIST WORK changing road conditions. You may need
to override the system by pressing the
Predictive Speed Assist works with brake or accelerator pedal if the adjusted
adaptive cruise control and adjusts the speed becomes higher or lower than
vehicle speed to the road geometry and to necessary.
the speed limit detected by the speed sign
recognition system. As the system WARNING: The system only
identifies curves and highway exits, the provides limited braking. Your vehicle
vehicle speed temporarily decreases ahead may not always decelerate quickly
of and during the changing road geometry. enough to avoid a crash without driver
When passing new speed signs, the set intervention. Apply the brakes when
speed updates. See Predictive Speed necessary.
Assist Precautions (page 221).
WARNING: The system does not
There are limitations that affect the
activate the turn signal.
accuracy of the speed sign recognition
system and its ability to determine the
current speed limit. Predictive speed assist Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
and its ability to determine the current to predictive speed assist unless stated
speed limit shares these limitations. See otherwise or contradicted by a predictive
Speed Sign Recognition (page 257). speed assist precaution. See Adaptive
Cruise Control Precautions (page 210).
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally when the feature The system only applies limited braking.
is enabled. You can override the system with the
accelerator pedal or cancel the system by
applying the brakes.
The system may adapt to various factors
such as time of day, lane width. This could
influence speed adjustments and
accelerations.
221
The system may adapt to various drive 2. Press Driver Assistance.

modes. See Drive Mode Control (page 3. Press Cruise Control.
226). This could influence speed
adjustments and accelerations. 4. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
Note: The system does not activate the 5. Switch Predictive Speed Assist on or
turn signal automatically. off.
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST ADJUSTING THE SET SPEED

LIMITATIONS TOLERANCE
WARNING: The system may not 2. Press Driver Assistance.
always adjust vehicle speed in certain 3. Press Cruise Control.
road or weather conditions such as 4. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
crossing traffic, yield or stop signs, right
of way, traffic lights, speed bumps, rain, 5. Switch Predictive Speed Assist on.
snow, fog. You must always apply the 6. Press Tolerance.
brake or accelerator pedal when 7. Adjust the slider to set the tolerance.
necessary.
Note: You can set tolerance for vehicle
The road geometry and speed limit speed adjustment based on speed sign
information provided by the navigation recognition only.
map data could be inaccurate or out of
date. PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST
The system may not detect and read ALERTS
speed limit signs with conditional
If the speed sign recognition system
information, for example, when a sign is
detects a speed limit below the minimum
flashing, during specific time ranges, or
adaptive cruise control set speed, a tone
when children are present.
sounds and the system returns to standby
Note: The system does not set the vehicle mode.
speed to speed limits shown with a
supplementary traffic sign.
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST
Under certain conditions, the system may INDICATORS
not adjust the vehicle speed until after your
vehicle passes the speed limit. A blue marker around the speed sign and
a blue arrow next to the set speed
Detection of road geometry operates only
indicates that the system is active.
where related information is available.
Road geometry information may not be Speed Sign Indicator
available in some areas.
When the system detects a new speed
SWITCHING PREDICTIVE SPEED sign, a gray indicator appears above the
ASSIST MODE ON AND OFF set speed while the system adjusts the
vehicle speed to the speed limit. When the
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. speed limit is reached, the set speed
updates and the gray indicator disappears.
222
Road Geometry Indicator Road Geometry Indicator Symbols

When the system detects a curve or Left curve.
highway exit, the vehicle starts to
decelerate, and the indicator appears and E379737
changes color. Right curve.

E379738
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Adaptive Cruise Control Navigation system based speed limit information is not
Speed Sign Recognition available. If the message continues to appear, have your
Not Available vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driver Resume Control The system is going to cancel and you must take control.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

– TROUBLESHOOTING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –

INFORMATION MESSAGES -
VEHICLES WITH: LANE
CENTERING
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, some
messages can appear different or not at all.
223
Message Action
Keep Hands on Steering You must return your hands to the steering wheel and provide
Wheel steering input to cancel the message.
Lane Centering Assist Lane centering is currently not available, due to conditions
Not Available that prevent the system from becoming active. To reset the
system, when the vehicle is stationary, return the gear selector
to park (P) and turn the vehicle off. Then, restart the vehicle
with your foot on the brake pedal.
Resume Control Adaptive cruise control with lane centering is about to cancel.
You must immediately take full control of the vehicle.
Press Accelerator Pedal Adaptive cruise control with lane centering is in standby mode.
to Resume When safe to do so, you can resume adaptive cruise control
with lane centering by applying pressure on the accelerator
pedal. Alternatively, you can also re-enable adaptive cruise
control with lane centering by pressing the resume button on
the steering wheel.
Note: The system could abbreviate or

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL – shorten certain messages depending upon
INFORMATION MESSAGES - which cluster type you have.
VEHICLES WITH: STOP AND GO
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.

Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Adaptive Cruise Not Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Available
Adaptive Cruise Not You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due
Available Sensor to inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
Blocked See Manual You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
224
Message Action
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a

blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
Normal Cruise Active You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
Adaptive Braking Off not brake or react to traffic.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel
Resume Control and you must take control.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range.
225
Drive Mode Control
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE SELECTING A DRIVE MODE

CONTROL
This feature connects multiple vehicle
systems through a single interface,
providing you with enhanced vehicle
control and driving dynamics for different
driving scenarios, terrains, weather, or
various road conditions.
HOW DOES DRIVE MODE

CONTROL WORK
E374605
Drive mode control adjusts your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select. Press the mode buttons on the steering
Changing the drive mode adjusts the wheel to scroll through the available
steering effort and feel of the steering modes.
system. Note: Button icons vary depending on your
The stability and traction control assist vehicles options.
your vehicle control in adverse conditions Note: If you disconnect or remove the
or high-performance driving. battery, the steering system defaults to
Throttle control enhances the powertrain normal.
response, transmission controls become
optimized with shift schedules. Selecting a Steering Mode
Note: The system has diagnostic checks To change the steering mode,
E347142
that continuously monitor the system for press the button on the steering
proper operation. If a mode is unavailable wheel. See Custom Drive
due to a system fault, the drive mode Mode (page 408). The first press of the
system defaults to normal. When the steering wheel displays a pop-up message
system defaults to normal, the driveline in the instrument cluster display for the
settings remain the same as prior to the selected mode and subsequent presses
system fault. changes the selected mode.
Modes:
• Normal – Developed to complement
vehicle response during daily driving.
• Sport – Slightly less assist and
damping for improved steering feel
during spirited driving.
• Comfort – Slightly more assist for
driver preference and daily driving ease.
The steering selections available are
dependent on the current drive mode.
226
Drive Mode Control
After selecting the desired setting, you may DRIVE MODES

feel a soft feedback bump in the steering
wheel when the changeover occurs.
CUSTOM
Note: Steering options from custom mode
may appear different from what is displayed Allows you to create your own
on the instrument cluster display. drive mode experience. Choose
E375917
a drive mode to use as a starting
Selecting a Suspension Mode (If point and then mix and match settings to
Equipped) tailor the experience to your preferences.
Custom drive mode must be active in order
The different available to see real time updates. See Custom
E347107
suspension settings can be set Drive Mode (page 408).
for different drive modes in the
custom drive mode menu. See Custom Note: Some settings or combinations of
Drive Mode (page 408). settings may not be available.
Modes: DRAG STRIP

• Normal – Default factory setting.
• Sport – Slightly stiffer suspension with For high-performance drag strip
emphasis on handling and control. driving. This mode adjusts the
E375862
transmissions shift schedule for
• Track – Maximum emphasis on aggressive shifting and higher engine
handling and control. speeds, optimizing performance at
• Drag – Maximizes shock performance maximum throttle. Accelerator pedal
for drag strip environments. responsiveness increases, and steering is
set to its sport setting for enhanced driver
Selecting an Exhaust Mode (If connectivity and feedback. Adaptive
Equipped) dampers are optimized for straight line
maximum acceleration and active exhaust
The different available exhaust is set to its loudest setting for a more
settings can be set for different powerful tone. Use this mode for driving
E375920
drive modes. See Custom Drive on closed circuit drag strips where optimal
Mode (page 408). Or See Exhaust Mode straight line performance is needed.
(page 409).
Note: This mode is for track use only and
Modes: is not intended for public roads.
• Normal – Default setting provides a
balance of comfort and feedback. NORMAL
• Sport – Slightly louder than normal for For everyday driving. This mode
spirited driving. is the perfect balance of
E375858
• Track – Loudest setting for track use excitement, comfort, and
only. Maximum exhaust noise under all convenience. This is the default mode after
driving conditions. each ignition cycle and all systems altered
• Quiet – Quietest setting for maximum by drive mode control are adjusted to their
comfort under all driving conditions. base settings.
227
Drive Mode Control
SLIPPERY powerful tone. Additionally, steering is

switched to its Sport setting for enhanced
For less than ideal road connectivity and driver feedback. Use this
E295414
conditions such as snow or ice mode for on-road courses, auto-cross style
covered roads. Use this mode for events, and on-road closed circuit track
crossing terrain where loose or slippery driving.
materials cover a firm surface. Slippery
Note: This mode is for track use only and
mode lowers throttle response and
is not intended for public roads. Automatic
optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces.
Emergency Braking and Brake Over
Note: Using slippery mode on dry, hard Accelerator systems are disabled.
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and excessive tire wear.
SPORT
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling and
E246593 response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal responsiveness, holds
the transmission in lower gears longer, and
changes steering feel to have more torque
buildup enhancing driver connectivity and
feedback. Chassis controls are switched
to their sport settings. The adjustable
suspension is modified to provide firmer
and more responsive dynamics.
Additionally, exhaust sound is changed to
its sport setting for a louder and more
aggressive tone. Use this mode for a fun
and engaging driving experience.
TRACK
For high-performance track
driving. This mode increases
E375861
throttle response and adjusts the
transmissions shift schedule to both hold
lower gears longer for faster acceleration
and downshift more aggressively under
braking. Traction and Stability Control
intervention is reduced and tuned
specifically for track usage. If equipped,
the adaptive dampers are optimized for
transient handling maneuvers and active
exhaust is opened to take on a more
228
Intelligent Speed Limiter
WHAT IS THE INTELLIGENT SWITCHING THE INTELLIGENT

SPEED LIMITER SPEED LIMITER ON AND OFF
The system allows you to limit the vehicle Press to switch the system on.
speed to the maximum speed limit
E396410 The system activates with the
detected by the traffic sign recognition detected speed limit or, if no
system. speed limit is detected the current speed
of your vehicle is set. Press again to switch
HOW DOES THE INTELLIGENT the system off.
SPEED LIMITER WORK
Intelligent speed limiter uses data from the
SETTING THE SPEED LIMIT
traffic sign recognition system to set a
Press the toggle button upward
maximum speed. For example, if the traffic E246884 or downward with the system in
sign recognition system detects a 50 mph
standby mode to set the speed
(80 km/h) speed limit, the vehicle speed
limiter to the current vehicle
is limited to 50 mph (80 km/h). E246885
speed. The set speed is stored
and displayed in the instrument
INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMITER cluster.
PRECAUTIONS Note: The set speed limiter adjusts when
the system detects a different maximum
speed limit.
WARNING: When you are going Note: If the system cannot detect a
downhill, your vehicle speed may maximum speed limit, the system returns
increase above the set speed. The to standby mode.
system will not apply the brakes but a
warning displays. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal CHANGING THE SET SPEED
injury or death. LIMIT
WARNING: You are responsible for You can adjust the set speed in
controlling your vehicle at all times. The E246884 small or large increments. Press
system is designed to be an aid and does the toggle button upward or
not relieve you of your responsibility to downward once to adjust the set
E246885
drive with due care and attention. Failure speed in small increments. Press
to follow this instruction could result in and hold the toggle button
the loss of control of your vehicle, upward or downward to adjust the set
personal injury or death. speed in large increments.
Note: The system does not limit your

vehicle's speed to speed limits shown with
a supplementary traffic sign.
229
ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMIT INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMITER

TOLERANCE INDICATORS
You can set a permanent speed tolerance It illuminates in the instrument
that is in addition to the detected speed cluster when the system is in
limit. E280228 standby or active.
2. Press Driver Assistance. INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMITER
3. Press Speed Limiter. AUDIBLE WARNINGS
4. Press Intelligent Speed Limiter.
A warning appears in the instrument
5. Press Tolerance.
cluster and a tone sounds if any of the
6. Select a setting. following occur:
• Your vehicle's speed exceeds the
CANCELING THE SET SPEED current set speed.
LIMIT • The system detects a maximum speed
limit that is lower than your vehicle's
Press to cancel the limiter and current speed.
place it in standby mode. The • You intentionally exceed the set speed.
E308130
symbol in instrument cluster
display appears grey. If the traffic sign recognition system
detects a speed limit outside the
operational speed range, 12–112 mph
(20–180 km/h), a single warning tone
RESUMING THE SET SPEED sounds and the system switches to
LIMIT standby mode.
Press to resume the limiter. The

system sets the speed limit to SWITCHING FROM
E308130
the detected maximum speed INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMITER
limit when it resumes. The symbol in the
instrument cluster display appears green.
TO SPEED LIMITER
You can change between intelligent speed
limiter and normal speed limiter using the
INTENTIONALLY EXCEEDING center display. Intelligent speed limiter
THE SET SPEED LIMIT allows you to limit the vehicle speed to the
maximum speed limit detected by the
Firmly press the accelerator pedal to speed sign recognition system. Normal
temporarily turn the system off. The speed limiter allows you to manually limit
system reactivates once your vehicle speed the vehicle speed using controls on the
drops below the set speed. steering wheel.
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Speed Limiter.
230
4. Switch Intelligent Speed Limiter off.

Note: If you switch intelligent speed limiter
off, the system defaults to manual speed
limiter. You can manually set the speed
limiter using the controls on the steering
wheel.
INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMITER

– TROUBLESHOOTING
INTELLIGENT SPEED LIMITER –

Why does a warning appear in the
instrument cluster display?
• The vehicle speed exceeds the current
set speed.
• The system detects a maximum speed
limit that is lower than the current
vehicle speed.
• You intentionally exceed the set speed.
231
Lane Keeping System
WHAT IS THE LANE KEEPING

SYSTEM WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
The lane keeping system alerts you by structures or objects. This can result in
providing temporary steering assistance a false or missed warning.
or steering wheel vibration when it detects
an unintended lane departure. WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
HOW DOES THE LANE limit sensor performance.
KEEPING SYSTEM WORK
The lane keeping system uses a forward operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
looking camera mounted on the windshield Keep the windshield free from
to monitor vehicle movement within the obstruction.
lane of travel.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
When the camera detects a drift out of the immediate area surrounding the sensor,
lane of travel, the lane keeping system have your vehicle checked as soon as
alerts the driver by vibrating the steering possible.
wheel, or aids the driver by providing a
small steering input to move the vehicle WARNING: The system may not
back into the lane of travel. correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
The driver can select one of three modes: with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
• Alert
• Aid WARNING: Large contrasts in
• Alert + Aid outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for The lane keeping system only operates
controlling your vehicle at all times. The when the vehicle speed is greater than
system is designed to be an aid and does 40 mph (64 km/h).
not relieve you of your responsibility to The system works when the camera can
drive with due care and attention. Failure detect at least one lane marking or the
to follow this instruction could result in edge of the road.
personal injury or death. The lane keeping system may not correctly
operate in any of the following conditions:
WARNING: The system will not • The lane keeping system does not
operate if the sensor cannot track the detect at least one lane marking.
road lane markings. • You switch the turn signal on.
232
Lane Keeping System
• You apply direct steering, accelerate The system stores the last known selection
fast or brake hard. for each setting.
• The vehicle speed is less than 40 mph To change the lane keeping system mode,
(64 km/h). use the touchscreen:
• The anti-lock brake, stability control or 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
traction control system activates.
• The lane is too narrow.
3. Press Lane-Keeping System.
• Something is obscuring the camera or
it is unable to detect the lane markings 4. Press Lane-Keeping Mode.
due to environment, traffic or vehicle 5. Select a mode.
conditions. Note: The system remembers the last
The lane keeping system may not correct setting when you start your vehicle.
lane positioning in any of the following
conditions:
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
• High winds.
SETTINGS
• Uneven road surfaces.
• Heavy or uneven loads. To change the steering wheel vibration,
• Incorrect tire pressure. use the touchscreen:
SWITCHING THE LANE 2. Press Driver Assistance.
KEEPING SYSTEM ON AND 3. Press Lane-Keeping System.
OFF 4. Press Lane-Keeping Intensity.
5. Select an intensity setting.
To activate the lane keeping
system, press the button on the
E308131
steering wheel. ALERT MODE
To deactivate the lane keeping system,
WHAT IS ALERT MODE
press the button again.
Note: When switching the system on or off Alert mode vibrates the steering wheel
a message appears in the instrument cluster when it detects an unintended lane
display to show the status. departure.
Note: The system stores the on or off
setting until manually changed.
SWITCHING THE LANE

KEEPING SYSTEM MODE
The lane keeping system has different
settings that you can view or adjust using
the touchscreen.
233
Lane Keeping System
HOW DOES ALERT MODE WORK The lane keeping system aids you when
an unintentional lane departure occurs.
The system provides a small steering input
to move the vehicle towards the center of
the lane.
ALERT AND AID MODE
WHAT IS ALERT AND AID MODE

Alert and aid mode uses multiple features
to keep you in your lane. The system first
E165515
provides a small steering input to bring
your vehicle back towards the center of
When in alert mode, the lane keeping the lane. If your vehicle moves too far from
system alerts you by vibrating the steering the center of the lane the system alerts
wheel. The intensity of the vibration is set you with vibration in the steering wheel.
through the lane keeping system menu.
HOW DOES ALERT AND AID MODE
AID MODE WORK
WHAT IS AID MODE

Aid mode provides temporary steering
assistance toward the center of the lane.
HOW DOES AID MODE WORK
E165517
A Alert.
B Aid.
The lane keeping system detects a lane

departure and provides aid when the
vehicles enters B and applies the
E165516 additional alert warning if A is entered.
234
Lane Keeping System
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM If you switch the lane keeping system on,
a graphic with lane markings appears in
INDICATORS the information display.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still display if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the lane keeping system is on, the
color of the lane markings change to
indicate the system status.
E335297
Gray Green Yellow Red
Indicates that the Indicates that the Indicates that the Indicates that the
system is tempor- system is available system is providing system is providing
arily unavailable to or ready to provide a or has just provided or has just provided
provide a warning or warning or interven- a lane keeping aid a lane keeping alert
intervention on the tion on the indicated intervention. warning.
indicated side. side.
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT ASSIST

BLIND SPOT ASSIST WORK
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT ASSIST Activate and deactivate the

system using the lane keeping
E308131
Blind spot assist is an extension of the lane system button on the steering
keeping system. wheel.
It may help you identify adjacent vehicles During lane changes, the design of the
during a lane change. blind spot assist feature detects vehicles
Blind spot assist provides a blind spot in, or approaching, your blind spot and
warning and steering assistance to help provides a warning, plus steering
you become aware of and steer away from assistance to direct your vehicle back into
vehicles in your blind spot during lane your lane.
changes. When active, this system functions with or
without the use of direction indicators and
hazard flashers.
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
235
Lane Keeping System
BLIND SPOT ASSIST LIMITATIONS Blind spot assist may have difficulty
detecting hazards under the following
All system limitations present in the basic conditions:
lane keeping system also apply to blind
• If a vehicle is approaching in an
spot assist.
adjacent lane at a speed higher than
Blind spot assist does not function under your vehicle.
the following conditions: • Bad weather obstructing the sensors.
• No lane markings are detected.
• One or both rear radar sensors become
blocked or faulty.
• Attaching bike or cargo racks could
cause false alerts due to obstruction
of the sensor.
BLIND SPOT ASSIST INDICATORS
E310089
Diagram 3: Blind spot assist counter

Diagram 1: Vehicle A uses its left turn
steers to help alert the driver of Vehicle A
signal preparing to change from the right
to direct their vehicle back into the right
lane to the middle lane. Vehicle B is already
lane to help avoid a possible collision with
in the middle lane and just entered Vehicle
Vehicle B.
A's blind spot causing the blind spot
information system alert indicator to flash The lane keeping aid warning lamp or
on the exterior mirror. yellow lane marking in your instrument
cluster display indicate blind spot assist
Diagram 2: The driver of Vehicle A begins
activation. In addition, the blind spot
to steer into the center lane not aware of
information system alert indicator flashes
Vehicle B.
on the exterior mirror on the same side as
the detection. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 239).
236
Lane Keeping System
Blind Spot Assist Information Messages
Message Action
Blind Spot Assist Not Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle with the blind
Available Trailer spot information system switched off or you have not
Attached configured the trailer.
Blind Spot Assist Not Displays if your blind spot information system sensors are
Available Side Sensor blocked.
Blocked
Blind Spot Assist System The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
fault your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Trailer Brake Module Lost communication with the trailer module. Blind spot assist
Fault is suppressed until the failure is fixed.
Trailer Lighting Module Lost communication with the trailer module. Blind spot assist
Fault See Manual is suppressed until the failure is fixed.
Front Camera Fault Front camera fault. Blind spot assist is disabled until the
Service Required failure is fixed.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service The system has malfunctioned. Have your
Required vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that
has caused the system to be temporarily
unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that
requires you to clean the windshield in order
for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Have your
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel The system requests that you keep your
hands on the steering wheel.
237
Lane Keeping System
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – • Driving on roads with tight curves or

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS uneven surfaces.
Why is the feature not available Why does the vehicle not come
(lane markings are gray) when I back toward the middle of the
can see the lane markings on the lane, as expected, in the Aid, or Aid
road? + Alert mode?
• Your vehicle speed is less than 40 mph • High cross winds are present.
(65 km/h). • There is a large road crown.
• The sun is shining directly into the • Rough roads, grooves or shoulder
camera lens. drop-offs.
• A quick intentional lane change has • Heavy, uneven loading of the vehicle
occurred. or improper tire inflation pressure.
• You are driving your vehicle too close • You changed the tires or modified the
to the lane markings for an extended suspension.
interval of time.
• Driving at high speeds in curves.
• The last alert warning or aid
intervention occurred a short time ago.
• Ambiguous lane markings, for example,
in construction zones.
• Rapid transition from light to dark, or
from dark to light.
• Sudden offset in lane markings.
• ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
• There is a camera blockage due to dirt,
grime, fog, frost or water on the
windshield.
• You are driving too close to the vehicle
in front of you.
• Transitioning between no lane
markings to lane markings, or vice
versa.
• There is standing water on the road.
• Faint lane markings, for example,
partial yellow lane markings on
concrete roads.
• Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
• You have not calibrated the camera
after a windshield replacement.
238
Blind Spot Information System
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT

INFORMATION SYSTEM WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
Blind spot information system detects conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
vehicles that may have entered the blind rain and spray. Always drive with due
spot zone. care and attention. Failure to take care
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT Note: Blind spot information system does
INFORMATION SYSTEM WORK not prevent contact with other vehicles. It
does not detect parked vehicles,
Blind spot information system uses pedestrians, animals or other infrastructure.
sensors on both sides of your vehicle,
detecting rearward from the exterior
mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
beyond the rear bumper. The detection SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m)
beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle Blind spot information system does not
speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) operate in park (P) or reverse (R).
to alert you of faster approaching vehicles. The system may not alert you if a vehicle
quickly passes through the detection zone
while overtaking.
Note: For vehicles without the trailer
coverage feature, we recommend that you
switch the blind spot information system
off when you attach a trailer.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
E255695
Blind spot information system turns on
when all the following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION • You shift into drive (D).
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS • The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Do not use the blind

spot information system as a SWITCHING BLIND SPOT
replacement for using the interior and INFORMATION SYSTEM ON
exterior mirrors or looking over your AND OFF
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a To switch blind spot information system
replacement for careful driving. on or off, use the touchscreen:
239
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
2. Press Driver Assistance. false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
We recommend switching the feature off
3. Press Blind Spot Information System. when using a bike or cargo rack.
4. Switch the feature on or off. Note: The system may not correctly operate
When you switch blind spot information when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
system off, a warning lamp illuminates. trailer tow module and tow bar approved
When you switch the system on or off, the by us, the system turns off when you attach
alert indicators flash twice. a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
Note: The system remembers the last recommend that you switch the system off
setting when you start your vehicle. when you attach a trailer.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
LOCATING THE BLIND SPOT may appear in the instrument cluster
INFORMATION SYSTEM display. See Blind Spot Information
SENSORS System – Information Messages (page
241). The alert indicators remain
illuminated, but the system does not alert
you.

SYSTEM INDICATORS
E388049
The sensors are behind the rear bumper

on both sides of your vehicle.
and large accumulations of dirt.
E309137
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy. When blind spot information
E249861
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper system detects a vehicle, an
stickers, repair compound or other objects. alert indicator illuminates in the
exterior mirror on the side from which the
vehicle is approaching. If you turn the turn
signal on for that side of your vehicle, the
alert indicator flashes.
240
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Blind Spot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Have
Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked Something is blocking the sensors. Clean
See Manual the sensors.
241
Exit Warning
WHAT IS EXIT WARNING

Exit warning uses radar sensors to alert weather conditions the system may not
you to traffic objects approaching your function. Rain, snow and spray can all
open door. limit sensor performance.

HOW DOES EXIT WARNING immediate area surrounding the sensor,
WORK have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Exit warning detects traffic objects such
as vehicles, cyclists, scooters and WARNING: You are responsible for
motorcycles that approach your vehicle controlling your vehicle at all times. The
from the rear and cross into the exit system is designed to be an aid and does
warning zone. The exit warning zones are not relieve you of your responsibility to
along the left and right sides of your vehicle drive with due care and attention. Failure
and extend slightly past a fully open door. to follow this instruction could result in

detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
Note: The exit warning system becomes

active once you have started your vehicle
and the vehicle is not moving.
E371193
Note: The system cannot detect animals, EXIT WARNING LIMITATIONS

slow moving pedestrians or any type of
stationary object. The exit warning system is operational in
any gear position once you start your
vehicle and anytime the vehicle is not
EXIT WARNING PRECAUTIONS moving. The exit warning system remains
on for about 3 minutes after turning your
vehicle off. The system turns off
WARNING: The system is not a immediately when locking the doors. Exit
crash warning or avoidance system. warning informs you when it turns off.
Note: Do not use exit warning as a
WARNING: Always pay attention replacement for paying attention when
to the traffic situation and the area exiting your vehicle.
around the vehicle.
Note: The system does not automatically
close the doors to prevent contact with
other vehicles.
242
Exit Warning
Note: The system may not inform and/or

alert you if a traffic object is approaching
too quickly or if the parking position prevents
detection.
Exit Warning Alert

Note: Exit warning is designed to provide a
visual and audible alert during an exit when
an occupant opens any door and a traffic
object is approaching on the same side.
Exit Warning Prevention (If Equipped) E371195
Depending on your vehicle's features, exit Note: The driver can override the exit
warning is also designed to prevent the warning with power child lock function by
door latch from opening when a traffic pressing the power child lock deactivation
object is approaching on the same side. In button twice quickly (within 5 seconds).
this situation, the inner door handle is
disabled, and the door remains closed. A Note: When the exit warning and power
visual and audible warning is also present child lock function is activated, doors can
during a prevention. After the traffic object still be opened from outside.
has passed and no additional traffic
objects are approaching, the inner door EXIT WARNING INDICATORS
handle is automatically enabled and the
occupant can open the door to exit the
vehicle.
Note: Occupants can override the
prevention function and open the door while
the traffic object is still approaching and the
incident is still imminent by requesting the
door to open twice quickly (within 5
seconds).
Exit Warning and Power Child Lock

(If Equipped)
Power child lock remains active and must E309137
be manually deactivated if you attempt to

When exit warning detects an approaching
switch it off at the same time exit warning
traffic object on one side, the
detects an approaching traffic object.
corresponding alert indicator in the exterior
A visual and audible warning occur in this mirror is illuminated. If exit warning alert
situation. or the optional exit warning prevention are
active, the same alert indicator flashes.
See Blind Spot Information System
Indicators (page 240).
243
Exit Warning
In addition to the mirror indicator there is LOCATING THE EXIT WARNING

also visual indicator in the information
display noting what side a traffic object SENSORS
has been detected on.
SWITCHING EXIT WARNING

ON AND OFF
You can switch off the exit warning system
using the touchscreen.
Exit warning turns off approximately 3
minutes after you switch your vehicle off.
It turns off immediately after you lock the
doors. When exit warning turns off, a
message appears in the instrument cluster E388049
display.
The sensors for the exit warning are
Note: The system remembers the last mounted behind the rear bumper on both
setting when you start your vehicle. sides of your vehicle.
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer or bike rack.
EXIT WARNING - TROUBLESHOOTING
EXIT WARNING - INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Reason
Left/Right Side Check surroundings before Left/Right exit warning alert or exit warning
exiting prevention is active.
Exit Warning turning off. Exit safely Displays if the exit warning system turns
off/shuts down.
Exit Warning System Fault Displays if the exit warning system detects
any system error.
244
Exit Warning
If exit warning detects a fault, the system

deactivates and the following message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
E371199
245
Cross Traffic Alert
WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

ALERT PRECAUTIONS
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your WARNING: Do not use the cross
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R). traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
ALERT WORK cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross traffic alert detects vehicles that
approach at a speed between 4–37 mph WARNING: The system may not
(6–60 km/h). Coverage decreases when operate properly during severe weather
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
obstructed. rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

LIMITATIONS
Cross traffic alert may not correctly
E142440 operate when any of the following occur:
The sensor on the left-hand side is only • Something is blocking the sensors.
partially obstructed and zone coverage on • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
the right-hand side is maximized. are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Your vehicle speed is greater than
7 mph (12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
E142441
SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC

Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on ALERT ON AND OFF
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely To switch cross traffic alert on or off use
reduced. the touchscreen.
Note: Slowly reversing helps increase the 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
coverage area and effectiveness. 2. Press Driver Assistance.
246
Cross Traffic Alert
3. Switch Cross Traffic Alert on or off. Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
When you switch the system on or off, the
alert indicators flash twice. Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
Note: The system switches on every time
We recommend switching the feature off
you switch the ignition on.
when using a bike or cargo rack.
If something is blocking the sensors, a
LOCATING THE CROSS message may appear in the information
TRAFFIC ALERT SENSORS display when you shift into reverse (R).
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

INDICATORS
When the cross traffic alert detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone sounds, a
warning lamp illuminates in the relevant
exterior mirror and arrows appear in the
instrument cluster display to show from
which side the vehicle is approaching.
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
E388049
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the instrument
The sensors are behind the rear bumper cluster display. Have your vehicle checked
on both sides of your vehicle. as soon as possible.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice Note: In some conditions, the system could
and large accumulations of dirt. alert you, even when there is nothing in the
detection zone, for example a vehicle
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper passing further away from your vehicle.
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
247
Cross Traffic Alert
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Cross Traffic Alert Displays instead of indication arrows when

the system detects a vehicle. Check for
approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system
See Manual sensors. Clean the sensors. If the message
continues to appear, have your vehicle
Cross Traffic System Fault The system has malfunctioned. Have your
248
Pre-Collision Assist
WHAT IS PRE-COLLISION Note: If the pre-collision assist alerts are

too frequent or disturbing, you can reduce
ASSIST the alert sensitivity. Setting the low
sensitivity results in fewer and later
Pre-collision assist detects and warns of warnings of a potential forward collision.
approaching hazards in the roadway. The The manufacturer recommends using the
system provides multiple levels of high sensitivity setting where possible.
assistance to help avoid a collision if your
vehicle is rapidly approaching another Note: Automatic emergency braking
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the performance is not affected by the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian or sensitivity setting.
cyclist within your driving path. Each system has various levels of
detection capabilities. See Pre-Collision
HOW DOES PRE-COLLISION Assist Limitations (page 250).
ASSIST WORK
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
The system warns the driver of potential PRECAUTIONS
hazards by providing three levels of
assistance.
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
E156130 system is designed to be an aid and does
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching drive with due care and attention. Failure
potential hazards the system provides the to follow this instruction could result in
following levels of functionality: the loss of control of your vehicle,
1. Alert. personal injury or death.
2. Brake support. WARNING: The system does not
3. Automatic emergency braking. detect vehicles moving in a different
Alert: When active, a flashing direction or animals. Apply the brakes
E329466 visual warning appears and an when necessary. Failure to follow this
audible warning tone sounds. instruction could result in the loss of
Brake Support: The system helps reduce death.
the impact speed by preparing the brakes
for rapid braking. The system does not WARNING: The system does not
automatically apply the brakes. If you press operate during hard acceleration or
the brake pedal, the system may apply steering. Failure to take care may lead
additional braking up to maximum braking to a crash or personal injury.
force, even if you lightly press the brake
pedal.
Automatic Emergency Braking:
Automatic emergency braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent.
249
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNING: The system may LIMITATIONS
operate with reduced function during
cold and inclement weather conditions. Pre-collision assist depends on the
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can detection ability of its camera and sensors.
adversely affect the system. Keep the Any obstructions or damage to these areas
front camera and radar free of snow and can limit detection or prevent the system
ice. Failure to follow this instruction may from functioning. See Locating the
result in the loss of control of your Pre-Collision Assist Sensors (page 251).
The system is active at 3 mph (5 km/h)
WARNING: Take additional care if and above.
your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are Note: Brake support and automatic
towing a trailer. These conditions could emergency braking are active up to the
result in reduced performance of this maximum speed of the vehicle.
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your Pedestrian Detection Limitations
Pedestrian detection is active at speeds
WARNING: The system cannot up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on Pedestrian detection functions optimally
this system to replace driver judgment when detected hazards are clearly
and the need to maintain a safe distance identifiable. System performance may
and speed. reduce in situations where pedestrians are
running, partly obscured, have a complex
WARNING: System performance background, or cannot be distinguished
could be reduced in situations where the from a group.
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability. These situations include but Cyclist Detection Limitations
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights, Cyclist detection is active at speeds up to
unconventional vehicle types, 50 mph (80 km/h).
pedestrians or cyclists with complex Cyclist detection functions optimally when
backgrounds, running pedestrians or fast detected hazards are clearly identifiable.
moving cyclists, partly obscured The system’s detection level may be less
pedestrians or cyclists, pedestrians or in situations where cyclists are moving fast,
cyclists that the system cannot partly hidden, have a complex background,
distinguish from a group. Failure to take or the system cannot distinguish the cyclist
care may result in the loss of control of from a group.
your vehicle, personal injury or death.
250
Intersection Assist • If required, switch automatic

emergency braking on or off.
The pre-collision assist system may
operate in a scenario where you are turning • If required, switch evasive steering
across the path of an oncoming vehicle, or assist on or off.
with crossing pedestrians and cyclists. Note: Automatic emergency braking and
Detection of vehicles driving in an evasive steering assist automatically turn
oncoming direction is active if your vehicle on every time you start your vehicle.
is driving at speeds up to 50 mph
Note: If you switch automatic emergency
(80 km/h). Detection of crossing
braking off, evasive steering assist switches
pedestrians and cyclists at an intersection
off.
is active if your vehicle is driving at speeds
up to 19 mph (30 km/h).
LOCATING THE PRE-
COLLISION ASSIST SENSORS
E309750
SWITCHING PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST ON AND OFF
You cannot switch the system off. E371924
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist

Settings 1. Camera.
2. Radar sensor (if equipped).
You can adjust the following settings by
using the controls in the pre-collision assist If a message regarding a blocked sensor
menu: or camera appears in the instrument
• Change alert and distance alert cluster display, something is obstructing
sensitivity to one of three possible the radar signals or camera images. The
settings. radar sensor is behind the fascia cover in
• Switch distance indication and alert on the center of the lower grille. With a
or off. blocked sensor or camera, the system may
not function, or performance may reduce.
See Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Messages (page 255).
251
Note: Proper system operation requires a DISTANCE INDICATION

clear view of the road by the camera. Repair
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view. WHAT IS DISTANCE INDICATION
Note: If something hits the front end of your Distance indication displays the gap
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle between your vehicle and the vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone ahead of you.
could change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Have your vehicle Note: The graphic does not display if you
serviced to have the radar checked for switch on cruise control or adaptive cruise
proper coverage and operation. control.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message could display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor recalibrates successfully.
Vehicle Speed System Sensit- Distance Indic- Distance Gap Time Gap
ivity ator Color
62 mph Normal. Blue. Greater than Greater than 0.9

(100 km/h). 82 ft (25 m). seconds.
Yellow. 56–82 ft 0.6-0.9
(17–25 m). seconds.
Red. Less than 56 ft Less than 0.6
(17 m). seconds.
252
SWITCHING DISTANCE DISTANCE ALERT

INDICATION ON AND OFF
To switch the system on or off, use the WHAT IS DISTANCE ALERT
touchscreen:
The system alerts you with a warning lamp
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. if the distance to the vehicle ahead is
2. Press Driver Assistance. small.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist. Note: The warning lamp does not
4. Switch Distance Indication on or off. illuminate if cruise control or adaptive cruise
control is active.
DISTANCE INDICATION
INDICATOR ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY OF
DISTANCE ALERT
The indicator displays the time gap
between your vehicle and vehicles traveling To adjust the sensitivity of the system, use
in the same direction ahead of you. the touchscreen:
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Press Alert Sensitivity.
5. Select a setting.
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY
BRAKING
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC
EMERGENCY BRAKING
Automatic emergency braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
to reduce impact damage or avoid the
crash completely.
Automatic emergency braking is only
available up to certain speeds. See
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations (page
250).
E356907
253
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST

EMERGENCY BRAKING ON AND LIMITATIONS
OFF
Evasive steering assist only activates when
To switch the system on or off, use the all the following occur:
touchscreen: • Automatic emergency braking and
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. evasive steering assist are on.
2. Press Driver Assistance. • The system detects a road user ahead
and starts to apply the brakes.
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
• You significantly turn the steering
4. Press Auto Emergency Braking. wheel to steer around a road user.
5. Switch the feature on or off.
Note: Evasive steering assist does not
automatically steer around a road user. If
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST you do not turn the steering wheel, evasive
steering assist does not activate.
WHAT IS EVASIVE STEERING Note: Evasive steering assist does not
ASSIST activate if the distance to the road user
ahead is too small and the system cannot
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road avoid a crash.
user, evasive steering assist helps you steer
around the road user. SWITCHING EVASIVE STEERING
After you turn the steering wheel in an ASSIST ON AND OFF
attempt to avoid a crash with the road
user, the system applies additional steering To switch the system on or off, use the
torque to help you steer around the road touchscreen:
user. After you pass the road user, the 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
system applies steering torque when you
turn the steering wheel to steer back into 2. Press Driver Assistance.
the lane. The system deactivates after you 3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
fully pass the road user. 4. Switch Evasive Steering on or off.
Note: Road users are defined as Note: If you switch automatic emergency
pedestrians or bicyclists in your vehicle's braking off, evasive steering assist turns off.
path or another stationary vehicle in the
same lane or a vehicle traveling in the same Note: Automatic emergency braking and
lane in the same direction as you. See evasive steering assist turn on every time
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions (page you start your vehicle.
249).
254
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – A telltale illuminates in the

E335612
instrument cluster display to
TROUBLESHOOTING indicate if the system is disabled,
unavailable, or temporarily degraded due
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – to external environmental conditions.
WARNING LAMPS Note: No action is needed if the telltale
illuminates without a corresponding
information message. See Pre-Collision
Assist Precautions (page 249).
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor You have a blocked sensor due to bad
Blocked weather, ice, mud or water in front of the
radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available A fault with the system has occurred. Have
255
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – Radar is out of alignment due to a front

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS end impact.
Have your vehicle serviced to have the
Camera Troubleshooting radar checked for proper coverage and
The windshield in front of the camera operation.
is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the outside of the windshield in
front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera
is clean, but the message remains in
the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the camera to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Radar Troubleshooting
The surface of the radar in the grille is
dirty or obstructed.
Clean the grille surface in front of the
radar or remove the object causing the
obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean, but the message remains in the
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the radar to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Heavy rain, spray or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is
temporarily disabled. Pre-collision
assist reactivates a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the
surface of the road is interfering with
the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is
temporarily disabled. Pre-collision
assist reactivates a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
256
Speed Sign Recognition (If Equipped)
WHAT IS SPEED SIGN

RECOGNITION WARNING: Do not perform
windshield repairs in the area
Speed sign recognition detects speed limit surrounding the sensor.
signs to inform you of the current speed
limit. Detected speed signs appear in the WARNING: The system may not
instrument cluster display. correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
Ford.
HOW DOES SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION WORK WARNING: Not all traffic signs can
be recognized by the system and
Speed sign recognition uses a sensor displayed correctly.
behind the interior mirror to detect speed
signs. Note: Always fit our original parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
If your vehicle has speed sign recognition reduce system performance.
with navigation, stored speed sign data
may influence the indicated speed limit
value. SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
LIMITATIONS
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
Speed sign recognition may not operate
PRECAUTIONS correctly due to:
• Outdated map data.
WARNING: You are responsible for • Incorrect recognition of speed limits by
controlling your vehicle at all times. The the sensor of signs on parallel roads or
system is designed to be an aid and does exit ramps.
not relieve you of your responsibility to • Missed recognition of faded, dirty, or
drive with due care and attention. Failure distorted signs.

function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.

Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
257
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION SETTING THE SPEED SIGN

INDICATORS RECOGNITION SPEED
WARNING
To set the speed warning, use the
touchscreen:
3. Press Speed Limit Assist.
4. Select to switch the feature on or off.
SETTING THE SPEED SIGN

E317824 RECOGNITION SPEED
When the system detects a speed limit TOLERANCE
sign, it appears in the instrument cluster
display. To set the tolerance of the speed warning,
use the touchscreen.
Note: Sign indicator image may vary based
on your vehicle's display type. 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
3. Press Speed Limit Assist.
4. Press Tolerance.
5. Use the slider bar to select the required
level.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION – TROUBLESHOOTING
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See The traffic sign data provided by the navig-
Manual ation system is unavailable due to weak or
no signal. Wait for a short period of time for
the signal to improve. If the message
continues to appear, have the system
258
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION –

Why does the speed limit change
without any sign on the road?
• The speed limit changes due to the
speed limit data stored in the map
data.
Why does speed sign recognition

show a wrong speed limit?
• The system shows a wrong speed limit
due to incorrect and outdated map
data or due to incorrect recognition of
the speed limits by the camera.
259
Driver Alert
WHAT IS DRIVER ALERT

WARNING: Certain driving styles
Driver alert alerts you if it determines that may result in the system warning you
you are becoming drowsy or if your driving even if you are not feeling tired.
deteriorates.
HOW DOES DRIVER ALERT function. Rain, snow and spray can all
WORK limit sensor performance.
Driver alert determines your alertness level WARNING: The system will not
based on your driving behavior in relation operate if the sensor cannot track the
to the lane markings and other factors road lane markings.
using the front windshield camera.
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.

correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.

E309385 Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
DRIVER ALERT PRECAUTIONS Note: If something is blocking the camera

or damaged the windshield, Driver Alert may
not function.
controlling your vehicle at all times. The DRIVER ALERT LIMITATIONS
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to Driver alert may not function correctly if:
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in • The sensor cannot track the road lane
the loss of control of your vehicle, markings.
personal injury or death. • Your vehicle's speed is less than
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you. SWITCHING DRIVER ALERT ON
AND OFF
260
Driver Alert
2. Press Driver Assistance. DRIVER ALERT INDICATORS

3. Switch Driver Alert on or off.
Note: The system remains on or off System Warnings
depending on how it was last set. The warning system has two stages:
Resetting Driver Alert 1. A temporary warning is issued to advise
you to take a rest. This message only
You can reset the system by either: appears for a short time.
• Switching your vehicle off and on. 2. If you do not rest and the system
• Opening and closing the driver door continues to detect that your driving
when your vehicle is stationary, and it deteriorates, it issues a further warning.
is safe to do so. This remains in the instrument cluster
display until you cancel it.
Note: The system does not warn you if the
vehicle speed falls below approximately
40 mph (65 km/h).
DRIVER ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
DRIVER ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon.
261
Load Carrying
LOAD CARRYING
PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
Keep your loaded vehicle weight label vehicle weight limits can
within its design rating capability, adversely affect the
with or without a trailer. Properly performance and handling of
loading your vehicle provides your vehicle, cause vehicle
maximum return of vehicle design damage and can result in the
performance. Before you load your loss of control of your vehicle,
vehicle, become familiar with the serious personal injury or death.
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with WARNING: Do not use
or without a trailer, from the replacement tires with lower
vehicle’s Tire and Loading load carrying capacities than the
Information label or Safety original tires because they may
Compliance Certification label. lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
WARNING: The original tires do not increase the
appropriate loading capacity of GVWR and GAWR limitations.
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much WARNING: Do not exceed
space is available) or by payload the GVWR or the GAWR
capacity (how much weight the specified on the certification
vehicle should carry). Once you label.
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is WARNING: Exceeding any
space available. Overloading or vehicle weight rating can
improperly loading your vehicle adversely affect the
can contribute to loss of vehicle performance and handling of
control and vehicle rollover. your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: When loading

the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
262
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE

vehicles. Take extra precautions, WEIGHT RATING
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
when driving a heavily loaded Rating)
vehicle.
GAWR is the maximum allowable
The gross combined weight must weight that a single axle (front or
never exceed the Gross Combined rear) can carry. These numbers
Weight Rating. are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
LOCATING THE SAFETY
WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
WEIGHT RATING
LABELS
GVWR is the maximum allowable
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example: weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS

COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
E198828
The Safety Compliance Certification label Gross Combined Weight Rating

is located on the door hinge pillar, (GCWR) is the maximum
door-latch post, or the door edge that allowable weight of the vehicle
meets the door-latch post, next to the and the loaded trailer, including
driver seating position. all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Note: Your vehicle is not designed
for trailer towing. Never tow a
trailer with your vehicle.
263
Load Carrying
CALCULATING PAYLOAD is the maximum payload for your

vehicle as built by the assembly
Tire and Loading Label Information plant. If you install any additional
Example: equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
Note: Your vehicle is not designed
for trailer towing. Never tow a
trailer with your vehicle.
CALCULATING THE LOAD

LIMIT
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
E198719 passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your 3. Subtract the combined weight
vehicle is carrying. The maximum of the driver and passengers
payload for your vehicle appears from XXX kg or XXX lb.
on the Tire and Loading label. The 4. The resulting figure equals the
label is either on the B-pillar or the available amount of cargo and
edge of the driver door. Vehicles luggage load capacity. For
exported outside the US and example, if the “XXX” amount
Canada may not have a tire and equals 1,400 lb. and there will
loading label. Look for “The be five 150 lb. passengers in
combined weight of occupants your vehicle, the amount of
and cargo should never exceed available cargo and luggage
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum load capacity is 650 lb.
payload. The payload listed on the (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
Tire and Loading Information label
264
Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined Suppose your vehicle has a

weight of luggage and cargo 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. and luggage capacity. You and
That weight may not safely one of your friends decide to pick
exceed the available cargo and up cement from the local home
luggage load capacity improvement store to finish that
calculated in Step 4. patio you have been planning for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a the past two years. Measuring the
trailer, load from your trailer inside of the vehicle with the rear
will be transferred to your seat folded down, you have room
vehicle. Consult this manual to for twelve 100-pound
determine how this reduces the (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
available cargo and luggage you have enough load capacity to
load capacity of your vehicle. transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
Helpful examples for weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
calculating the available the calculation would be: 1400 -
amount of cargo and luggage (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
load capacity - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a to carry that much weight. In
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo metric units, the calculation would
and luggage capacity. You decide be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
to go golfing. Is there enough load kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
capacity to carry you, four of your 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
friends and all the golf bags? You You will need to reduce the load
and four friends average 220 weight by at least 240 pounds
pounds (99 kilograms) each and (104 kilograms). If you remove
the golf bags weigh approximately three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. cement bags, then the load
The calculation would be: 1400 - calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
enough load capacity in your the load capacity to transport the
vehicle to transport four friends cement and your friend home. In
and your golf bags. In metric units, metric units, the calculation would
the calculation would be: 635 be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) - kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
265
Load Carrying
The above calculations also

assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
266
Luggage Compartment
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT OPENING THE REAR LUGGAGE

PRECAUTIONS COMPARTMENT
OPENING THE REAR LUGGAGE

WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and COMPARTMENT FROM INSIDE
luggage compartment locked and keep YOUR VEHICLE - CONVERTIBLE
keys and remote transmitters out of a
child's reach. Unsupervised children Using the Instrument Panel Button
could lock themselves in the luggage
compartment and risk injury. Children
should be taught not to play in vehicles.
WARNING: People should never

climb inside the luggage compartment.
Never shut the luggage compartment
when a person is inside.
WARNING: The appropriate

loading capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity (how
much space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and E376544
vehicle rollover.
Press the button on the instrument panel
WARNING: Do not load any objects to open the luggage compartment.
on the shelf that may obstruct your vision
or strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
267
Luggage Compartment
Unlocking the Rear Luggage Press the button on the instrument panel
Compartment to open the luggage compartment.

COMPARTMENT FROM OUTSIDE
YOUR VEHICLE
Note: Be careful when opening the luggage
comprtment in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the decklid.
E375552
If the decklid does not open because of a

discharged battery, pull the rear left-hand
side seatback cushion aside, insert the
mechanical key blade into the key slot and
turn the key to release the decklid latch.
OPENING THE REAR LUGGAGE E375544

COMPARTMENT FROM INSIDE
YOUR VEHICLE - COUPE Press the exterior release button hidden
above the license plate. You need to have
your vehicle unlocked or have an intelligent
access key within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the
luggage compartment.

COMPARTMENT USING THE
REMOTE CONTROL
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138630
Note: Be careful when opening the luggage
compartment in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the decklid.
E376544
268
Luggage Compartment
CLOSING THE REAR LUGGAGE Your vehicle is equipped with a release

handle that provides a means of escape if
COMPARTMENT you become locked inside the luggage
compartment. The handle is located inside
CLOSING THE REAR LUGGAGE the luggage compartment on the decklid.
COMPARTMENT FROM OUTSIDE The material around the handle glows
YOUR VEHICLE after a brief exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the decklid
Lower the decklid and apply light pressure to open from within the luggage
as it drops to manually close the luggage compartment.
compartment.
Note: Before driving off, check the
instrument cluster for a trunk ajar message LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –
or warning indicator. Failure to do so could TROUBLESHOOTING
result in unintentionally leaving the luggage
compartment open while driving. An LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT –
unlatched decklid may block your rear view. WARNING LAMPS
USING THE REAR LUGGAGE Illuminates when the the ignition

is on and the luggage
COMPARTMENT EMERGENCY E159323 compartment is not completely
RELEASE closed.
E375545
269
Luggage Compartment
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Trunk Ajar Displays to remind you that the luggage compartment is not
completely closed.
270
Towing a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER LOADING YOUR TRAILER

PRECAUTIONS - BASE/GT
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR • Load the heaviest items closest
specified on the certification to the trailer floor.
label. • Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
WARNING: Towing trailers right side trailer tires.
beyond the maximum • Load the heaviest items above
recommended gross trailer the trailer axles or just slightly
weight exceeds the limit of your forward toward the trailer
vehicle and could result in engine tongue. Do not allow the final
damage, transmission damage, trailer tongue weight to go
structural damage, loss of above or below 10-15% of the
vehicle control, vehicle rollover loaded trailer weight. The
and personal injury. trailer tongue weight should
never exceed 10% of the
maximum towing capacity.
TOWING A TRAILER
• Select a ball mount with the
PRECAUTIONS - DARK HORSE correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
WARNING: Your vehicle is should be level, or slightly
not approved for trailer towing. angled down toward your
Never tow a trailer with your vehicle, when viewed from the
vehicle. side.
271
Towing a Trailer
TOWING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Market Website
United States of America https://www.fleet.ford.com/
towing-guides/
Canada https://www.fleet.ford.ca/towing-
guides/
272
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
OPENING THE CONVERTIBLE

TOP
When you use the top, you must first
unlatch it from the windshield and then
use the convertible top control.
Note: The convertible top does not operate
unless the vehicle is stationary or traveling
under 3 mph (5 km/h). A chime sounds and
a warning message appears in the
instrument panel. When you slow down, the
E174571
top operates.
Note: When you latch or unlatch the The windows open automatically when
convertible top, the audio system mutes you press the convertible top control.
briefly. This allows the vehicle to optimize To open the convertible top:
the cabin’s sound quality depending on the
1. Press and hold the convertible top
position of the convertible top.
control on the overhead console, until
To unlatch the convertible top: the windows are completely down and
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. the top stores completely.
The ignition must be on. We 2. Release the convertible top control.
recommend that the vehicle remains
running when you open the top to
prevent draining the battery.
2. Check the convertible top stowage
compartment behind the rear seat to
be sure it is empty. Make sure the
convertible top outer surface is free of
debris.
3. Move the latch handle, above the
interior mirror, down toward the
windshield and rotate the handle
clockwise to release the convertible
E174568
top.
Note: Do not store articles behind the rear
seat. Articles in the convertible top stowage
compartment may break the rear glass
window when you open the top.
Note: Opening the convertible top when
the top material is wet may cause mold or
mildew.
273
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
CLOSING THE CONVERTIBLE Latching the Convertible Top

TOP
Closing the Convertible Top
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop
and make sure to leave the ignition on.
We recommend that your vehicle
remains running when you open the
top to prevent draining the battery.
Note: The convertible top does not operate
unless your vehicle is stationary or traveling
under 3 mph (5 km/h). A tone sounds and
E178453
a warning message appears in the
instrument panel. When you slow down, the 1. Pull down on the latch handle and
top operates. rotate it counter-clockwise to secure
the convertible top.
2. After securing the convertible top fully,
push the latch handle up into the
stowed position to secure the latch.
Note: When you latch or unlatch the
convertible top, the audio system briefly
mutes. This allows the vehicle to optimize
the cabin’s sound quality depending on the
position of the convertible top.
Note: If you keep the top open for an
extended period of time or if the
E174568
temperature is low, the top material may
2. Press and hold the convertible top shrink slightly. If this happens, pull on the
control. When the convertible latch latch handle to secure the top.
handle is within reach, make sure it is
down and that you rotate it clockwise
so the latch is in the fully opened
position. Continue pressing the
convertible top control until the
windows completely lower, and the
top unfolds and moves forward toward
the windshield header.
3. When the top lines up evenly with the
windshield header, release the
convertible top control.
274
Driving Hints
COLD WEATHER DRIVING ECONOMICALLY

PRECAUTIONS
The following helps to improve fuel
The functional operation of some consumption:
components and systems can be affected • Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
at temperatures below approximately anticipate the road ahead to avoid
-13°F (-25°C). heavy braking.
• Regularly check your tire pressures and
DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE make sure that they are inflated to the
correct pressure.
• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule and carry out the
WARNING: If you are driving in
recommended checks.
slippery conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that • Plan your journey and check the traffic
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, before you set off. It is more efficient
allow for longer stopping distances and to combine errands into a single trip
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the whenever possible.
chances of a loss of vehicle control • Avoid idling the engine in cold weather
which can lead to serious injury or death. or for extended periods. Start the
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while engine only when you are ready to set
cornering, steer in the direction of the off.
slide until you regain control of your
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle.
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
On ice and snow, you should drive more • Do not add unnecessary accessories
slowly than usual. Your vehicle has a four to the exterior of your vehicle, for
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump example running boards. If you use a
the brake pedal. See Anti-Lock Braking roof rack, remember to fold it down or
System Limitations (page 181). remove it when not in use.
• Do not shift into neutral when you are
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
BREAKING-IN down.
You need to break in new tires for • Shut all windows when driving at high
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During speeds.
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some • Switch off all electric systems when
unusual driving characteristics. not in use, for example air conditioning.
Make sure that you unplug any
accessories from the auxiliary power
points when not in use.
275
Driving Hints
DRIVING THROUGH SHALLOW DRIVING THROUGH SHALLOW

WATER - BASE/GT WATER - DARK HORSE
WARNING: Do not attempt to WARNING: Do not attempt to

cross a deep or flowing body of water. cross a deep or flowing body of water.
Failure to follow this instruction could Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death. vehicle, personal injury or death.
Note: Driving through standing water can Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage. cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter. enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, Your vehicle has aerodynamic devices
check the depth. Never drive through water attached to the underbody designed to
that is higher than the bottom of the front help control airflow for superior
rocker area of your vehicle. performance. Therefore, the driver must
be especially careful to avoid driving
through deep or standing water. If driving
through deep or standing water is
unavoidable, do not exceed 10 mph
(16 km/h).
Never drive through water that is higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims. Water
may enter through the air intake due to the
vacuum generated in the engine. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused by the intake of water into the
engine.
E266447
Before driving through standing water,
When driving through standing water, drive check the depth.
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction could When driving through standing water, drive
be limited. After driving through water and very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
as soon as it is safe to do so: Your brake performance and traction could
be limited. After driving through water and
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the as soon as it is safe to do so:
brakes and to check that they work.
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
• Turn the steering wheel to check that brakes and to check that they work.
the steering power assist works.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
Check the function of the following: the steering power assist works.
• Horn Check the function of the following:
• Exterior lights
276
Driving Hints
• Horn
• Exterior lights
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat

designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your E142666
To install floor mats that have eyelets,
WARNING: Pedals that cannot position the floor mat eyelet over the
move freely can cause loss of vehicle retention post and press down to lock in
control and increase the risk of serious position. Repeat for all eyelets on the floor
personal injury. mat.
To remove the floor mats, reverse the
WARNING: Secure the floor mat installation procedure.
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
with the pedals. Failure to follow this make sure they are secure.
instruction could result in the loss of
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional

floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that

objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
277
Crash and Breakdown Information
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 50 mi (80 km) of the
If you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor disablement location or to the nearest
Company offers a complimentary roadside authorized dealer. If a member
assistance program. This program is requests a tow to an authorized dealer
separate from the New Vehicle Limited that is more than 50 mi (80 km) from
Warranty. the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
The service is available:
costs in excess of 50 mi (80 km).
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Warranty towing, non-warranty towing
• For the coverage period supplied with and collision towing are available.
your vehicle. • Roadside Assistance includes up to
Knowing your vehicle's VIN, mileage and $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
your specific location allows help to get to eligible vehicle requires service at the
you faster. nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
Roadside Assistance covers: not, then the trailer does not qualify for
• A flat tire change with a good spare any roadside services.
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit). Vehicles Sold in the United States:
• Battery jump start.
Using Roadside Assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement United States vehicle customers who
cost is the customer's responsibility). require Roadside Assistance, call
• Fuel delivery — independent service 1-800-241-3673.
contractors, if not prohibited by state, If you need to arrange roadside assistance
local or municipal law, shall deliver up on your own, Ford Motor Company
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) reimburses a reasonable amount for
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. towing to the nearest dealership within
Roadside assistance limits fuel delivery 50 mi (80 km). To obtain reimbursement
service to two no-charge occurrences information, United States vehicle
within a 12-month period. customers call 1-800-241-3673.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft Customers need to submit their original
(30 m) of a paved or county receipts.
maintained road, no recoveries.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
If you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company of Canada, Limited offers a
complimentary roadside assistance
program. This program is eligible within
Canada or the continental United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
278
This program is separate from the New Note: The hazard flashers operate when
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage not in the ignition. The battery loses charge
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside and could have insufficient power to restart
coverage and benefits may differ from the your vehicle.
U.S. coverage. For complete details, see Press the button again to switch them off.
your Warranty Guide at
www.ford.com/support/warranty/.
Download the Sykes4Ford Roadside JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
Assistance App for access to your roadside
assistance services. For more information, JUMP STARTING PRECAUTIONS
scan here:
WARNING: Batteries normally

produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
E398728
If you require more information, please call WARNING: Keep batteries out of
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit reach of children. Batteries contain
our website at www.ford.ca. sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to working near the battery to protect
modify or discontinue Roadside Assistance against possible splashing of acid
at any time. Certain restrictions apply to solution. In case of acid contact with skin
Roadside Assistance benefits. or eyes, flush immediately with water for
For further details, call a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
1-800-241-3673 (United States) medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
1-800-665-2006 (Canada) call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately

SWITCHING THE HAZARD sized cables with insulated clamps.
FLASHERS ON AND OFF
The hazard flasher button is on cables are clear of any moving parts and
E75790 the instrument panel. Press the fuel delivery system parts.
button to switch the hazard
flashers on if your vehicle is creating a WARNING: Connect batteries with
safety hazard for other road users. only the same nominal voltage.
When you switch the hazard flashers on,
all front and rear direction indicators flash.
279
WARNING: If the engine is running

while the hood is open, stay clear of
moving engine components. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
Do not attempt to push-start an automatic

transmission vehicle. This could cause
transmission damage.
Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle. This could damage your
vehicle's electrical system.
PREPARING THE VEHICLE

Use only a 12 volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

E281345
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the

negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: If you are using a jump pack or

booster box, follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Note: In the illustration that follows, the
bottom vehicle represents the booster
vehicle. E388149
1. Lift the red cap. Connect the positive

(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
280
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
WHAT IS THE POST-CRASH
4. Make the final connection of the ALERT SYSTEM
negative (-) jumper cable to the jump
start stud, as shown in the following The system helps draw attention to your
illustration. vehicle in the event of a serious impact.
Note: Do not use the hood latch as a
negative (-) connection point. This could HOW DOES THE POST-CRASH
cause springs in the latch to burn and ALERT SYSTEM WORK
prevent the hood from operating correctly.
The system is designed to turn the hazard
flashers on, turn the courtesy lamps on,
intermittently sound the horn and unlock
all doors in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag or the seatbelt
pretensioners.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS
Depending on applicable laws in the
country your vehicle was built for, the horn
E386942 does not sound in the event of a serious
impact.
Starting the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle SWITCHING THE POST-CRASH
and moderately rev the engine, or ALERT SYSTEM OFF
gently press the accelerator to keep
the engine speed between 2000 RPM Press the hazard flasher switch, the unlock
and 3000 RPM, as shown in your button on the remote control, the panic
tachometer. button on the remote control or cycle the
ignition to switch the system off.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
battery runs out of charge.
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables. POST-COLLISION BRAKING
Removing the Jumper Cables How Does Post-Collision Braking
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse Work
order that they were connected. In the event of a moderate to severe crash,
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on the braking system reduces the vehicle’s
when disconnecting the cables. The peak speed to prevent or reduce the impact of
voltage could blow the bulbs. a potential secondary crash.
281
Post-Collision Braking Limitations 4. Attempt to start your vehicle.

Post-collision braking does not activate if Note: If your vehicle does not start after the
any of the following occur: third attempt, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
• The anti-lock braking system is
damaged during the collision.
• Electronic stability control is disabled.
RECOVERY TOWING
Overriding Post-Collision Braking ACCESSING THE FRONT TOWING

POINT - VEHICLES WITH:
You can override post-collision braking by
ECOBOOST™ PERFORMANCE
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
PACKAGE/GT PERFORMANCE
Post-Collision Braking Indicators PACKAGE
It flashes when a post-collision There is an installation point for the
braking event is occurring. recovery hook behind the fascia.
E138639
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC CRASH

SHUTOFF
The automatic crash shutoff is designed
to stop the fuel going to the engine in the
event of a moderate or severe crash.
Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff.
E381755
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF 1. Insert a suitable tool into the hole on

PRECAUTIONS the underside of the cover.
2. Carefully pry off the cover.
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system LOCATING THE TOWING EYE
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in
could result in fire, personal injury or
recovery hook, it is with the spare tire kit.
death.
INSTALLING THE TOWING EYE

RE-ENABLING YOUR VEHICLE
Insert the recovery hook into the
1. Switch the ignition off. installation point and turn it
2. Attempt to start your vehicle. counterclockwise. Make sure that you fully
tighten the recovery hook.
3. Switch the ignition off.
282
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a

professional towing service or your
roadside assistance service provider.
Your manufacturer produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Vehicle damage could occur if
E376529
towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a Front-wheel and rear-wheel drive vehicles
left-hand thread. must have their designated drive wheels
off the ground regardless of towing
direction. Use tow dollies to prevent
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE damage to the transmission.
All-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicles
require that all wheels be off the ground
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission and drive system.
Note: You need to switch on the ignition to
unlock the steering.
Note: Make sure you check the steering
column before towing. It could lock if the
battery is dead.
FAIL-SAFE COOLING
WHAT IS FAIL-SAFE COOLING

Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs due to
overheating.
The fail-safe distance depends on outside
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
E143886
283
HOW DOES FAIL-SAFE COOLING

WORK WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
If the engine reaches a preset
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
over-temperature condition, the engine
minutes for the cooling system to cool
automatically switches to alternating
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
with a thick cloth to prevent the
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
When this occurs, your vehicle still the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
operates, however: could result in personal injury.
• Engine power is limited.
Continued operation increases the engine
• The air conditioning system turns off. temperature, causing the engine to
Continued operation increases the engine completely shut down. Your steering and
temperature, causing the engine to braking effort increases in this situation.
completely shut down. Your steering and When the engine temperature cools, you
braking effort increases in this situation. can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
When the engine temperature cools, you checked as soon as possible to minimize
can re-start the engine. engine damage.
Note: Have your vehicle checked as soon Your vehicle has limited engine power
as possible to minimize engine damage. when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
DRIVING WHEN FAIL-SAFE MODE maintain high-speed operation and the
IS ACTIVATED engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for engine damage. In this situation:
use during emergencies only. Operate 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as possible and switch the engine off.
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
2. If you are a member of a roadside
to rest in a safe location and seek
assistance program, we recommend
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
that you contact your roadside
mode, your vehicle will have limited
assistance service provider.
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may 3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
completely shut down without warning, period of time for the engine to cool.
potentially losing engine power, power 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
steering assist, and power brake assist, level is at or below the minimum mark,
which may increase the possibility of a add prediluted coolant immediately.
crash resulting in serious injury.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
284
FAIL-SAFE COOLING INDICATORS

If the engine begins to overheat,
E103308 the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone.
A warning lamp illuminates and
E67028
a message may appear in the
285
Towing Your Vehicle
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

PRECAUTIONS
Use the following guidelines when towing
your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in vehicle damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s
configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
RECREATIONALLY TOWING
YOUR VEHICLE
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. You must recreational tow your
vehicle with all four wheels off the ground,
such as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
your vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOWING
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies or a vehicle
transport trailer, it can be flat-towed with
all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission configuration,
under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Automatic
Transmission (page 175).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
286
Fuses
FUSE PRECAUTIONS UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE UNDER HOOD

WARNING: Always disconnect the FUSE BOX
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of

electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
WARNING: Always replace a fuse

with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire. E371298
ACCESSING THE UNDER HOOD

FUSE BOX
E371299
287
Fuses
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
E407167
Item Rating Protected Component
1 40 A Body control module 1.

2 30 A Not used (spare).
3 30 A Body control module 2.
4 40 A Fuel pump.
5 5A Not used (spare).
6 15 A Vehicle power 1.
11 30 A Starter motor.
13 40 A Blower motor.
16 10 A Decklid release.
288
Fuses

23 10 A Automatic brake system
module.
24 10 A Powertrain control module.
Electronic power assist
steering.
valve.
pump.
30 40 A Driver power seat.
Driver seat module.
31 30 A Passenger power seat.
32 20 A Power point 1.
33 20 A Power point 2.
37 20 A Convertible top motor - left-
hand side.
38 30 A Climate controlled seat.
41 20 A Convertible top motor -
right-hand side.
50 40 A Heated rear window.
289
Fuses
51 10 A Heated exterior mirror.

68 20 A Electronic steering column
lock.
69 30 A Wiper motor.
84A 60 A Not used (spare).
84B 30 A Not used (spare).
100 15 A Left-hand headlamps.
101 15 A Right-hand headlamps.
120 15 A Fuel injectors.
124 5A Rain sensor.
130 20 A Differential pump.
137 10 A Advanced driver assistance
module.
139 5A USB charge port 2.
290
Fuses

148 5A Left-hand tail lamp.
149 5A Right-hand tail lamp.
158 20 A Transmission fluid pump.
160 10 A On-board diagnostic
connector.
Gateway module.
181 5A Headlamp control module.
182 30 A Body control module.
184 7.5 A Wireless accessory charging
module.
291
Fuses
BODY CONTROL MODULE ACCESSING THE BODY CONTROL

MODULE FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE BODY CONTROL

MODULE FUSE BOX
E371297
E371296
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX
E174564
292
Fuses
1 — Not used.
2 10 A Power windows.
3 7.5 A Not used (spare).
4 20 A Amplifier.
5 — Not used.
7 10 A Auxiliary body module.
8 5A Telematics control unit
module.
9 5A Intrusion sensor module.
Performance electric
parking brake.
10 — Not used.
11 — Not used.
12 7.5 A Climate control module.
13 7.5 A Steering column control
module.
Instrument cluster display.
14 15 A Not used.
15 15 A SYNC.
16 — Not used (spare).
19 5A Headlamp switch.
20 5A Push button ignition switch.
21 5A Not used.
22 5A Vehicle dynamics module.
23 30 A Driver door module.
Driver door window.
293
Fuses
24 30 A Vehicle dynamics module.

25 20 A Amplifier.
26 30 A Passenger door module.
Passenger door window.
27 30 A Left-hand rear window
power (convertible).
28 30 A Right-hand rear window
power (convertible).
29 15 A Instrument cluster module.
31 10 A SYNC display screen.
Integrated control panel.
Gateway module.
Remote keyless entry.
32 20 A Audio unit.
33 — Not used.
34 30 A Run/start relay.
35 5A Auxiliary body module.
37 20 A Auto-dimming interior
mirror.
Heated steering wheel.
ACCESSING THE HIGH CURRENT

HIGH CURRENT FUSE BOX FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE HIGH CURRENT To access the fuses in the high current fuse
FUSE BOX box, contact an authorized dealer.
To locate the fuses in the high current fuse IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE
box, contact an authorized dealer. HIGH CURRENT FUSE BOX
To identify the fuses in the high current
fuse box, contact an authorized dealer.
294
Fuses
IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES
E267379
A Micro 2.
B Micro 3.
C Maxi.
D Mini.
E M Case.
F J Case.
G J Case Low Profile.
H Slotted M Case.
FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING
FUSES – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
When do I need to check a fuse?
• If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working.
When do I need to replace a fuse?

• If a fuse has blown.
How do I identify a blown fuse?

• You can identify a blown fuse by a
broken wire within the fuse.
295
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD
Service your vehicle regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale Opening the Hood
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which E142457
parts and services are covered.
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
handle located under the left-hand
fluids and service parts conforming to
side of the instrument panel.
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 363). 2. Slightly lift the hood.
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material, such as cigarettes, away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Set the parking brake, shift the E174561
transmission to park (P) and block the
wheels. 3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood

Lower the hood and make sure it fully
latches.
296
Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly

closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
E383612
A Battery (out of view). See Changing the 12V Battery (page 308).
B Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 299).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 299).
D Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 182).
E Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant Level (page 302).
F Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 301).
G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 94).
H Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 287).
Note: Your vehicle may not have an engine

cover as shown.
297
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L
E395653
A. Battery (out of view). See Changing the 12V Battery (page 308).
B. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 287).
C. Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 299).
D. Engine oil dipstick. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 299).
E. Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant Level (page 302).
F. Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 182).
G. Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 301).
H. Washer system fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 94).
298
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL 7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is

fully seated.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK OVERVIEW Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Note: Increases in oil level can occur from
frequent short trips that do not allow the
engine to get to operating temperature, as
well as frequent idling or low speed driving
for long periods of time.
Note: If oil levels are continuously noted
above the maximum mark, have your vehicle
E270482 ADDING ENGINE OIL
A Minimum.
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
B Nominal. cap when the engine is running.
C Maximum.
WARNING: Do not add engine oil
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL this instruction could result in personal
injury.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground. Do not use supplemental engine oil
2. Check the oil level before starting the additives because they are unnecessary
engine, or switch the engine off after and could lead to engine damage that the
warm up and wait 15 minutes for the vehicle warranty may not cover.
oil to drain into the oil pan. 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
Note: Checking the oil level too soon could oil filler cap before you remove it.
result in an inaccurate reading. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with 3. Add engine oil that meets our
a clean, lint-free cloth. specifications. See Capacities and
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it Specifications (page 363).
is fully seated. 4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the it clockwise until you feel a strong
oil level. resistance.
Note: If the oil level is between the Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level maximum mark. Oil levels above the
is acceptable. Do not add oil. maximum mark may cause engine damage.
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage
immediately add oil. with an absorbent cloth.
299
Maintenance
INTELLIGENT OIL LIFE MONITOR Change the air filter element at the proper
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
Under certain conditions the vehicle’s (page 433).
intelligent oil life monitor may determine
When changing the air filter element, use
your oil requires replacement prior to your
only the air filter element listed. See
general service. Should this occur it is
Capacities and Specifications (page
recommended you replace your oil within
363).
two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of being
alerted. Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element could result in severe engine
Your authorized dealer will be able to
damage that the vehicle Warranty may not
advise you whether only an engine oil and
cover.
filter change is recommended or whether
you should complete your general service Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do
inclusive of oil and oil Filter. not allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system. The engine is susceptible
RESETTING THE INTELLIGENT OIL to damage from even small particles.
LIFE MONITOR
3. Select Oil Life.
4. Press and hold the OK button until the
system reset confirmation appears.
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION
For filling information, please refer to the
Capacities and Specifications section of
your owner's manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 363).
ENGINE AIR FILTER E386184
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR 1. Release the clips that secure the air
FILTER - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
WARNING: To reduce the risk of air filter housing.
vehicle damage and personal burn 4. To install, reverse the removal
injuries, do not start your engine with the procedure.
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
300
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR 1. Release the clips that secure the air
FILTER - 5.0L filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of

vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Change the air filter element at the proper

intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 433).
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
E387033
363). 3. Loosen the clamp that secures the air
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter filter to the air duct.
element could result in severe engine 4. Remove the air filter element from the
damage that the vehicle Warranty may not air filter housing.
cover.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do
not allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system. The engine is susceptible
to damage from even small particles.
E387034
5. To install, reverse the removal

procedure.
Note: Ensure that the tab on the bottom of
the filter is properly seated to the notch in
the housing.
6. Repeat the procedure with the second
air filter assembly.
E395654
301
Maintenance
COOLANT ADDING COOLANT
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL

WARNING: Do not add coolant
when the vehicle is on or the cooling
system is hot. Failure to follow this
WARNING: Do not remove the instruction could result in personal injury.
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 WARNING: Do not remove the
minutes for the cooling system to cool coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
with a thick cloth to prevent the minutes for the cooling system to cool
possibility of scalding and slowly remove down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction with a thick cloth to prevent the
could result in personal injury. possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
WARNING: To reduce the risk of could result in personal injury.
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
pressure relief cap. The cooling system to touch your skin or eyes. If this
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid happens, rinse the affected areas
can come out forcefully when you loosen immediately with plenty of water and
the cap slightly. contact your physician.
When the engine is cold, check the WARNING: Do not put coolant in
concentration and level of the coolant at the windshield washer reservoir. If
the intervals listed in the scheduled sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
maintenance information. See Scheduled make it difficult to see through the
Maintenance (page 433). windshield.
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on WARNING: Do not add coolant
the coolant reservoir. further than the MAX mark.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
level may extend beyond the MAX mark. system sealants, or non-specified additives
This is normal. as they can cause damage to the engine
Maintain coolant concentration within cooling or heating systems. Resulting
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze component damage may not be covered by
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F the vehicle Warranty.
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be Note: Automotive fluids are not
checked using a refractometer. We do not interchangeable.
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
302
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
coolant approved to the correct reservoir the next few times you drive
specification in order to avoid plugging the your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
small passageways in the engine cooling prediluted engine coolant to bring the
system. See Capacities and coolant level to the correct level.
Specifications (page 363). Do not mix If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
different colors or types of coolant in your engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using vehicle checked as soon as possible.
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine Operating an engine with a low level of
or cooling system components and may coolant can result in engine overheating
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. and possible engine damage.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, In case of emergency, you can add a large
use the approved concentrated coolant amount of water without engine coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with deionised or in order to reach a vehicle service location.
distilled water. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 363). Using water that Water alone, without engine coolant, can
has not been deionised may contribute to cause engine damage from corrosion,
deposit formation, corrosion and plugging overheating or freezing.
of the small cooling system passageways. Do not use the following as a coolant
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and substitute:
models may not be approved to our • Alcohol.
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component • Methanol.
damage may not be covered by the vehicle • Brine.
Warranty. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
If the coolant level is at or below the methanol antifreeze.
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
immediately. damage from overheating or freezing.
To top up the coolant level do the Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
following: the coolant. These can be harmful and
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure compromise the corrosion protection of
escapes as you unscrew the cap. the coolant.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See CHANGING THE COOLANT
363). For coolant change, see your authorized
dealer.
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level. Changing the coolant is necessary at
specific mileage intervals listed in the
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn scheduled maintenance information. See
the cap clockwise until it contacts the Scheduled Maintenance (page 433).
hard stop.
303
Maintenance
MANAGING THE COOLANT The air conditioning may automatically

TEMPERATURE turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the overheating. When the coolant
engine may temporarily reach a higher temperature decreases to the normal
temperature during severe operating operating temperature, the air conditioning
conditions, for example ascending a long turns on.
or steep grade in high ambient
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
temperatures.
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature warning or service engine
temperature gauge moves toward the red soon messages appear in your information
zone and a message may appear in the display, do the following:
information display.
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
WARNING: To reduce the risk of shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
crash and injury, be prepared that the 2. Leave the engine running until the
vehicle speed may reduce and the coolant temperature gauge needle
vehicle may not be able to accelerate returns to the normal position. If the
with full power until the coolant temperature does not drop after
temperature reduces. several minutes, follow the remaining
steps.
WARNING: If you continue to drive 3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
your vehicle when the engine is cool. Check the coolant level.
overheating, the engine could stop
without warning. Failure to follow this 4. If the coolant level is at or below the
instruction could result in the loss of minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
control of your vehicle. immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
You may notice a reduction in vehicle the engine and continue.
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant COOLANT – WARNING LAMPS
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and If the engine begins to overheat,
high-load conditions take place. The E103308 the coolant temperature gauge
amount of speed reduction depends on moves toward the red zone.
vehicle loading, grade and outside
temperature. If this occurs, there is no A warning lamp illuminates and
need to stop your vehicle. You can E67028
a message may appear in the
continue to drive. See Fail-Safe Cooling information display.
(page 283).
304
Maintenance
COOLANT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description and Action
High engine temperature Stop safely Displays when the engine temperature is
too high. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so, switch the engine off and
allow it to cool. If the problem persists, have
See Checking the Coolant Level (page
302).
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER

Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that
integrates with the fuel tank. It does not
need regular maintenance or replacement.
305
Maintenance
DRIVE BELT ROUTING OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
E383613
A. Long drive belt is closest to the engine.

B. Short drive belt is furthest from the engine.
306
Maintenance
DRIVE BELT ROUTING

OVERVIEW - 5.0L WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals and related accessories
E378263 contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
A. Short drive belt is closest to the California to cause cancer and
engine. reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
B. Long drive belt is furthest from
the engine. WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
12V BATTERY does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you
12V BATTERY PRECAUTIONS disconnect the battery cables from all
batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can WARNING: For vehicles with
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement
allow flames, sparks or lighted is different. You must replace the battery
substances to come near the battery. with one of exactly the same
When working near the battery, always specification.
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WHAT IS THE BATTERY
WARNING: When lifting a MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow The battery management system monitors
through the vent caps, resulting in battery conditions and takes actions to
personal injury and damage to the extend battery life.
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
307
Maintenance
HOW DOES THE BATTERY Note: If you add electrical accessories or

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WORK components to the vehicle, it could
adversely affect battery performance and
If excessive battery drain is detected, the durability. This could also affect the
system temporarily disables some performance of other electrical systems in
electrical systems to protect the battery. the vehicle.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
• Heated seats. The battery is in the engine compartment.
• Climate control. See Maintenance (page 296).
• Heated steering wheel. Your vehicle has a maintenance-free
• Audio unit. battery. It does not require additional
water during service.
• Navigation system.
If the vehicle battery has a cover, make
A message could appear in the information sure you correctly install it after cleaning
display to alert you that battery protection or replacing the battery.
actions are active. This message is only for
notification that an action is taking place, For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
and not intended to indicate an electrical top of the battery clean and dry and the
problem or that the battery requires battery cables tightly fastened to the
replacement. battery terminals. If any corrosion is
present on the battery or terminals, remove
the cables from the terminals and clean
BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
LIMITATIONS acid with a solution of baking soda and
water.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an We recommend that you disconnect the
external charger, the battery management negative battery cable terminal from the
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
time to relearn the battery state of charge. an extended period.
During this time, your vehicle must remain Note: If you only disconnect the negative
fully locked with the ignition switched off. battery cable terminal, make sure it is
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state isolated or placed away from the battery
of charge, the battery management system terminal to avoid unintended connection or
could temporarily disable some electrical arcing.
systems. If you disconnect or replace the battery
Electrical Accessory Installation and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive
To make sure the battery management strategy. Because of this, the transmission
system works correctly, do not connect an may shift firmly when first driven. This is
electrical device ground connection normal operation while the transmission
directly to the battery negative post. This fully updates its operation to optimum
can cause inaccurate measurements of shift feel.
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
308
Maintenance
Removing the Battery Note: Make sure that you correctly install
the battery terminal covers, battery cover
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the and battery cable terminals.
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for RESETTING THE BATTERY
example lights and radio. SENSOR
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery. When you install a new battery, reset the
battery sensor by doing the following:
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered 1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
for a period of time after you switch the engine off.
ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting seconds.
the battery without waiting can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle 2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
Warranty. times, ending with the high beams off.
4. Disconnect and isolate the negative 3. Press and release the brake pedal three
battery cable terminal. times.
5. Disconnect and isolate the positive The battery warning lamp flashes three
battery cable terminal. times to confirm that the reset is
successful.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery. RECYCLING AND DISPOSING OF
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle THE 12V BATTERY
battery, you must reset the following
features: Make sure that you dispose of
• Window bounce-back. See Window old batteries in an
E107998
Bounce-Back (page 105). environmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authority
• Clock Settings. about recycling old batteries.
• Pre-set radio stations.
Replacing the Battery 12V BATTERY –

Note: Before reconnecting the battery, TROUBLESHOOTING
make sure the ignition remains switched off.
You must replace the battery with one of 12V BATTERY – WARNING LAMPS
exactly the same specification.
If it illuminates while driving, it
To install, reverse the removal procedure. E67021
indicates a charging system
error. Switch off all unnecessary
electrical equipment and have your vehicle
immediately checked.
309
Maintenance
12V BATTERY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
Soon or continues to come on, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service The charging system needs servicing. Have your vehicle
Now immediately checked.
Battery State of Charge The battery management system determines that the 12V
Low battery is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to charge
the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. Always use the vehicle ground point when connecting
the negative cable of the external battery charger. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 280). This message clears once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Do not switch on the ignition when a battery
charger is in use to charge the battery.
Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge
has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Electrical Power Saver Displayed when the battery management system detects an
Active Some Features extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
Turned Off See Manual be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, have
the alignment of your headlamps checked
by an authorized dealer.
310
Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142465
E142592 4. On the wall or screen you will observe

a flat zone of high intensity light at the
A 8 ft (2.4 m). top of the right-hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the
B Center height of lamp to ground. high intensity light zone is not at the
C 25 ft (7.6 m). horizontal reference line, the headlamp
needs to be adjusted.
D Horizontal reference line.
Vertical Aim Adjustment

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp indicated by a 3 mm
circle on the lens to the ground and
mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height, a piece of E250054
masking tape works well.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
adjusting, you may want to block the light headlamp. Use a Phillips #2
from one headlamp while adjusting the screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
other. clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the vertical aim of the
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to headlamp.
illuminate the wall or screen and open
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
other headlamp.
so no light hits the wall.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment

The headlamps are not equipped with
horizontal adjusters.
311
Maintenance
EXTERIOR BULBS
EXTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION

CHART
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
INTERIOR BULBS
INTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION

CHART
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
312
Track Use
Appropriately change the engine oil for After operating your vehicle at high speeds
track events. Before and after track events, or track day driving, do the following:
drain the engine oil and replace the engine • Set the tire pressure to the proper
oil filter. specification.
• 2.3L: See Engine Oil Capacity and • Check and set the lug nut torque. See
Specification (page 369). Wheel Nuts (page 361).
• 5.0L: See Engine Oil Capacity and • Check all fluid levels.
Specification (page 370).
• Refer to the track maintenance interval
Regularly check the engine oil level during chart. See Normal Scheduled
the event. Maintain the engine oil level at Maintenance (page 436).
or near the max mark on the engine oil • Check the front and rear wheel
dipstick. See Checking the Engine Oil bearings for abnormal wear.
Level (page 299).
• Inspect brake caliper dust boots for
Operating at High Speeds and abnormal wear.
Track Days
Drive Modes and Track Apps
If you are operating your vehicle on a drag
WARNING: Before driving at high strip, use the drag strip selectable drive
speeds, adjust the tire pressures to the mode in addition to using line lock and
recommended tire inflation pressures launch control to provide a specific set-up
which are on the tire information label tuned for the quickest straight line elapsed
on the driver side B-pillar. Failure to times.
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal If you are operating your vehicle on a road
injury or death. course, use the sport or track selectable
drive mode to provide a specific set-up
tuned for optimal shift and suspension
Your vehicle is capable of sustained high
set-up that is tuned towards handling
speeds and track day driving.
prowess on closed course surfaces. See
Before operating your vehicle at high Drive Modes (page 227). See Track Apps
speeds: (page 402).
• Verify your tires have the correct
pressures. Recovery Towing
• Inspect wheels and tires for wear and If needed, your vehicle has an installation
damage. Replace any damaged wheels point for a recovery hook behind the fascia.
and tires. See Recovery Towing (page 282).
• Check and set lug nut torque. See Track Use Maintenance Intervals
Wheel Nuts (page 361).
• Verify fluid levels for oil, coolant, brake Follow these maintenance intervals for
and hydraulic fluid. See Capacities when you use your vehicle on a track or in
and Specifications (page 363). a high speed event.
• Change the oil and filter prior to use on
the track.
313
Track Use
Interval Vehicle Use and Example
One track weekend or approximately 4 Change the engine oil and filter.
hours of track use.
1 Change the rear axle fluid.
Every 500 mi (800 km).
1 Change the fluid every 500 mi (800 km) or when a message appears in the instrument
cluster display stating that the axle fluid is over temperature.
Timing Chain Brake Burnishing

Properly burnish the brakes prior to heavy
If you use your vehicle extensively at a race
track use. Excessive brake noise may occur
track or at high rpm, it is possible to exceed
after the track burnish or track use.
the service life of the engine timing chain.
Perform this procedure in a safe manner
A wrench indicator illuminates when it is
on dry pavement, and in compliance with
time for you to replace your chain. Have
all local and state ordinances and laws
regarding motor vehicle operation.
Adjustable Camber Front Strut How to Burnish the Brakes
Top Mounts (If Equipped)
Initial low temperature bedding:
Your vehicle has adjustable strut mounts
which you can use to adjust the camber of • If your brakes already have 200 mi
your vehicle before and after a track event (322 km) or more of city driving, skip
to the specifications listed in the Road this step and go directly to the high
Course Alignment Recommendations table temperature bedding cycle procedure.
previously shown. Otherwise, perform at least 30 stops
from 50 mph (80 km/h) at 1/3 g
Note: After your track day is complete, deceleration with 1 mi (1.2 km) spacing
return your car to the street alignment and between stops. A deceleration gauge
tire pressures. can be accessed through the Track
Apps menu in your touchscreen.
Catch Can
High temperature bedding cycle:
If you plan to track your vehicle and it did • Beginning with cool brakes, perform 15
not come with an oil catch can, we consecutive stops back to back,
recommend that you purchase the catch accelerating at 3/4 throttle to 80 mph
can kit though your authorized dealer or (128 km/h) and braking to 20 mph
Ford Performance Parts Catalog. (32 km/h) at 1.0 g deceleration. The
Installation instructions are included with brakes may emit an odor or smoke
the catch can. during this part of the procedure.
The catch can has a self-draining feature Cool down:
and does not require any maintenance. • Cool the brakes down by driving one or
two laps, 5 mi (8 km), at 60 mph
(96 km/h) with minimal to no brake
usage.
314
Track Use
Recovery low temperature bedding: • Verify fluid levels for oil, coolant, brake
• Perform at least 30 stops from 50 mph and hydraulic fluid. See Capacities
(80 km/h) at 1/3 g deceleration with and Specifications (page 363).
0.7 mi (1.2 km) spacing between stops. • Change the oil and filter prior to use on
A deceleration gauge can be accessed the track.
through the Track Apps menu in your After operating your vehicle at high speeds
touchscreen. or track day driving, do the following:
• Set the tire pressure to the proper
TRACK USE - DARK HORSE specification.
• Check and set the lug nut torque. See
Appropriately change the engine oil for
track events. Before and after track events,
drain the engine oil and replace the engine • Check all fluid levels.
oil filter. See Engine Oil Capacity and • Refer to the track maintenance interval
Specification (page 370). chart. See Normal Scheduled
Regularly check the engine oil level during Maintenance (page 436).
the event. Maintain the engine oil level at • Check the front and rear wheel
or near the max mark on the engine oil bearings for abnormal wear.
dipstick. See Checking the Engine Oil • Inspect brake caliper dust boots for
Level (page 299). abnormal wear.
Operating at High Speeds and Drive Modes and Track Apps
Track Days
If you are operating your vehicle on a drag
strip, use the drag strip selectable drive
WARNING: Before driving at high mode in addition to using line lock and
speeds, adjust the tire pressures to the launch control to provide a specific set-up
recommended tire inflation pressures tuned for the quickest straight line elapsed
which are on the tire information label times.
on the driver side B-pillar. Failure to If you are operating your vehicle on a road
follow this instruction could result in the course, use the sport or track selectable
loss of control of your vehicle, personal drive mode to provide a specific set-up
injury or death. tuned for optimal shift and suspension
set-up that is tuned towards handling
Your vehicle is capable of sustained high prowess on closed course surfaces. See
speeds and track day driving. Drive Modes (page 227). See Track Apps
Before operating your vehicle at high (page 402).
speeds:
Recovery Towing
• Verify your tires have the correct
pressures. If needed, your vehicle has an installation
point for a recovery hook behind the fascia.
• Inspect wheels and tires for wear and
See Recovery Towing (page 282).
damage. Replace any damaged wheels
and tires.
• Check and set lug nut torque. See
315
Track Use
Track Use Maintenance Intervals when you use your vehicle on a track or in
a high speed event.
Follow these maintenance intervals for
One track weekend or approximately 4 Change the engine oil and filter.
hours of track use.
1 Change the rear axle fluid.
Every 500 mi (800 km).
1 Change the fluid every 500 mi (800 km) or when a message appears in the instrument
cluster display stating that the axle fluid is over temperature.
Timing Chain Aerodynamics (If Equipped)
If you use your vehicle extensively at a race Rear Gurney Flap

track or at high rpm, it is possible to exceed
the service life of the engine timing chain.
A wrench indicator illuminates when it is
time for you to replace your chain. Have
Adjustable Camber Front Strut

Top Mounts (If Equipped)
Your vehicle has adjustable strut mounts
which you can use to adjust the camber of
your vehicle before and after a track event
to the specifications listed in the Road E307008
Course Alignment Recommendations table
previously shown. The rear Gurney flap must be removed
Note: After your track day is complete, for on-road driving.
return your car to the street alignment and Your vehicle may include a removable
tire pressures. Gurney flap in the luggage compartment.
The Gurney flap greatly enhances high
speed stability and performance on the
track. It is recommended that you use the
Gurney flap at all tracks featuring high
speed corners and can be used at any track
regardless of cornering speeds.
316
Track Use
You could benefit from the removal Gurney Brake Burnishing

flap to improve low speed balance on
smaller tracks with maximum cornering Properly burnish the brakes prior to heavy
speeds below 70 mph (112 km/h). We track use. Excessive brake noise may occur
recommend that you attach the Gurney after the track burnish or track use.
flap for all track events and carefully Perform this procedure in a safe manner
assess both the vehicle's condition and on dry pavement, and in compliance with
your capability before removal. all local and state ordinances and laws
regarding motor vehicle operation.
How to Burnish the Brakes

Initial low temperature bedding:
• If your brakes already have 200 mi
(322 km) or more of city driving, skip
this step and go directly to the high
temperature bedding cycle procedure.
E310471 Otherwise, perform at least 30 stops
from 50 mph (80 km/h) at 1/3 g
deceleration with 1 mi (1.2 km) spacing
between stops. A deceleration gauge
can be accessed through the Track
Apps menu in your touchscreen.
High temperature bedding cycle:
• Beginning with cool brakes, perform 15
consecutive stops back to back,
E310472 accelerating at 3/4 throttle to 80 mph
(128 km/h) and braking to 20 mph
Note: The Gurney flap comes with longer
(32 km/h) at 1.0 g deceleration. The
size bolts to install it onto the rear spoiler.
brakes may emit an odor or smoke
Do not use the longer size bolts without
during this part of the procedure.
the Gurney flap attached or damage to
the spoiler may occur. Cool down:
• Cool the brakes down by driving one or
Catch Can two laps, 5 mi (8 km), at 60 mph
If you plan to track your vehicle and it did (96 km/h) with minimal to no brake
not come with an oil catch can, we usage.
recommend that you purchase the catch Recovery low temperature bedding:
can kit though your authorized dealer or
• Perform at least 30 stops from 50 mph
Ford Performance Parts Catalog.
(80 km/h) at 1/3 g deceleration with
Installation instructions are included with 0.7 mi (1.2 km) spacing between stops.
the catch can. A deceleration gauge can be accessed
The catch can has a self-draining feature through the Track Apps menu in your
and does not require any maintenance. touchscreen.
317
Vehicle Care
CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results, use the following products

or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada) -

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada) -
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & -
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada) -
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37- WSS-M14P19-A
F/M (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, -
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.) -
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada) -
318
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Note: We recommend cleaning the power

sliding rear window at regular intervals to
avoid dust and debris accumulation to
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR deliver appropriate function.
PRECAUTIONS
Immediately remove fuel spillages, additive CLEANING CHROME, ALUMINIUM
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits OR STAINLESS STEEL
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend that you only use a car
Remove any exterior accessories, for shampoo, a soft cloth and water on
example antennas, before entering a car bumpers and other chrome, aluminium or
wash. stainless steel parts.
Note: For additional information and
CLEANING HEADLAMPS AND assistance, we recommend that you contact
REAR LAMPS an authorized dealer.
Note: Rinse the area well after cleaning.
We recommend that you only use cold or
lukewarm water containing car shampoo Note: Do not use abrasive materials, for
to clean the headlamps and the rear example steel wool or plastic pads, as they
lamps. can scratch these surfaces.
Do not scrape the lamps. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Do not wipe lamps when they are dry.
CLEANING WHEELS
CLEANING WINDOWS AND WIPER
BLADES Only use a recommended wheel and tire
cleaner to clean the wheels weekly. For
To clean the windshield and wiper blades: additional information and assistance, we
• Clean the windshield with a recommend that you contact an
non-abrasive glass cleaner. authorized dealer.
Note: When cleaning the interior of the 1. Use a sponge to remove heavy
windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner deposits of dirt and brake dust.
on the instrument panel or door panels. 2. Rinse well after cleaning.
Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
• Clean the wiper blades with washer
fluid or water applied with a soft If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
sponge or cloth. extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
Note: Do not use razor blades or other a few minutes before parking your vehicle.
sharp objects to clean or remove decals This reduces the risk of corrosion of the
from the inside of the heated rear window. brake discs, brake pads and linings.
This can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty. Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
319
Vehicle Care
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, CLEANING CAMERA LENSES AND

harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel SENSORS
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers. We recommend that you only use
lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth
to clean the camera lens and sensors.
CLEANING THE CONVERTIBLE
TOP (If Equipped) Note: Do not pressure wash camera lens
and sensors.
Remove lint with a lint roller or vacuum
with a soft bristle brush. CLEANING THE UNDERBODY
Wash with an approved high quality
convertible top cleaner and protectant. Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
Note: Do not use stiff bristle brushes, drain holes free from packed dirt.
abrasive materials or household cleaning
products. Rear suspension components may require
regular cleaning with a power washer or a
Note: High pressure water may cause water thorough rinse with a strong stream of
leaks and possible seal damage to the water if the vehicle is operated in dusty or
convertible top. muddy environments. Rear leaf springs or
other suspension components may emit
CLEANING STRIPES OR squeaking or popping noises while
GRAPHICS operating the vehicle if particles, such as
dirt, rocks, or other debris, are present in
It is recommended to wash your vehicle by the components.
hand however, pressure washing may be
used under the following conditions:
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (30 cm) PANEL
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
• Do not use water pressure higher than WARNING: Do not use chemical
1,450 psi (10,000 kPa). solvents or strong detergents when
• Do not use water hotter than 167°F cleaning the steering wheel or
(75°C). instrument panel to avoid contamination
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle of the airbag system.
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to We recommend that you only clean the
peel away from the vehicle's surface. instrument panel and cluster lens with a
damp soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
320
Vehicle Care
Note: Avoid cleaners or polishes that 3. For additional information and

increase the gloss of the upper portion of assistance, we recommend that you
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this contact an authorized dealer.
area helps protect you from undesirable For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a
windshield reflection. ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire
area immediately, but do not oversaturate
CLEANING PLASTIC or the ring could set.
We recommend that you only use a mild

soap and water solution on a soft cloth. CLEANING LEATHER
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped

CLEANING DISPLAYS AND with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
SCREENS chemical solvents or strong detergents.
We recommend that you only use a Such products could contaminate the
microfiber cloth in a circular motion to side airbag system and affect
clean off the fingerprint or dust. performance of the side airbag in a crash.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, We recommend that you only clean the
apply a small amount of alcohol to the leather surfaces in the following way:
cloth and try to clean it again.
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the vacuum cleaner.
touchscreen.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of cloth and a mild soap and water
solvent to clean the touchscreen. solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
CLEANING FABRIC 3. Make sure the leather is dry, then apply
a small amount of conditioner to a
clean, dry cloth.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped 4. Rub the conditioner into the leather
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use until it disappears. Allow the
chemical solvents or strong detergents. conditioner to dry, then repeat the
Such products could contaminate the process for the entire interior. If a film
side airbag system and affect appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
performance of the side airbag in a crash. cloth.
5. For additional information and
We recommend that you only clean fabric assistance, we recommend that you
in the following way: contact an authorized dealer.
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
321
Vehicle Care
CLEANING VINYL 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.
2. Wash rubber floor mats using mild
WARNING: On vehicles equipped soap and lukewarm or cold water.
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use 3. Completely dry the floor mat before
chemical solvents or strong detergents. placing them back in your vehicle.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash. CLEANING SEATBELTS
We recommend that you only clean vinyl

surfaces in the following way: WARNING: Do not use cleaning
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
vacuum cleaner. seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
cloth and a mild soap and water 1. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water
cloth. solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
3. For additional information and cloth.
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer. CLEANING STORAGE
COMPARTMENTS
CLEANING CARPETS AND FLOOR
MATS 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
We recommend that you only clean your 2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
carpets in the following way: cloth and a mild soap and water
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
vacuum cleaner. cloth.
cloth and a mild soap and water REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft DAMAGE
cloth.
3. For additional information and We recommend that you contact an
assistance, we recommend that you authorized dealer to identify your vehicle
contact an authorized dealer. color code. Authorized dealers have
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a touch-up paint to match your vehicle's
ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire color.
area immediately, but do not oversaturate Before repairing minor paint damage, use
or the ring could set. a cleaner to remove particles such as bird
We recommend that you only clean your droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
floor mats in the following way: spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
322
Vehicle Care
WAXING YOUR VEHICLE

Wax the high-gloss painted surface of your
prewashed vehicle once or twice a year.
We recommend that you only use an
approved quality wax that does not
contain abrasives. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions to apply and
remove the wax. For additional information
and assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight.
Note: Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss
black colored parts, they discolor over time.
323
Body Styling Kits
BODY STYLING KIT

PRECAUTIONS
The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is less than
that of other models. Drive with extreme
care to avoid damage to your vehicle.
324
Storing Your Vehicle
PREPARING YOUR VEHICLE Body

FOR STORAGE • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 exterior surfaces, rear wheel housings
days or more, the following maintenance and the underside of front fenders.
recommendations ensures your vehicle • Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stays in good operating condition. stored in exposed locations.
Under various conditions, long-term • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
storage may lead to degraded engine prevent rust.
performance or failure unless you use
specific precautions to preserve your • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
vehicle. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Rewax as necessary
General when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated compartment hinges and latches with
place. a light grade oil.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they • Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and weather damage. • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered 12 Volt Battery
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) • When storing your vehicle for longer
every 15 days to lubricate working parts than 30 days the state of charge
and prevent corrosion. should be approximately 50%.
Additionally, we recommend to
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel disconnect the 12v battery to reduce
until the first automatic shutoff of the system loads on the battery, or you can
fuel pump nozzle. use a trickle charger for longer storage
periods.
Engine
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to connections clean.
storage because used engine oil
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
contains contaminants which may
features if you disconnect the battery
cause engine damage.
cables.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
325
Storing Your Vehicle
Tires • Check the underhood for any foreign

materials such as mice or squirrel
• Maintain recommended air pressure. nests.
• To minimize flat spots on the tires, • Check the exhaust for any foreign
inflate all four tires to the materials.
recommended cold pressures listed on
the Safety Compliance Certification • Check tire pressures and set tire
label or Tire Label affixed to your inflation per the Tire Label.
vehicle. When the vehicle is taken out • Check brake pedal operation. Corroded
of storage, reset the tire pressures as brake rotors could cause brake noise.
necessary to the recommended levels Drive your vehicle and gently apply and
listed on the Safety Compliance release the brakes repeatedly over a
Certification label or Tire Label affixed 10-minute drive to reduce the corrosion
to your vehicle. from the brakes.
Note: If you store your vehicle in a location • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
with low ambient temperatures, follow the oil and gas) to make sure there are no
instructions for care of summer tires. See leaks, and fluids are at recommended
Using Summer Tires (page 336). levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
Brakes battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Make sure the brakes and parking brake
fully release. Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so to
reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the
brake discs, brake pads and linings.
REMOVING YOUR VEHICLE

FROM STORAGE
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
326
Wheel and Tire Information
LOCATING THE TIRE LABEL Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires.
The tire label or safety They do not apply to deep tread,
certification label is on the driver winter-type snow tires,
side B-pillar or the edge of the space-saver or temporary use
driver door. It contains information spare tires, light truck or LT type
on the recommended front and tires, tires with nominal rim
rear tire inflation pressures. See diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
Locating the Safety limited production tires as defined
Compliance Certification in Title 49 Code of Federal
Labels (page 263). Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
DEPARTMENT OF Transportation Tire quality
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM grades: The U.S. Department of
TIRE QUALITY GRADES Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
E142542 would wear 1½ times as well on
Tire Quality Grades apply to new the government course as a tire
pneumatic passenger car tires. graded 100. The relative
The Quality grades can be found performance of tires depends
where applicable on the tire upon the actual conditions of their
sidewall between tread shoulder use, however, and may depart
and maximum section width. For significantly from the norm due to
example: Treadwear 200 variations in driving habits, service
Traction AA Temperature A. practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
327
Traction AA A B C test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
WARNING: The traction and reduce tire life, and excessive
grade assigned to this tire is temperature can lead to sudden
based on straight-ahead braking tire failure. The grade C
traction tests, and does not corresponds to a level of
include acceleration, cornering, performance which all passenger
hydroplaning or peak traction car tires must meet under the
characteristics. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
The traction grades, from highest represent higher levels of
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The performance on the laboratory
grades represent the tire’s ability test wheel than the minimum
to stop on wet pavement as required by law.
measured under controlled
conditions on specified INFORMATION ON THE TIRE
government test surfaces of SIDEWALL
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction Both United States and Canada
performance. Federal regulations require tire
Temperature A B C manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
WARNING: The describes the fundamental
temperature grade for this tire is characteristics of the tire and also
established for a tire that is provides a U.S. DOT Tire
properly inflated and not Identification Number for safety
overloaded. Excessive speed, standard certification and in case
underinflation, or excessive of a recall.
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
328
Information on P Type Tires B. 215: Indicates the nominal

width of the tire in millimeters
E from sidewall edge to sidewall
C D F edge. In general, the larger the
G number, the wider the tire.
B
H C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
A which gives the tire's ratio of
I height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
M J your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
L index. It is an index that relates to
K
E142543 how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
P215/65R15 95H is an example of your owner’s manual. If not,
a tire size, load index and speed contact a local tire dealer.
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that Note: You may not find this
the tire size, load index and speed information on all tires because it
rating for your vehicle may be is not required by federal law.
different from this example.) G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated rating. The speed rating denotes
by the Tire and Rim Association, the speed at which a tire is
that may be used for service on designed to be driven for extended
cars, sport utility vehicles, periods of time under a standard
minivans and light trucks. Note: If condition of load and inflation
your tire size does not begin with pressure. The tires on your vehicle
a letter this may mean it is may operate at different
designated by either the European conditions for load and inflation
Tire and Rim Technical pressure. These speed ratings may
Organization or the Japan Tire need to be adjusted for the
Manufacturing Association. difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
329
Note: You may not find this the tire size code and the last four
information on all tires because it numbers represent the week and
is not required by federal law. year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
Letter Speed rating the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
rating the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
M 81 mph (130 km/h) week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
N 87 mph (140 km/h) used for traceability. This
Q 99 mph (159 km/h) information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
R 106 mph (171 km/h) a recall.
S 112 mph (180 km/h) I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
T 118 mph (190 km/h) AT: All Terrain, or
U 124 mph (200 km/h) AS: All Season.
H 130 mph (210 km/h) J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
V 149 mph (240 km/h) number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
W 168 mph (270 km/h) the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 mph (299 km/h) manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
Note: For tires with a maximum sidewall, which include steel,
speed capability over 149 mph nylon, polyester, and others.
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
capability over 186 mph (299 tire. See the Safety Compliance
km/h), tire manufacturers always Certification Label (affixed to
use the letters ZR. either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification that meets the door-latch post,
Number (TIN): This begins with next to the driver's seating
the letters DOT and indicates that position), for the correct tire
the tire meets all federal pressure for your vehicle.
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code L. Treadwear, Traction and
designating where it was Temperature Grades:
manufactured, the next two are
330
*Treadwear The treadwear grade that meets the door-latch post,

is a comparative rating based on next to the driver's seating
the wear rate of the tire when position), or Tire Label which is
tested under controlled conditions located on the B-Pillar or the edge
on a specified government test of the driver’s door. The cold
course. For example, a tire graded inflation pressure should never be
150 would wear one and one-half set lower than the recommended
times as well on the government pressure on the vehicle label.
course as a tire graded 100. The tire suppliers may have
*Traction: The traction grades, additional markings, notes or
from highest to lowest are AA, A, warnings such as standard load
B, and C. The grades represent the or radial tubeless.
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under Additional Information
controlled conditions on specified Contained on the Tire Sidewall
government test surfaces of for LT Type Tires
asphalt and concrete. A tire Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
marked C may have poor traction apply to this type of tire.
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature B
grades are A (the highest), B and C
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of A
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's D
B
recommended cold inflation E142544
pressure which can be found on LT type tires have some additional

the Safety Compliance information beyond those of P
Certification Label (affixed to type tires; these differences are
either the door hinge pillar, described below.
door-latch post, or the door edge
331
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated

by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks. B C D
B. Load Range and Load A E
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
E142545
Information on T Type Tires
T type tires have some additional
T145/80D16 is an example of a information beyond those of P
tire size. type tires; these differences are
Note: The temporary tire size for described below:
your vehicle may be different from A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
this example. Tire Quality Grades designated by the Tire and Rim
do not apply to this type of tire. Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
332
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio *Extra load: A class of P-metric

which gives the tire's ratio of or Metric tires designed to carry a
height to width. Numbers of 70 or heavier maximum load at 42 psi
lower indicate a short sidewall. (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. not increase the tire’s load
R: Indicates a radial type tire. carrying capability.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
diameter in inches. If you change air pressure.
your wheel size, you will have to *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
purchase new tires to match the standard unit of air pressure.
new wheel diameter.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
GLOSSARY OF TIRE pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
TERMINOLOGY sunlight for an hour or more and
*Tire label: A label showing the prior to the vehicle being driven for
original equipment tire sizes, 1 mi (1.6 km).
recommended inflation pressure *Recommended inflation
and the maximum weight the pressure: The cold inflation
vehicle can carry. pressure found on the Safety
*Tire Identification Number Compliance Certification Label
(TIN): A number on the sidewall (affixed to either the door hinge
of each tire providing information pillar, door-latch post, or the door
about the tire brand and edge that meets the door-latch
manufacturing plant, tire size and post, next to the driver's seating
date of manufacture. Also referred position), or Tire Label located on
to as DOT code. the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire. * B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
*Standard load: A class of the front door.
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set *Bead area of the tire: Area of
pressure. For example: For the tire next to the rim.
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and * Sidewall of the tire: Area
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). between the bead area and the
Increasing the inflation pressure tread.
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
333
*Tread area of the tire: Area of

the perimeter of the tire that WARNING: To reduce the
contacts the road when mounted risk of serious injury, when
on the vehicle. mounting replacement tires and
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) wheels, you should not exceed
for a tire or a tire and tube the maximum pressure indicated
assembly upon which the tire on the sidewall of the tire to set
beads are seated. the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
TIRE REPLACEMENT beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
REQUIREMENTS re-lubricate and try again.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride WARNING: For a mounting
and handling capability. pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
WARNING: Only use dealer or other tire service
replacement tires and wheels professional should do the
that are the same size, load mounting.
index, speed rating, and type as
those originally provided for your WARNING: Always inflate
vehicle. The recommended tire steel carcass tires with a remote
and wheel sizes can be found on air fill with the person inflating
the Tire Label on the driver side standing at a minimum of 12 ft
door frame or the edge of the (3.66 m) away from the wheel
driver door. If this information is and tire assembly.
not found in those locations, or
for additional options, contact WARNING: Only use the
your authorized dealer. Use of specified jacking points. If you
any tire or wheel not use any other locations you
recommended, could affect the could damage vehicle
safety and performance of your components, such as brake lines.
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
334
The use of wheels or tires not

WARNING: When inflating recommended may affect the
the tire for mounting pressures operation of your tire pressure
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater monitoring system.
than the maximum pressure on If the tire pressure monitoring
the tire sidewall, the following system indicator is flashing, your
precautions must be taken to system is malfunctioning. Your
protect the person mounting the replacement tire might be
tire: incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
• Make sure that you have the some component of the system
correct tire and wheel size. may be damaged.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again. Age
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel WARNING: Tires degrade
and tire assembly. over time depending on many
• Use both eye and ear factors such as weather, storage
protection. conditions, and conditions of use
Note: If your vehicle has (load, speed, inflation pressure)
265/35R20 tires, replace them with the tires experience throughout
original equipment tires provided their lives.
by us. Using other tire sizes could In general, tires should be
damage your vehicle. replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
Important: Remember to replace However, heat caused by hot
the wheel valve stems when the climates or frequent high loading
road tires are replaced on your conditions can accelerate the
vehicle. aging process and may require
It is recommended that the two tires to be replaced more
front tires or two rear tires frequently.
generally be replaced as a pair if You should replace your spare
the worn tires still have usable tire when you replace the road
depth. tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been
The tire pressure sensors mounted used.
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
335
U.S. DOT Tire Identification USING SUMMER TIRES

Number
Summer tires provide superior
Both United States and Canada performance on wet and dry roads.
Federal regulations require tire Summer tires do not have the Mud and
manufacturers to place Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
standardized information on the the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
sidewall of all tires. This as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
information identifies and recommend using summer tires when
describes the fundamental temperatures drop to about 45°F (7°C) or
characteristics of the tire and also below, depending on tire wear and
provides a U.S. DOT Tire environmental conditions, or in snow and
Identification Number for safety ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
standard certification and in case performance is affected by tire wear and
of a recall. environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
This begins with the letters DOT Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
and indicates that the tire meets Snow tires.
all federal standards. The next Always store your summer tires indoors at
two numbers or letters are the temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The
plant code designating where it rubber compounds used in these tires lose
was manufactured, the next two flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
are the tire size code and the last 19°F (-7°C). If the tires have been
four numbers represent the week subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warm
and year the tire was built. For them in a heated space to at least 41°F
example, the numbers 317 mean (5°C) for at least 24 hours before installing
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
the numbers go to four digits. For with the tires installed, or checking tire
example, 2501 means the 25th inflation. Always inspect the tires after
storage periods and before use.
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This USING SNOW CHAINS
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall. WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
death.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains

on snow-free roads.
336
The tires on your vehicle could have

WARNING: Only fit snow chains to all-weather treads to provide traction in
specified tires. rain and snow. In some climates you need
to use snow tires and chains on your
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted vehicle in emergency situations or if
with wheel trims, remove them before required by law.
fitting snow chains. Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers help prevent vehicle damage. Do
WARNING: Remember that even not remove these components from your
advanced technology cannot defy the vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
laws of physics. It's always possible to
Note: Driving too fast for road conditions
lose control of a vehicle due to
creates the possibility of losing control of
inappropriate driver input for the
the vehicle. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in
road condition can cause you to lose
damage to vehicle components.
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
of personal injury or property damage. Note: Snow chains could damage
Activation of the electronic stability aluminum wheels.
control system is an indication that at Follow these guidelines when using snow
least some of the tires have exceeded tires and chains:
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator's ability to control • Use ultra low profile cables, 10 mm or
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss less in dimension as measured on the
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, sidewall of your tire, with 235/55R17,
personal injury and death. 235/50R18, 255/45R18 and 255/40R19
on the rear axle only.
WARNING: Wheels and tires must • Do not use snow chains or cables with
be the same size, load index and speed 275/40R19, 305/30R19, 315/30R19,
rating as those originally fitted on the and 265/35R20.
vehicle. Use of any other tire or wheel
• Not all S-class snow chains or cables
can affect the safety and performance
meet the same restrictions. Chains of
of your vehicle. Additionally, the use of
this size restriction include a tensioning
non-recommended tires and wheels can
device.
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. • Purchase chains or cables from a
Follow the recommended tire inflation manufacturer that clearly labels body
pressures found on the Safety to tire dimension restrictions. Mount
Compliance Certification label, or the the snow chains or cables in pairs on
Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the rear tires only.
the driver door. Failure to follow this • When driving with snow chains do not
instruction could result in loss of vehicle exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the
control, vehicle rollover, or personal injury maximum speed recommended by the
or death. chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Install cables securely, verifying that
the cables do not touch any wiring or
brake lines.
337
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables

rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
• Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, contact your authorized
dealer.
338
Tire Care
CHECKING THE TIRE

PRESSURES WARNING: Do not use the
tire pressure displayed in the
Safe operation of your vehicle information display as a tire
requires that your tires are pressure gauge. Failure to follow
properly inflated. Every day before this instruction could result in
you drive, check your tires. personal injury or death.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and Use the recommended cold
check the tire pressure with a tire inflation pressure for optimum tire
gauge. Inflate all tires to the performance and wear.
recommended inflation pressure. Under-inflation or over-inflation
See Inflating the Tires (page may cause uneven treadwear
339). patterns.
Inflate your tires to the
INFLATING THE TIRES recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
WARNING: Under-inflation found on the tire. You can find the
is the most common cause of tire label with the recommended
tire failures and may result in tire inflation pressure next to the
severe tire cracking, tread tire size on the B-Pillar or the edge
separation or blowout, with of the driver door.
unexpected loss of vehicle The recommended tire inflation
control and increased risk of pressure is also found on the
injury. Under-inflation increases Safety Compliance Certification
sidewall flexing and rolling Label, affixed to either the door
resistance, resulting in heat hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
buildup and internal damage to door edge that meets the
the tire. It also may result in door-latch on the B-pillar, or on
unnecessary tire stress, irregular the edge of the driver door.
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to Failure to follow the tire pressure
half of its air pressure and not recommendations can cause
appear to be flat! uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
339
Tire Care
Checking Pressure when tires New hot pres- 36 psi (250

are hot: sure kPa)
If pressures are checked after tires
have been driven for more than INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR
three minutes or more than 1 mile, WEAR
(2 km) the tires become hot and
the pressures will increase by
approximately 4 psi (27.6 kPa).
Therefore when the tire pressure
is adjusted under these conditions,
it should be increased to a gauge
reading of 4 psi (27.6 kPa) greater
than the recommended cold
inflation pressure.
After inflating the tires while hot,
make sure to recheck tire pressure
later once the tires are cold. E142546
For Example Only When the tread is worn down to

2/32 inch (1.6 mm), tires must be
Gauge reading 33 psi (230 replaced to help prevent your
of hot tire kPa) vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
If recom- 32 psi (220 indicators, or wear bars, which
mended, cold kPa) look like narrow strips of smooth
inflation pres- rubber across the tread will
sure is appear on the tire when the tread
The hot tire pressure is only 1 psi is worn down to 2/32 inch (1.6
(10 kPa) greater than the mm).
recommended cold inflation When the tire tread wears down
pressure. Therefore, add 3 psi to the same height as these wear
(20 kPa) more to increase the bars, the tire is worn out and must
hot pressure to 4 psi (30 kPa) be replaced.
over the recommended cold
inflation pressure. The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
340
Tire Care
Periodically inspect the tire treads

for uneven or excessive wear and WARNING: Do not spin the
remove objects such as stones, wheels at over 34 mph
nails or glass that may be wedged (55 km/h). The tires may fail and
in the tread grooves. injure a passenger or bystander.
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR HIGH SPEED DRIVING CAN BE
DAMAGE DANGEROUS
Inspect the tire sidewalls for Correct inflation pressure is
cracking, cuts, bruises and other especially important. However, at
signs of damage or excessive high speeds, even with the correct
wear. If internal damage to the tire inflation pressure, a road hazard
is suspected, have the tire for example is more difficult to
dismounted and inspected in case avoid and if contact is made, has
it needs to be repaired or replaced. a greater chance of causing tire
For your safety, tires that are damage than at a lower speed.
damaged or show signs of Moreover, driving at high speed
excessive wear should not be used reduces the reaction time
because they are more likely to available to avoid accidents and
blow out or fail. bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
Periodically inspect the tire treads If you see any damage to a tire or
and sidewalls for damage, such wheel, replace it with the spare at
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, once and visit a participating Tire
cracks in the tread groove and Retailer.
separation in the tread or sidewall. Exceeding the maximum speeds
If damage is observed or shown on the following page for
suspected, have the tire inspected each type of tire will cause the tire
by a tire professional. to build up excessive heat which
Safety Practices can cause tire damage that could
result in sudden tire destruction
and rapid air loss. Failure to
control a vehicle when one or
WARNING: If your vehicle more tires experience a sudden air
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do loss can lead to an accident.
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the In any case, you should not
tire and cause an explosion. A exceed reasonable speeds as
tire can explode in as little as indicated by the legal limits
three to five seconds. and driving conditions.
341
Tire Care
DO NOT OVERLOAD: DRIVING REPAIRS - WHEREVER

ON ANY OVERLOADED TIRE IS POSSIBLE, SEE YOUR TIRE
DANGEROUS RETAILER AT ONCE
The maximum load rating of your If any tire sustains a puncture,
tires is molded on the tire sidewall. have the tire demounted and
Do not exceed this rating. Follow thoroughly inspected by a tire
the loading instructions of the retailer for possible damage that
manufacturer of your vehicle and may have occurred. A tread area
this will ensure that your tires are puncture in any passenger or light
not overloaded. Tires which are truck tire can be repaired provided
loaded beyond their maximum that the puncture hole is not more
allowable loads for the particular than 1/4” in diameter, not more
application will build up excessive than one radial cable per casing
heat that may result in sudden tire ply is damaged, and the tire has
destruction. Do not exceed the not been damaged further by the
gross axle weight rating for any puncturing object or by running
axle on your vehicle. underinflated. Tire punctures
consistent with these guidelines
TIRE ALTERATIONS should only be repaired by
Do not make or allow to be made following the US Tire
any alterations on your tires. Manufacturers Association
Alterations may prevent proper (USTMA) recommended repair
performance, leading to tire procedures. Plug-only repairs
damage which can result in an done on-the-wheel are considered
accident. Tires which become improper and therefore, not
unserviceable due to alterations recommended. Such repairs are
such as truing, whitewall inlays, not reliable and may cause further
addition of balancing or sealant damage to the tire.
liquids, or the use of tire dressing STORAGE
containing petroleum distillates
are excluded from warranty Tires contain waxes and
coverage. emollients to protect their outer
surfaces from ozone and weather
checking. As the tire rolls and
flexes, the waxes and emollients
continually migrate to the surface,
replenishing this protection
throughout the normal use of the
tire. Consequently, when tires sit
unused for long periods of time (a
month or more) their surfaces
342
Tire Care
become dry and more susceptible FOLLOW THESE MOUNTING

to ozone and weather checking RECOMMENDATIONS
and the casing becomes
susceptible to flat spotting. For Tire changing can be dangerous
this reason, tires should always and must be done by
be stored in a cool, dry, clean, professionally trained persons
indoor environment. If storage using proper tools and
is for one month or more, procedures as specified by the
eliminate the weight from the US Tire Manufacturers
tires by raising the vehicle or by Association (USTMA). Single
removing the tires from the or dual assemblies must be
vehicle. Failure to store tires in completely deflated before
accordance with these demounting.
instructions could result in Your tires should be mounted on
damage to your tires or wheels of correct size and type
premature aging of the tires and which are in good, clean
and sudden tire failure. condition. Wheels that are bent,
When tires are stored, be sure they chipped, rusted (steel wheels) or
are placed away from sources of corroded (alloy wheels) may
heat and ozone such as direct cause tire damage. The inside of
sunlight, hot pipes and electric the tire must be free from foreign
generators. Be sure that surfaces material. Have your retailer check
on which tires are stored are clean the wheels before mounting new
and free from grease, gasoline or tires. Mismatched tires and rims
other substances, which could can explode during mounting.
deteriorate the rubber. Failure to Also, mismatched tires and rims
store tires in accordance with can result in dangerous tire failure
these instructions could result in on the road. If a tire is mounted by
damage to your tires or premature error on the wrong-sized rim, do
aging of the tires and sudden tire not remount it on the proper rim -
failure. scrap it. It may have been
damaged internally (which is not
externally visible) by having been
dangerously stretched and could
fail on the highway.
343
Tire Care
Old valves may leak. When new • AVOID DRIVING OVER

tubeless tires are mounted, POTHOLES, OBSTACLES,
have new valves of the correct CURBS OR EDGES OF
type installed. Tubeless tires PAVEMENT.
must only be mounted on • AVOID EXCESSIVE WHEEL
wheels designed for tubeless SPINNING.
tires i.e., wheels which have
safety humps or ledges. • IF YOU SEE ANY DAMAGE TO
A TIRE, REPLACE WITH THE
It is recommended that you have SPARE AND VISIT ANY
your tires and wheels balanced. AUTHORIZED RETAILER AT
Tires and wheels, which are not ONCE.
balanced, may cause steering • IF YOU HAVE ANY
difficulties, a bumpy ride, and QUESTIONS, CONTACT YOUR
irregular tire wear. AUTHORIZED RETAILER.
Be sure that all your valves
have suitable valve caps. The Highway Hazards
valve cap is the primary seal No matter how carefully you drive,
against air loss. there is always the possibility that
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRES you could eventually have a flat
tire on the highway. Drive slowly
When using any temporary spare to the closest safe area out of
tire, be sure to follow the vehicle traffic. This could further damage
manufacturer’s instructions. the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
REMEMBER... TO AVOID
DAMAGE TO YOUR TIRES AND If you feel a sudden vibration or
POSSIBLE ACCIDENT: ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
• CHECK TIRE PRESSURE AT has been damaged, immediately
LEAST ONCE EACH MONTH reduce your speed. Drive with
WHEN TIRES ARE COLD AND caution until you can safely pull
BEFORE LONG TRIPS. off the road. Stop and inspect the
• DO NOT tires for damage. If a tire is
UNDERINFLATE/OVERINFLATE. under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and
• DO NOT OVERLOAD. replace it with your spare tire and
• DRIVE AT MODERATE wheel. If you cannot detect a
SPEEDS, OBSERVE LEGAL cause, have the vehicle towed to
LIMITS. the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
344
Tire Care
Tire and Wheel Alignment perform the system reset

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or procedure after tire rotation. If
pothole can cause the front end you do not reset the system, it
of your vehicle to become may not provide a low tire
misaligned or cause damage to pressure warning when
your tires. If your vehicle seems to necessary.
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels could be out of Rotating your tires at the
alignment. Have an authorized recommended interval helps your
dealer check the wheel alignment tires wear more evenly, providing
periodically. better tire performance and longer
tire life.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and Note: If your tires show any uneven
rapid treadwear of your tires and wear have the alignment checked
should be corrected by an by an authorized dealer before
authorized dealer. rotating tires.
Note: If you have a dissimilar spare
INSPECTING THE WHEEL wheel and tire assembly, it is
VALVE STEMS intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
Check the valve stems for holes, rotation.
cracks, or cuts that could permit Note: After having your tires
air leakage. rotated check and adjust inflation
pressure to the vehicle
TIRE ROTATION requirements.
Tire Rotation Diagram
WARNING: If the tire label Follow the diagram indicating the
shows different tire pressures for correct tire locations for rotating
the front and rear tires and the the tires.
vehicle has a tire pressure Rear-wheel drive vehicles (front
monitoring system, then you tires on the left side of the
need to update the settings for diagram).
the system sensors. Always
Non-directional tires
345
Tire Care
E142548
Vehicles equipped with

different size tires on the front
and rear axle
E209823
346
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE TIRE SEALANT The temporary mobility kit contains

enough sealant compound in the canister
AND INFLATOR KIT for one tire repair only.
The kit consists of an air compressor to After using the sealant, an authorized
re-inflate the tire and a canister of sealing dealer needs to replace the tire pressure
compound that effectively seals most monitoring system sensor and valve stem
punctures. This kit provides a temporary on the wheel.
tire repair allowing you to drive your vehicle
up to 120 mi (200 km) at a maximum LOCATING THE TIRE SEALANT
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to reach a tire
service location. AND INFLATOR KIT
Note: The temporary mobility kit contains The kit is located under the load floor in
enough sealant compound in the canister the rear of the vehicle.
for one tire repair only. See an authorized
dealer for replacement sealant canisters.
TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR

KIT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Depending on the type

and extent of tire damage, some tires
can only be partially sealed or not sealed
at all. Loss of tire pressure can affect
vehicle handling, leading to loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING: Do not use the kit on a

previously damaged tire, for example
when it has been driven under inflated.
This could cause loss of vehicle control,
WARNING: Do not run the engine

when operating the air compressor
unless the vehicle is outdoors or in a
well-ventilated area.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger

than 0.24 in (6 mm) or damage to the tire's
sidewall.
Only punctures located within the tire
tread can be sealed with the kit.
Only use the kit supplied with your vehicle.
347
TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR USING THE TIRE SEALANT

KIT COMPONENTS AND INFLATOR KIT
Tips for use of the kit
To make sure the kit operates safely and
properly, observe the following:
• Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
away from moving traffic.
• Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more than 15
minutes. This prevents the compressor
from overheating.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on
a label on the sealant canister and can
be seen through the rectangular
viewing window on the bottom of the
compressor. Check the use-by date
regularly and replace the canister when
the sealant expires.
E175977
Note: Sealant compound contains latex.
A Air compressor (inside) Use appropriate precautions to avoid any
allergic reactions.
B Selector switch
Place the selector in the Air
C On and Off button position when inflating a tire or
D Air pressure gauge E175978 other objects.
E Sealant bottle and canister
What to do when a tire is punctured
F Dual purpose hose: air and repair
G Tire valve connector A tire puncture within the tire's tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit.
H Accessory power plug
I Casing/housing
J Bike/raft/sports ball adapters
348
• In the first stage, the tire is reinflated

with a sealing compound and air. After
the tire has been inflated, drive the
vehicle a short distance approximately
4 mi (6 km) to distribute the sealant in
the tire.
• In the second stage, check the tire
pressure and adjust, if necessary, to the
vehicle's specified tire inflation
pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire

with sealing compound and air
WARNING: Do not stand directly

over the kit while inflating the tire. If you
notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire's sidewall during
inflation, stop and call roadside
assistance.
WARNING: If the tire does not

inflate to the recommended tire pressure
within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance. E175979
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt

Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure power point in the vehicle.
area, away from moving traffic.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking the casing/housing and place it on the
brake and power off the vehicle. Inspect top of the instrument panel or the
the flat tire for visible damage. center of the dash.
If a puncture is located in the tire sidewall,
stop and call roadside assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise.
Tighten the connection securely.
349
E175982
E175981
6. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant 8. When the recommended tire pressure
position. Turn the kit on by pressing the is reached, turn off the kit, unplug the
on/off button (B). power cable, and disconnect the hose
7. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on from the tire valve. Re-install the valve
the tire label located on the driver door cap on the tire valve and return the kit
or the door jamb area. Check the final to the rear of the vehicle.
tire pressure with the compressor 9. Drive the vehicle 4 mi (6 km) to
turned off to get an accurate pressure distribute the sealant evenly inside the
reading. tire.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Do not proceed to
the second stage of this operation.
350
Second Stage: Checking the tire What to do after the tire has been
pressure with the inflator kit sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, replace
WARNING: If the tire does not the sealant canister. Sealant canisters and
inflate to the recommended tire pressure spare parts can be obtained at an
within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside authorized dealer. Empty sealant canisters
assistance. may be disposed of at home. However,
canisters still containing liquid sealant
WARNING: The power plug may should be disposed of in accordance with
get hot after use and should be handled local waste disposal regulation.
carefully when unplugging. Removal of the sealant canister from
the kit
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
E175984
E175983 1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black

tube) from the compressor housing.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning
clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position.
4. If required, turn on the compressor and
adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve
cap on the tire and return the kit to the E175985
rear of the vehicle.
2. Unwrap the power cord.
351
E175986 E175988
3. Remove the back cover. 3. Snap the back cover back into place.
E175987 E175989
4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90 4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black
degrees and pull away from tube) around the channel on the
casing/housing to remove. bottom of the housing/casing.
Installation of the sealant canister to

the kit
1. With the canister held perpendicular
to the housing, insert the canister
nozzle into the connector and push
until seated.
2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down
into the housing/casing.
E175990
5. Wrap the power cord around the

housing and stow the accessory power
plug.
352
WHAT IS THE TIRE PRESSURE Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
MONITORING SYSTEM inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
The tire pressure monitoring on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
system measures the vehicle's
E139232
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
tire pressures. A warning lamp a different size than the size indicated on
illuminates if one or more tires are the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
significantly underinflated or if there is a label, you should determine the proper tire
system malfunction. inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
SYSTEM OVERVIEW illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
WARNING: Under-inflation is the when the low tire pressure telltale
most common cause of tire failures and illuminates, you should stop and check
may result in severe tire cracking, tread your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
separation or blowout, with unexpected them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
loss of vehicle control and increased risk significantly under-inflated tire causes the
of injury. Under-inflation increases tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
resulting in heat buildup and internal and tire tread life, and may affect the
damage to the tire. It also may result in vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, Please note that the TPMS is not a
loss of vehicle control and accidents. A substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
tire can lose up to half of its air pressure it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
and not appear to be flat! correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
WARNING: To determine the illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see telltale.
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, Your vehicle has also been equipped with
door-latch post or the door edge that a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
meets the door-latch post, next to the when the system is not operating properly.
driver seat) or the Tire Label on the The TPMS malfunction indicator is
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
353
When the malfunction indicator is TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate WARNING: The tire pressure
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent monitoring system is not a substitute for
the TPMS from functioning properly. manually checking tire pressures. You
Always check the TPMS malfunction should periodically check tire pressures
telltale after replacing one or more tires or using a pressure gauge. Failure to
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the correctly maintain tire pressures could
replacement or alternate tires and wheels increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
allow the TPMS to continue to function control, vehicle rollover and personal
properly. injury.
WARNING: Do not use the tire

WARNING: Changes or pressure displayed in the information
modifications not expressively approved display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
by the party responsible for compliance to follow this instruction could result in
could void the user's authority to operate personal injury or death.
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies Note: The use of tire sealants can damage
that Industry Canada technical the tire pressure monitoring system.
specifications were met.
Note: If the tire pressure monitor sensor
This device complies with Part 15 of the becomes damaged it may not function.
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
is subject to the following two conditions:
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and When the outside temperature drops
2. This device must accept any significantly, the tire pressure could
interference received, including decrease and activate the low tire pressure
interference that may cause undesired warning lamp.
operation. The warning lamp could also illuminate
when you use a spare wheel, or tire sealant
from the inflator kit.
Note: Regularly checking the vehicle tire
pressures can reduce the possibility for the
warning lamp to illuminate due to outside
air temperature changes.
Note: After you inflate the tires to the
recommended pressure it could take up to
two minutes of driving over 20 mph
(32 km/h) for the warning indicator to turn
off.
354
VIEWING THE TIRE To view the current tire pressures,

PRESSURES use the information display or
touchscreen.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM –
TROUBLESHOOTING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM – WARNING LAMPS
The low tire pressure warning
E139232 lamp has combined functions,
E250820 as it warns you when your tires
need air, and when the system is no longer
capable of functioning as intended.
Warning Lamp Possible Cause Action Required
Solid warning lamp One or more tires are After inflating your tires to the manufac-
significantly under turer’s recommended pressure as shown
inflated on the tire label, on the edge of driver
door or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for
at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Solid warning lamp Temporary spare wheel Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
or flashing warning in use and refit it to your vehicle to restore
lamp operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are inflated to the recom-
system malfunction mended tire pressures and the temporary
spare wheel is not in use, the system
detected a fault that requires service.
possible.
355
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the tire label, on the edge of the driver
door or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes
over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Tire Pressure Monitor The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
Fault your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor The system has detected a fault that requires service or a
Fault spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
356
Changing a Road Wheel
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE (IF If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
EQUIPPED) only. This means that if you need to use it,
replace it as soon as possible with a road
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not wheel and tire assembly that is the same
apply the brake heavily. Gradually size and type as the road tires and wheels
decrease your speed and hold the steering that were originally provided on your
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe vehicle. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
place on the side of the road. is damaged, replace it instead of repairing
Have a flat serviced by an authorized it.
dealer to prevent damage to the tire A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
pressure monitoring system sensors. See is defined as a spare wheel and tire
Tire Pressure Monitoring System assembly that is different in brand, size or
Overview (page 353). Replace the spare appearance from the road tires and wheels
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. and can be one of three types:
During repairing or replacing the flat tire,
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
have an authorized dealer inspect the tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
pressure monitoring system sensor for
could have Temporary Use Only molded
damage.
in the sidewall.
Note: Only use tire sealants in roadside
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
emergencies as they may damage the tire
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
pressure monitoring system sensor. If you
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
use a sealant, use the Tire Mobility Kit
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
sealant. Replace the tire pressure
ONLY.
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel by an authorized dealer after When driving with one of the dissimilar
use of the sealant. spare tires listed above, do not:
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
indicator illuminates when the spare tire is • Load the vehicle beyond the maximum
in use. To restore the full functionality of the vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
monitoring system, all road wheels with tire Compliance Label.
pressure monitoring sensors must be
mounted on the vehicle. • Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Assembly Information • Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
WARNING: Failure to follow these • Use commercial car washing
guidelines could result in an increased equipment.
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or • Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
death.
357
Using a dissimilar spare wheel and tire When driving with the full-size dissimilar
assembly can compromise the spare wheel and tire assembly additional
effectiveness of the following: caution should be given to:
• Handling, stability and braking • Towing a trailer.
performance. • Driving vehicles equipped with a
• Comfort and noise. camper body.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Driving vehicles with a load on the
• Winter weather driving capability. cargo rack.
• Wet weather driving capability. Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
• All-wheel driving capability, if
and seek service as soon as possible.
applicable.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without Tire Change Procedure
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). a flat tire in an emergency. Do not
• Use more than one dissimilar spare attempt to do any other work on your
wheel and tire assembly at a time. vehicle when it is supported by the jack,
• Use commercial car washing as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
equipment. Failure to follow this instruction could
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel WARNING: To help prevent your
and tire assembly. vehicle from moving when changing a
Using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and wheel, shift the transmission into park
tire assembly can compromise the (P), set the parking brake and use an
effectiveness of the following: appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
• Handling, stability and braking
the wheel being changed. For example,
performance.
when changing the front left wheel,
• Comfort and noise. place an appropriate block or wheel
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. chock on the right rear wheel.
• Winter weather driving capability.
WARNING: Never place anything
• Wet weather driving capability. between the vehicle jack and your
• All-wheel driving capability. vehicle.
WARNING: Never place anything

between the vehicle jack and the ground.
358
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking

WARNING: Do not attempt to brake and activate the hazard flashers.
change a tire on the side of the vehicle 2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough turn the engine off. For vehicles with a
off the road to not obstruct the flow of manual transmission, place the
traffic and avoid the danger of being hit transmission in reverse (R) after the
when operating the jack or changing the engine is turned off.
wheel.
WARNING: Do not get under a

vehicle that is supported by a jack.
WARNING: Only use the specified

jacking points. If you use any other
locations you could damage vehicle
components, such as brake lines.
WARNING: Only use the jack

provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. E175447
WARNING: It is recommended that 3. Block the wheels diagonally opposite

the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, the flat tire. For example, if the left
and that no person should remain in a front tire is flat, block the right rear
vehicle that is being jacked. wheel.
WARNING: Make sure there is no

grease or oil on the threads or the
surface between the wheel studs and
the wheel nuts. This can cause the wheel
nuts to loosen while driving.
E174938
4. Open the luggage compartment and

lift the access panel
E166722 5. Remove the lug wrench, spare tire and
jack.
Note: The jack does not require
6. Remove the center ornament from the
maintenance or additional lubrication over
wheel if required to access the lug nuts.
the service life of your vehicle.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
359
10. The vehicle jacking points are shown

here, and can be identified by the
triangle markings on the vehicle.
Details are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E175694
7. To remove the wrench from the jack,

turn the hex nut on the jack
counterclockwise. This lowers the jack
and loosen the mechanical lock.
E174939
8. Unfold the wrench.
11. Place the jack at the jacking point
next to the tire you are changing. Turn
the jack handle clockwise until the
wheel is completely off the ground.
12. Remove the wheel nuts with the lug
wrench.
13. Replace the flat tire with the spare
E181744 tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward.
9. Loosen each wheel nut one-half turn
14. Reinstall wheel nuts until the wheel
counterclockwise but do not remove
is snug against the hub. Do not fully
them until the wheel is raised off the
tighten the wheel nuts until the wheel
ground.
has been lowered.
15. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
E176084
Note: Jack at the specified locations to

avoid damage to the vehicle.
360
3 4
E176165
18. Put the flat tire, wheel ornament, jack

and lug wrench away. Make sure the
jack is fastened so it does not rattle
5 2 when you drive.
19. Unblock the wheel.
E306781
16. Remove the jack and fully tighten the WHEEL NUTS
wheel nuts in the order shown. See
17. To store the folded wrench on the WARNING: When you install a
jack, engage the bracket of the jack wheel, remove any corrosion, dirt or
base on the wrench feature as shown. foreign materials present on the
Swing the wrench upwards and mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
adjust the height of the jack until the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
pin engages the hole. Tighten the hex brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make
nut clockwise by hand until secure. sure to secure any fasteners that attach
the rotor to the hub so they do not
interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without
following these steps can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to
come off while your vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of vehicle control,
1
Bolt Size lb.ft (Nm)
M14 x 1.5 150 lb.ft (204 Nm)

1 Torque
specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel
disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
361
E145950
A Hub pilot bore.

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
362
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Measurement Specification
Engine Displacement. 138 in³ (2,261 cm³)

Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.026 in (0.65 mm) - 0.030 in (0.75 mm)
Compression ratio. 10.634:1
363
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L
Measurement Specification
Engine displacement. 307 in³ (5,038 cm³)

Firing order. 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)
Compression ratio. 12.0:1
364
SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS
Base Vehicle (Non-Performance Pack) Coupe and Convertible without Active
Damping System
Front Alignment
Caster Caster Left - Camber Camber Left - Total Toe

Right Right
7.1° (+/- 0.75°) 0.0° (+/- 0.75°) -1.0° (+/- 0.0° (+/-0.75°) 0.00° (+/-
0.75°) 0.20°)
Rear Alignment
Camber Toe Left / Right Total Toe Thrust Angle

- 1.5° (+/- 0.75°) 0.12° (+/- 0.20°) 0.24° (+/- 0.20°) 0.00° (+/- 0.50°)
Performance Pack Convertible without Active Damping System

Front Alignment

Right Right
7.1° (+/- 0.75°) 0.0° (+/- 0.75°) -1.0° (+/- 0.0° (+/-0.75°) 0.00° (+/-
0.75°) 0.20°)
Rear Alignment

- 1.5° (+/- 0.75°) 0.12° (+/- 0.20°) 0.24° (+/- 0.20°) 0.00° (+/- 0.50°)
Performance Pack Coupe without Active Damping System

Front Alignment

Right Right
7.0° (+/- 0.75°) 0.0° (+/- 0.75°) -1.0° (+/- 0.0° (+/-0.75°) 0.00° (+/-
0.75°) 0.20°)
365
Rear Alignment

- 1.5° (+/- 0.75°) 0.12° (+/- 0.20°) 0.24° (+/- 0.20°) 0.00° (+/- 0.50°)
Performance Pack Coupe and convertible with Active Damping System

Front Alignment

Right Right
7.1° (+/- 0.75°) 0.0° (+/- 0.75°) -1.0° (+/- 0.0° (+/-0.75°) 0.00° (+/-
0.75°) 0.20°)
Rear Alignment

- 1.5° (+/- 0.75°) 0.12° (+/- 0.20°) 0.24° (+/- 0.20°) 0.00° (+/- 0.5°)
Feature Car Coupe and Convertible with Handling Package

Front Alignment

Right Right
7.1° (+/- 0.75°) 0.0° (+/- 0.75°) -1.2° (+/- 0.75°) 0.0° (+/-0.75°) 0.10° (+/-
0.20°)
Rear Alignment

- 1.2° (+/- 0.75°) 0.15° (+/- 0.20°) 0.30° (+/- 0.20°) 0.00° (+/- 0.50°)
366
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Component Part Number
Air filter element. FA-2067

Battery. BAGM-48H6-760
Cabin air filter. FP-78
1 FL-2127
Oil filter.
Spark plugs. SP-597-X
Windshield wiper blade. WW-1964-A (passenger side)
WW-2160-A (driver side)
1 If
a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that aligns to SAE/USCAR – 36
Performance Specifications. Filter Type B.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
367
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 5.0L
Component Part Number
Air filter element. FA-2066

Battery. BAGM-48H6-760
Cabin air filter. FP-78
1 FL-500-S
Oil filter.
Spark plugs. SP-589
Windshield wiper blade. WW-1964-A (passenger side)
WW-2160-A (driver side)
1 If
a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that aligns to SAE/USCAR – 36
Performance Specifications. Filter Type C.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
368

SPECIFICATION - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover. E142732
• Longer engine cranking periods. An oil that displays this symbol conforms
• Increased emission levels. to current engine, emission system and
• Reduced vehicle performance. fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
• Reduced fuel economy.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that display
the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 6.0 qt (5.7 L)
When tracking your vehicle, oil change information and intervals are in the Track Use
chapter. See Track Use (page 313).
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C961-A1

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil / Huile moteur
SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP, XO-5W30-Q1FS(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6, CXO-5W30-LFS6(Canada)
369
Alternative Engine Oil for we recommend that you use the following
Extremely Cold Climates alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
To improve engine cold start performance, reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C963-A1
E240523
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above • Reduced vehicle performance.
the altitude of 5,000 ft (1,524 m) and under
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is • Reduced fuel economy.
recommended to use the alternative engine
oil.

SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in: E142732
warranty does not cover. An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
• Longer engine cranking periods. fuel economy performance standards of
• Increased emission levels. ILSAC.
370
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for engines.

your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not Do not use supplemental engine oil
available, use motor oils of the additives because they are unnecessary
recommended viscosity grade that display and could lead to engine damage that your
the API Certification Mark for gasoline vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
5.0L 10.0 qt (9.5 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C961-A1

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil / Huile moteur
SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP, XO-5W30-Q1FS(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6, CXO-5W30-LFS6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C963-A1
371
E240523
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above If you do not use coolant that meets the
the altitude of 7,500 ft (2,286 m) and under defined specification, it could result in:
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is • Component damage that your vehicle
recommended to use the alternative engine warranty does not cover.
oil.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY

AND SPECIFICATION - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Base vehicle. 10.46 qt (9.9 L)

Performance vehicle. 10.99 qt (10.4 L)
372
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
If you do not use coolant that meets the

defined specification, it could result in:
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 5.0L warranty does not cover.
Use coolant that meets the defined • Reduced vehicle performance.
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Base vehicle with automatic transmission. 12.3 qt (11.6 L)

Performance vehicle with automatic 12.8 qt (12.1 L)
transmission.
Manual transmission. 11.7 qt (11.1 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
373
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 15.9 gal (60.2 L)
374
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - 5.0L

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All 15.98 gal (60.5 L)
375
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM the air conditioning refrigerant system

CAPACITY AND can cause personal injury.
SPECIFICATION - 2.3L Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
ECOBOOST™ defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
WARNING: The air conditioning result in:
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
warranty does not cover.
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening • Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant Refrigerant Oil
All. 19 oz (0.538 kg) 3.38 fl oz (100 ml)
Materials
Name Specification
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) WSS-M17B21-A

R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C300-A2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
376
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM the air conditioning refrigerant system

CAPACITY AND can cause personal injury.
SPECIFICATION - 5.0L Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
WARNING: The air conditioning If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
refrigerant system contains refrigerant meets the defined specifications, it could
under high pressure. Only qualified result in:
personnel should service the air • Component damage that your vehicle
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant Refrigerant Oil
All. 19 oz (0.538 kg) 3.38 fl oz (100 ml)
Materials
Name Specification
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) WSS-M17B21-A

R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C300-A2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
377
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen- WSS-M14P19-A

trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
If you do not use fluid that meets the

defined specification and viscosity grade,
MANUAL TRANSMISSION it could result in:
FLUID CAPACITY AND • Component damage that your vehicle
SPECIFICATION warranty does not cover.
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced fuel economy.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
6-Speed 1
2.5 qt (2.4 L)
1 Approximate total oil volume/capacity. Actual amount could vary between fluid changes.
Note: Transmission Oil is “filled-for-life” –

No requirement to Service the transmission
oil.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid(U.S.) WSS-M2C200-D2

Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid / Huile
pour boîtes embrayage double Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XT-11-QDC(U.S. & Canada)
378
CLUTCH FLUID CAPACITY AND Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications.
SPECIFICATION
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2

Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Note: Only use transmission fluid that
conforms to the defined specification. Use
of other fluids could result in vehicle
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Variant Quantity
All 13.10 qt (12.4 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis- WSS-M2C949-A,

sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
379
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION Note: We recommend you use Dot 4 Low

Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
Use fluid that meets the defined meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 specifications or
specification and viscosity grade. ISO 4925 Class 6 standards. If you use any
fluid other than the recommended fluid, it
If you do not use fluid that meets the could cause reduced brake performance
defined specification and viscosity grade, and not meet our performance standards.
it could result in: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
• Component damage that your vehicle Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
warranty does not cover. products or other materials could result in
• Reduced brake performance. brake system damage and possible failure.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2

Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
If you do not use fluid that meets the

defined specification and viscosity grade,
REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION • Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1.6 qt (1.5 L)

1
1 Forcomplete refill of our limited slip axles, add 3.28 fl oz (97 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction
modifier in the total fluid capacity. Our rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does
not require changing unless you submerge the axle in water.
380
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic WSS-M2C942-A

Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.) EST-M2C118-A
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S. & Canada)
381
Vehicle Identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
LOCATING THE VEHICLE

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier.

B Brake system, gross vehicle
weight rating, restraint devices
and their locations.
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
D Engine or motor type.
E Check digit.
F Model year.
E311767 G Assembly plant.
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is H Production sequence number.
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER OVERVIEW
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
382
Connected Vehicle
WHAT IS A CONNECTED ENABLING AND DISABLING THE

MODEM
VEHICLE
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile 2. Press Connectivity.
network and for you to access a range of 3. Press Connected Vehicle Features.
features. When used in conjunction with 4. Switch vehicle connectivity on or off.
the FordPass app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further,
for example checking the tire pressures, CONNECTING FORDPASS TO THE
the fuel level and the vehicle location. For MODEM
additional information, refer to the local
Ford website. 1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
CONNECTED VEHICLE and log in.
REQUIREMENTS 3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle 4. Select the option to activate your
network. vehicle.
Some remote features require additional 5. Make sure that the name on the screen
service activation. Log in to your Ford matches the name shown in your
account for details. Some restrictions, third FordPass account.
party terms and message or data rates 6. Confirm that FordPass account is
may apply. connected to the modem.
CONNECTED VEHICLE CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO

LIMITATIONS A WI-FI NETWORK
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or 1.
regulations could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some E280315 Press the button on the
features. These changes could even stop touchscreen.
some features from functioning. 2. Press Connectivity.
3. Press Wi-Fi.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO 4. Switch Wi-Fi on.
A MOBILE NETWORK 5. Press View Available Networks.
6. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
WHAT IS THE MODEM
Note: Enter the network password to
The modem allows access to a connect to a secure network.
range of features built into your
vehicle.
383
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – Why can I not connect to a Wi-Fi

network?
TROUBLESHOOTING
• You entered the wrong network
CONNECTED VEHICLE – password. Enter the correct password.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS • The network signal is weak. Move your
- VEHICLES WITH: MODEM vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to
a place where the network signal is not
Why can I not confirm the obstructed.
connection of my FordPass • There are multiple access points in
account to the modem? range with the same network name.
• The modem is not enabled. Switch Choose a unique name for your
vehicle connectivity on. network. Do not use the default name
unless it contains a unique identifier,
• The network signal is weak. Move your for example as part of the MAC
vehicle closer to a place where the address.
network signal is not obstructed.
Why does the Wi-Fi connection
CONNECTED VEHICLE – disconnect after successful
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS connection?
- VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 4 • The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to
Why can I not confirm the a place where the network signal is not
connection of my FordPass obstructed.
account to the modem?
• The modem is not enabled. Switch What can I do if I am close to a Wi-
vehicle connectivity on. Fi router but the network signal
strength is weak?
• The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to a place where the • If your vehicle has a heated windshield,
network signal is not obstructed. position your vehicle so that the
windshield is not facing the Wi-Fi
router.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on
the windows but not on the windshield,
position your vehicle so that the
windshield is facing the Wi-Fi router or
open the windows that are facing the
router.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on
the windows and the windshield, open
the windows that are facing the router.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you
have the garage door closed, open the
garage door as it could block the signal.
384
Connected Vehicle
Why can I not see a network I

expect to see in the list of available
networks?
• The network is hidden. Make the
network visible and try again, or
manually add a network in the Wi-Fi
settings menu.
• Some network security types are not
supported, for example WEP.
Why do software downloads take

too long?
• The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to
a place where the network signal is not
obstructed.
• Wi-Fi network is in high demand or has
a slow Internet connection. Use a more
reliable Wi-Fi network.
Why does the software not update

when the system seems to connect
to a Wi-Fi network and the signal
strength is excellent?
• No software update is available at this
time.
• Select automatic updates option in the
settings menu to enable automatic
software update or contact an
authorized dealer.
• There could be a connection problem.
Test the network using another device.
385
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI 2. If the portal does not open on your

device, open a website and it redirects
HOTSPOT to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it 3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
for access to the Internet. portal to purchase a plan.
Select the settings option on the Note: If you have an active plan, the system
feature bar. does not redirect to the vehicle network
E280315
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot. Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting to purchase more data.
is on. Note: If data usage information is available
2. Press Settings. in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
3. Press Edit.
Note: If you carry out a factory reset, the
4. Press Hotspot visibility. system does not remove your vehicle from
Note: The hotspot visibility default setting your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
is on. remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
and Password Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
Select the settings option on the vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
feature bar. and availability.
E280315
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot. CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-

2. Press Settings. FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
Note: The network name is the hotspot PASSWORD
name.
3. Press View Password. Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi E280315
Hotspot 1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.

1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and 2. Press Settings.
select the hotspot from the list of 3. Press Edit.
available Wi-Fi networks.
4. Press Change Network Name.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
5. Enter your required network name.
Purchasing a Data Plan 6. Press Done.
1. Connect a device to the hotspot. 7. Press Change Password.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal 8. Enter your required password.
opens on your device. 9. Press Done.
386
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot

Frequency
Note: The vehicle hotspot frequency band
is selectable depending upon your device
capabilities. You will not be able to connect
your device to the vehicle hotspot if it does
not support the selected frequency band.
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E280315
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.

2. Press Settings.
3. Press Edit.
4. Select a frequency.
VEHICLE WI-FI HOTSPOT –

TROUBLESHOOTING
VEHICLE WI-FI HOTSPOT –

Why can I not see the Wi-Fi hotspot
name when I search for Wi-Fi
networks on my cell phone or other
device?
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi
hotspot at this time.
• Check what frequency the hotspot is
transmitting in the vehicle hotspot
settings menu. If the frequency is 5 GHz
and your device cannot see the
network, change the frequency to 2.4
GHz.
387
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM PLAYING OR PAUSING THE

PRECAUTIONS AUDIO SOURCE
Audio Unit
WARNING: Driving while distracted Press the button to pause
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash playback. Press again to resume
and injury. We strongly recommend that playback.
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the Touchscreen
safe operation of your vehicle. We Press the button to pause
recommend against the use of any playback. Press again to resume
hand-held device while driving and playback.
systems when possible. Make sure you Note: Not all sources can be paused.
that may affect the use of electronic ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
Listening to loud audio for long periods of

time could damage your hearing.
SWITCHING THE AUDIO UNIT

ON AND OFF
Press the button on the volume
control.
SELECTING THE AUDIO

SOURCE
Audio Unit
Press to open the media source E248939
menu.
E308143
You can press this multiple times to Turn to adjust the volume.
change the audio source or scroll through Some vehicles may be able to adjust the
the media sources. volume using buttons on the steering
wheel.
Touchscreen
Press Sources on the touchscreen to open
the media source menu.
388
Audio System
SWITCHING SHUFFLE MODE 4. Press the arrows to adjust the settings.

ON AND OFF Tone Settings
Press the button on the 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
touchscreen to switch shuffle 2. Press Sound Settings.
mode on or off.
3. Press Tone Settings.
Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode.
4. Press the arrows or slider bar to adjust
the settings.
SWITCHING REPEAT MODE ON
Speed Compensated Volume
AND OFF
2. Press Sound Settings.
touchscreen to switch repeat
mode on or off. 3. Press Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Not all sources have repeat mode. 4. Press a setting.
Occupancy Mode (If Equipped)

SETTING A MEMORY PRESET
1. Select a station or channel. 2. Press Sound Settings.
2. Press and hold a memory preset button 3. Press Occupancy Mode.
on the touchscreen.
4. Press a setting.
Note: The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the preset and returns once it Sound Mode (If Equipped)
is stored.
Note: You can save presets from multiple
sources to the memory preset bar. 2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Sound Mode.
MUTING THE AUDIO 4. Press a setting.
Press to mute the signal. Press SETTING THE CLOCK AND

again to restore the signal.
DATE
ADJUSTING THE SOUND
2. Press Clock Settings.
SETTINGS
3. Set the time.
Balance and Fade (If Equipped) Note: The AM and PM options are not
available if 24-hour mode is on.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Balance / Fade.
389
Audio System
Switching Automatic Time Using the Station List

Updates On and Off
1. Press the search button on the radio
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. screen.
2. Press Clock Settings. 2. Press a radio station from the list.
3. Switch Auto Time Update on or off.
SWITCHING THE DISPLAY ON
FM RADIO AND OFF
FM RADIO LIMITATIONS Audio Unit

Press the button.
The further you travel from a FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the E272035
reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
Touchscreen
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking To switch the display off:
garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
reception. 2. Press Display Settings.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast 3. Press Display Off.
repeating tower, a stronger signal may Note: The display defaults to on each time
overtake a weaker one and result in the you switch your vehicle on.
audio system muting.
To switch the display on, press anywhere
on the touchscreen.
SELECTING AN FM RADIO
STATION
DIGITAL RADIO
Manually Selecting a Radio
Station
WHAT IS DIGITAL RADIO
Press the button on the radio
E356421 tuner to go up the frequency HD Radio™ technology is the digital
band. evolution of analog FM radio.
For additional information, visit
Press the button on the radio www.HDRadio.com.
tuner to go down the frequency
E356422
band. HD Radio Technology is manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Using Seek Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio
and the HD and HD Radio logos are
Press to seek the next station up proprietary trademarks of XPERI. The
E357091 the frequency band. vehicle manufacturer and XPERI are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Press to seek the next station Radio technology. Content may be
E357092 down the frequency band. changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
390
Audio System
HOW DOES DIGITAL RADIO WORK SWITCHING DIGITAL RADIO

RECEPTION ON AND OFF
Your system has a special receiver that
allows it to receive digital broadcasts in 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
addition to analog broadcasts. 2. Press Radio Settings.
HD1 signifies the main programming status 3. Switch HD Radio on or off.
and is available in both analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations are
only available digitally and could contain DIGITAL RADIO INDICATORS
new or different content.
HD Radio Indicator
Note: When the system first receives an
HD1 station, it plays the station in the analog The indicator appears when HD Radio is
version until it verifies the station is an HD on and you tune to a station broadcasting
Radio station. Then it shifts to the digital HD Radio technology.
version.
Note: There is an audio mute delay when
switching to an HD2 or HD3 station because
the system has to reacquire and decode the
digital signal.
DIGITAL RADIO LIMITATIONS

If you are outside the reception area, the E142616
system could not work. The color of the indicator changes to
If you are on the fringe of the reception indicate the system status.
area, the station could mute due to weak Gray indicates the system is acquiring a
signal strength. digital station.
Note: If you are listening to HD1, the system Orange indicates digital audio is playing.
changes back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again. If Multicast Indicator
you are listening to any other multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays The multicast indicator appears if the
muted unless it is able to connect to the current station is broadcasting multiple
digital signal again. digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers indicate additional digital
Depending on the station quality, you could
channels available.
hear a slight sound change when the
station changes between analog and Note: For stations that have more than one
digital audio. HD multicast, the HD indicator and radio
text appears as a button. Press the button
You cannot access a saved HD station if
to cycle through all of the HD stations on
your vehicle is outside the station’s
that specific frequency.
reception area.
391
Audio System
SATELLITE RADIO When you pass a ground-based

broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger
signal may overtake a weaker one and
WHAT IS SATELLITE RADIO could result in the audio system muting.
Your display could show an error message
Your factory-installed SiriusXM radio to indicate the interference.
system includes a limited subscription
term, which begins on the date of sale or
lease of your vehicle. See an authorized LOCATING THE SATELLITE RADIO
dealer for availability. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
For additional information about extended 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
subscription terms, visit www.SiriusXM.com
in the United States, www.SiriusXM.ca in 2. Tune to channel 0.
Canada, or call SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474. SELECTING A CHANNEL
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted Manually Selecting a Channel
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving Press the button to find the
or adding particular channels, and its prices, previous or next available radio
E328569
at any time, with or without notice to you. channel.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be E328570
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
Linear Tuner
SATELLITE RADIO LIMITATIONS The linear tuner is displayed when

manually selecting a channel. You can
For optimal reception performance, keep swipe left or right on the linear tuner
the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up carousel to navigate through the channel
and keep luggage and other material as list. Tap on a channel title to listen to it.
far away from the antenna as possible.
Placing luggage over the antenna may Using Direct Tune
reduce performance. Factory-installed and
1. Press the channel up or down button
aftermarket vehicle structures including,
to open the linear tuner screen.
but not limited to, roof racks and soft top
roofs in a partially open position could 2. Press Direct Tune to open the number
reduce reception performance. pad.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, 3. Enter the channel you prefer.
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
garages, dense tree foliage and Using Browse
thunderstorms can interfere with your 1. Press Browse.
reception.
2. Select a channel.
392
Audio System
SATELLITE RADIO SETTINGS Note: Requires a trial or active subscription

to use.
Subscription
Listening History
Your subscription status is displayed. You
can subscribe or manage your subscription Listening history is a list of recently listened
directly from the touchscreen. to SiriusXM content. You can view, manage
and reset the listening history using the
SiriusXM Favorites controls on the touchscreen.
While you are listening to SiriusXM, you can Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
save favorites by: to use.
• Tapping the currently tuned channel Help and Support
or show logo on the SiriusXM audio
screen. You can contact SiriusXM Customer Care
• Tuning to a channel or show you want directly from the operating system and
to save as a favorite. Navigate to the view information required to manage your
SiriusXM Favorites screen and press SiriusXM account.
the Add Current button. The currently
tuned channel or show is saved as a
favorite.
• Saving a radio preset. This saves the
currently tuned SiriusXM channel or
show as a favorite
393
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUDIO SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES

Satellite Radio Troubleshooting
Error Message Potential Effects Recommended Action
Connectivity Disabled Internet streaming and On Internet connectivity is

Demand shows are unavail- turned off. See Connected
able and some SiriusXM Vehicle (page 383).
features are disabled.
No Internet Audio system may mute. SYNC attempts to connect.
Switch to Satellite button See Satellite Radio Limit-
may be displayed on the ations (page 392). Switch to
SiriusXM audio screen if the a satellite connection for the
channel is also available via current channel if the option
satellite. is available.
No Satellite Signal Audio system may mute. Antenna may be obstructed
Switch to Internet button or satellite reception is weak
may be displayed on the in your location. See Satel-
SiriusXM audio screen if the lite Radio Limitations
channel is also available via (page 392). Switch to an
streaming. internet connection for the
current channel if the option
is available.
Slow Network Connection Audio system may mute Allow some time for the
while the audio attempts to audio to load or tune to a
load. different channel.
Channel Unavailable Audio system may mute. A temporary update may be
Radio may tune to a in progress. Allow some time
different channel. before retrying to tune to the
channel. If the issue
continues, the channel may
no longer be available.
Episode Unavailable Audio system may mute. A temporary update may be
Radio may tune to a in progress. Allow some time
different channel. before retrying to play the
episode. If the issue
continues, the episode may
no longer be available.
394
Audio System
Something went wrong Audio system may mute. Allow some time and retry
Radio may tune to a the action.
different channel.
Subscribe to Listen Cannot listen to selected Your subscription has
content. Content may expired or you have not yet
appear grayed out and some subscribed for access to the
features may be disabled. listed content. Navigate to
Subscription under the
Satellite Radio Settings
menu. If you have an active
subscription which includes
the listed channel or content
and you see this error, you
may need to refresh your
radio. To refresh your Siri-
usXM radio, visit www.siri-
usxm.com/refresh in the US,
or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh
in Canada.
You may need to provide
your SiriusXM Radio identific-
ation number. See
Locating the Satellite
Radio Identification
Number (page 392).
395
Audio System
Upgrade to Listen Cannot listen to selected Your subscription does not

content. Content may include access to the listed
appear grayed out and some content. You may need to
features may be disabled. upgrade your subscription.
Navigate to Subscription
under the Satellite Radio
Settings menu. If you have
an active subscription which
includes the listed channel
or content and you see this
error, you may need to
refresh your radio. To refresh
your SiriusXM radio, visit
www.siriusxm.com/refresh
in the US, or www.siri-
usxm.ca/refresh in Canada.
You may need to provide
your SiriusXM Radio identific-
ation number. See
Locating the Satellite
Radio Identification
Number (page 392).
Location Restricted Content Audio may mute. Not avail- Content is not available in
able in your location or your location or SiriusXM is
Unable to determine your unable to determine your
location may be displayed. location. Tuning to a
different channel may
resolve the issue.
Channel Blocked Audio may mute. Radio may The Block Explicit Content
tune to a different channel. filter is turned on. Navigate
to Listener Settings under
the Satellite Radio Settings
menu to access the Block
Explicit Content filter.
Navigate to Listener
Settings. See Satellite
Radio Settings (page 393).
Antenna Problem or Hard- Audio may mute. Access to If issue persists, you may
ware Problem SiriusXM features may be need to visit an authorized
unavailable. dealer for service.
396
Audio System
SiriusXM Updating... Audio may mute. Allow SiriusXM some time

to complete updating.
Loading... Audio may mute. Content No action necessary. If
may be temporarily unavail- loading time is longer than
able while loading. usual, See Satellite Radio
Settings (page 393).
SiriusXM Loading... Audio may mute. Content No action necessary. Allow
and controls may be SiriusXM some time to finish
temporarily unavailable. loading.
397
CENTER DISPLAY Phone call in progress.

E353213
PRECAUTIONS
Media player connected using
E353208 Bluetooth®.
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Cell phone network signal
and injury. We strongly recommend that strength.
device that may take your focus off the Cell phone roaming.
recommend against the use of any Text message received.
encourage the use of voice-operated E335295
systems when possible. Make sure you Unread email message.

are aware of all applicable local laws E353216

devices while driving. Automatic crash notification
system off.
CENTER DISPLAY Cell phone battery status.
LIMITATIONS E335293
Speed-restricted Features
Vehicle Data
For your safety, features that are not
critical while driving are not available when Wi-Fi available.
E353219
the vehicle is moving at or above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Wi-Fi connected.
STATUS BAR
Vehicle data sharing on.
The bar is on top of the display and
indicates the status of your vehicle's
features. Vehicle data sharing off.
Audio System E335292
Audio system muted. Vehicle location sharing on.

E353221
Vehicle data and vehicle location

Connected Device sharing on.
Cell phone microphone muted.
398
Vehicle Software Update To change the assigned feature:

See Software Update Indicators (page 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
428). 2. Press Edit Favorite.
Wireless Accessory Charger Note: If you assign an exhaust mode to the
favorite button, pressing the button
Wireless accessory charger activates the exhaust mode, and pressing
E353214 active. it again restores the previous exhaust mode.
INFORMATION ON DEMAND
HOME SCREEN SCREEN
Features, such as navigation, audio and The information on demand screen
phone, are located in the main portion of displays cards on the side of the display
the display. The icons located on the side and allows you to see information from
of the display allow you to access other different features.
vehicle features and settings.
You can swipe up or down to view a
Press to adjust system settings. different card.
E280315 Note: On some screens, you can swipe a
Press to view features. card toward the center of the screen to
move the content into the main screen.
E335299
Note: The icon may be different depending

on your vehicle. CENTER DISPLAY SETTINGS
Press to search for and use Adjusting the Display Brightness
E353220 compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Center Display.
FAVORITE 3. Press Brightness.
4. Drag the slider left or right.
instrument panel to turn a Valet Mode
E381409
feature on or off.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
Assigning a Feature system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
If there is no feature assigned: When you select valet mode, a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit PIN
1.
must be entered to enable and disable
E381409 Press the button on the valet mode. You can use any PIN you
instrument panel. choose, but you must use the same PIN to
disable valet mode. The system asks you
2. Follow the prompts on the to input the code.
touchscreen.
399
Note: If the system is locked and you

cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the customer relationship center.
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same PIN.
The system reconnects to your phone and
all of your options are available again.
REBOOTING THE CENTER

DISPLAY
You can reboot the center display using
the controls on the steering wheel.
1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek forward and audio system power
button for 10 seconds.
400
My Mustang
MY MUSTANG OVERVIEW Press the button on the

instrument panel.
E374604
E385061
A Track apps.
B Auxiliary gauges.
C Custom mode.
D My color.
E Cluster theme.
F Exhaust mode. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 226).
401
My Mustang
TRACK APPS control of your vehicle increasing the risk

of personal injury or property damage.
TRACK APPS PRECAUTIONS
Note: Track apps are for track use only. Do
not use them under any other driving
conditions.
WARNING: Track Apps™ is for
track use only. Remember that even Note: The pre-collision assist system turns
advanced technology cannot defy the off when using Track apps or when you
laws of physics. It is always possible to switch off your stability control system.
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the TRACK APPS OVERVIEW
road condition can cause you to lose From the My Mustang menu, press Track
Apps.
E385062
A Acceleration timer.
B Brake performance.
C Lap timer.
D Launch settings.
402
My Mustang
E Performance shift indicator.

F Drift brake.
G Line lock.
H Launch control.
I Rev match.
ACCELERATION TIMER BRAKE PERFORMANCE
Displays your vehicle's rate of acceleration Displays your vehicle's rate of deceleration
for a given speed or distance range. for a given speed range.
Note: Test events vary depending on the Note: Test events vary depending on the
measurement unit conventions selected. measurement unit conventions selected.
Using Acceleration Timer Using Brake Performance
1. From the Track Apps menu, press 1. From the Track Apps menu, press
Acceleration Timer. Brake Performance.
2. Select a drive type. 2. Select a speed range.
3. Select a start type. 3. Press Start.
4. Press Start. 4. Press the OK button on the steering
wheel.
Note: The start button is not available until
a drive type and start type are selected. When finished, press OK for more options.
5. Press the OK button on the steering Results
wheel to start the timer.
To view your results:
When finished, press OK for more options.
1. From the brake performance menu,
Results press Results.
To view your timer results: To clear results without clearing all-time
best:
1. From the acceleration timer menu,
press Results. 1. Press Clear.
To clear results without clearing all-time 2. Press Yes.
best: To clear all results.
1. Press Clear. 1. Press Clear All.
2. Press Yes. 2. Press Yes.
To clear all results.
1. Press Clear All. MANUAL LAP TIMER
2. Press Yes. Gives you the ability to record lap times at
three separate tracks.
403
My Mustang
Note: Test events vary depending on the

measurement unit conventions selected.
Using Lap Timer

1. From the Track Apps menu, press Lap
Timer.
2. Select a track.
Note: You can edit the track names.
3. Press Start.
4. Press the OK button on the steering
E385733
wheel.
Note: You can interrupt a session at any 2. From the menu, you can:
time by holding the OK button on the
• Set the light mode between off, tach,
steering wheel.
track and drag.
When finished, press OK for more options. • Set a shift point within the allowable
RPM range in increments of 100.
Results
• Enable or disable the shift tone, based
To view your results: on the set shift point.
1. From the lap timer menu, press Note: To enable or disable the feature, you
Results. must choose a light mode.
To clear results without clearing all-time
best: LINE LOCK
1. Press Clear.
Line lock maintains brake force at the front
2. Press Yes. wheels, allowing the rear wheels to spin
To clear all results. with minimal vehicle movement. It is
intended to condition the rear tires to
1. Press Clear All. maximize traction prior to track use.
2. Press Yes. Note: Line lock is a feature intended for use
at tracks only and should not be used on
PERFORMANCE SHIFT public roadways.
INDICATOR - MANUAL Note: Use of this feature could result in
TRANSMISSION significantly increased rear tire wear.
The performance shift indicator allows you There are three line lock stages:
to set the point at which you want to be • Initiated.
alerted to shift gears, through audible and
visual alerts. You can choose different • Engaged.
graphic themes that represent the engine's • Off.
rotation.
1. From the Track Apps menu, press
Performance Shift Indicator to reach
the menu.
404
My Mustang
Initiating Line Lock The following conditions must be met to

engage line lock:
The initiation stage verifies that the vehicle
is ready for line lock function, and confirms • The vehicle is on a level surface.
driver intent. • The engine is running.
1. From the track apps menu, press Line • The vehicle is stopped.
Lock. • The parking brake is not applied.
The following conditions must be met to • Both doors are closed.
initialize line lock: • The transmission is in a forward gear.
• The vehicle is on a level surface. • There are no electronic stability control
• The engine is running. faults.
• The vehicle is traveling less than • The steering wheel is in the straight
25 mph (40 km/h). ahead position.
• Selectable drive mode is not in wet • A spare tire is not installed.
mode (if equipped). • Auto hold is turned off.
• There are no electronic stability control • Adaptive cruise control is not active.
faults.
• A spare tire is not installed. Releasing Line Lock
• The parking brake is not applied. While line lock is engaged, you can exit
• Auto hold is turned off. (release) the feature using the OK button.
• Adaptive cruise control is not active. When you press the OK button, line lock
releases immediately and normal vehicle
• Both doors are closed. function resumes. When line lock engages,
If you want to cancel line lock once it is a countdown timer shows the remaining
initialized, press the OK button on the time before line lock is released
steering wheel. Once initiated, line lock is automatically. If you exceed the time limit,
prepared for activation and remains or another vehicle condition requires line
initiated up to 25 mph (40 km/h). If vehicle lock to release, the system safely
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), line lock disengages and normal vehicle function
automatically cancels. resumes.
Note: If you apply the brake pedal or
Engaging Line Lock parking brake while line lock is engaged, line
Follow the prompts in the instrument lock automatically cancels and normal
cluster display to engage line lock after it brake function resumes.
is initialized. To engage, firmly apply the
brakes. Then press the OK button. Once
engaged, release the brake pedal. The
front brakes remain applied and the rear
brakes release. At this point, the
engagement timer is initiated and shown
on the instrument cluster display.
405
My Mustang
REV MATCH - MANUAL 5. Shift the transmission into first gear.

TRANSMISSION 6. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
keep it pressed. Allow the tachometer
This feature provides a smoother driving to settle at the RPM that you selected
experience, particularly during a downshift and wait for the indicator to turn green.
event. Rev Match commands a quick
engine RPM match to the selected gear 7. Release the clutch pedal.
during a clutch pressed gear shift. You can
switch this feature on and off through the Improving Your Launch
touchscreen. If launch control is not available when you
come to a stop:
LAUNCH CONTROL - MANUAL • Wait for the engine to come to
TRANSMISSION operating temperature. If the engine is
too hot or cold, launch control is not
Temporarily holds the engine RPM at a set available.
point and maximizes traction to the wheels
for a more aggressive start. • Make sure the drive mode is not set to
Slippery.
Enabling or Disabling Launch If the vehicle did not launch effectively:
Control • Adjust the RPM and practice releasing
1. From the Track Apps menu, press the clutch. It may take practice to get
Launch Control. a feel for how quickly to release the
clutch.
To set the RPM hold point:
• Switch traction control on, this can
1. From the Track Apps menu, press reduce excessive wheel spin.
Launch Settings.
Keep in mind that weather, road surface,
Note: You can also enable or disable the and tire conditions can also affect your
feature from this screen. launch.
Launch Control Indicators

With Traction Control Off
Not ready.
E38549 3
E379195
2. Use the slider bar or arrows to set the Ready to use.
RPM value.
E379193
Using Launch Control
Active and ready to launch.
1. Make sure launch control is enabled. E379194
2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
3. The indicator illuminates white in the With Traction Control On
instrument cluster when launch control Not ready.
is ready.
E379192
4. Fully press and hold the clutch pedal.
406
My Mustang
Ready to use. Note: The system may exit track mode if it

reaches certain threshold limits. If this
E375124
happens, Drive Mode Not Available or
Active and ready to launch. Service AdvanceTrac messages display in
the instrument cluster display screen. You
E375125 can reset the system by switching your
vehicle off and back on, driving normally up
DRIFT BRAKE (If Equipped) to 15 minutes and reaching 45 mph
(73 km/h). After the system is re-calibrated,
Allows you to lock up the rear drive modes will be available through the
tires to enable drift maneuvers. button on the steering wheel.
E380329
Drift Brake Driving Hints - Vehicles
Before drifting, make sure you are on a with: Automatic Transmission
track, and have the necessary safety
equipment including a certified helmet and Two important things to note when driving
approved neck restraint device. Work up a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
to your limit while drifting, do not expect • Keep the RPM high when drifting to
to be an expert right away. prevent unintentional engine stall. The
Note: Drift brake is for track use only. Do engine RPM drops rapidly when locking
not use it under any other driving conditions. the rear wheels, so it is best to be on
the throttle prior to and after pulling
Note: Using this feature may result in the handle to prevent stalling.
significantly increased rear tire wear.
• Using the paddle shifters or manual
Switching Drift Brake On or Off shift mode enhances your ability to
keep the vehicle in the power band.
1. From the Track Apps menu, press Drift This way when you release the drift
Brake. brake you can quickly get back on the
2. Confirm the selection. This enables throttle and maintain your drift.
track mode. As your drifting skills develop, it may be
Note: If track mode is already enabled, beneficial to turn off other vehicle control
there is no confirmation message. systems such as traction control and
electronic stability control. See Traction
Note: Switching drift brake on
Control (page 197). See Stability
automatically enables track mode. If you
Control (page 198). Before returning to
change to a different drive mode, drift brake
public roads, re-enable both systems.
disables.
3. Press Drift Brake again to switch it off. Drift Brake Driving Hints - Vehicles
Note: When you switch drift brake off, track
with: Manual Transmission
mode remains on. Drifting in a manual transmission gives you
Note: When the feature is on, the brake more control over the chosen gear, which
handle applies braking to the rear wheels allows you to make sure you have correct
only and locks up the rear wheels. When the application of power to maintain the drift.
feature is off, the brake handle works like
the foot brake and applies braking to all four
wheels.
407
My Mustang
Two things to note while drifting in a 2. Use the arrows on the screen to select
manual transmission vehicle: the gauges you prefer.
• Make sure to disengage the clutch Auxiliary gauges:
immediately prior to pulling the drift • Cylinder head temperature.
brake. This prevents fighting engine
torque and prevents unintended stalls. • Engine oil temperature.
• After releasing the drift brake, rapidly • Transmission oil temperature.
engage the clutch and get back on the • Axle temperature.
throttle to maintain your drift. • Engine oil pressure.
As your drifting skills develop, it may be • Inlet air temperature.
beneficial to turn off other vehicle control
systems such as traction control and • Manifold charge temperature.
electronic stability control. See Traction • Intercooler coolant temperature.
Control (page 197). See Stability • Vacuum or vacuum/boost.
Control (page 198). Before returning to
public roads, re-enable both systems. • Voltage.
Note: Depending on your vehicle
configuration, not all gauges are available.
AUXILIARY GAUGES
Auxiliary gauges are available in CUSTOM DRIVE MODE
the touchscreen.
E380326
Allows you to create your own drive mode
From the My Mustang menu, press experience. Choose a drive mode to use as
Auxiliary Gauges. a starting point and then mix and match
settings to tailor the experience to your
Press the button to switch preferences. You can create up to six
between three or five-gauge custom modes.
E380325
view.
You can set one of the six
custom modes as the active
E375917
E380324 mode. The active mode appears
To edit the gauges: as an available mode when selecting a
drive mode. See Selecting a Drive Mode
1. (page 226).
E280315 Press the button.
408
My Mustang
Creating a Drive Mode
E385494
A Profile selection.
B Base drive mode.
C Adjustable settings.
1. From the My Mustang menu, press

Custom Drive Mode. MY COLOR
2. Press the profile button to select a Allows you to customize the
profile to edit. colors of the instrument cluster
Note: Selecting a profile also sets it as the E380323
and touchscreen.
active mode.
You can also adjust the ambient lighting.
3. Select the base drive mode you prefer.
See Ambient Lighting (page 101).
4. Press each option and select the
setting you prefer. 1. From the My Mustang menu, press
MyColor.
2. Adjust the primary and secondary
CLUSTER THEME colors to the setting you prefer.
You can change the style of the
display behind the steering EXHAUST MODE (IF EQUIPPED)
E380328
wheel.
Allows you to change how loud your
1. From the My Mustang menu, press exhaust is. You can choose from one of
Cluster Theme. four settings.
2. Select a theme.
Quiet Mode
Note: If you choose Match Drive Mode, the
instrument cluster style changes according Lowers the noise of the exhaust.
to the drive mode you select.
E384530
409
My Mustang
Quiet Start
Minimizes exhaust noise when you start
the vehicle. You can set a schedule for
when you want quiet start to be on.
To access the quiet start menu:
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Quiet Start.
From the menu, you can do the following:
• Switch quiet start on or off.
• Set the schedule.
Normal Mode
Default factory setting.
E287122
Sport Mode
Raises the noise of the exhaust.
E384531
Track Mode
Loudest level of exhaust noise.
E384532
Note: The track exhaust mode setting is

only for use at tracks and not for use on
public roadways. Use of this setting results
in increased exterior noise, which may not
meet state and local laws and regulations.
It is the obligation of the driver to operate
the vehicle in a manner that complies with
state and local requirements. Only use the
track exhaust mode setting at a competition
track or an off-road course where increased
exterior vehicle noise is acceptable.
410
Voice Interaction
FORD ASSISTANT From the settings menu you can do the

following:
USING FORD ASSISTANT • Switch listen for wake word on or off.
• Set the preferred wake word.
The digital assistant allows you to control • Switch advance mode on or off.
vehicle features using conversational
requests. • Switch phone confirmation on or off.
• Switch the commands list on or off.
To begin a voice interaction using the wake
word, say the selected wake word, then • View the commands help menu.
say your command. Press the button next to a menu
Press the voice interaction option for more information.
E366956
button on the steering wheel. A
E142599 tone sounds before you can say
your command. FORD ASSISTANT – FREQUENTLY
Note: You may need to enable your ASKED QUESTIONS
vehicle's modem to use certain voice
commands. See Enabling and Disabling
Why does the system not
the Modem (page 383). understand what I am saying?
Note: When you are not driving, additional • You are speaking too soon. When using
commands are available by using popular the button of the steering wheel, wait
chat applications. Use FordPass to setup a for the tone before you speak.
conversation with your Ford assistant.
Voice Command Examples understand the name of a track or
artist?
To see examples of what voice commands
you can use with different features: • Bluetooth® does not support voice
commands.Connect your device to a
Press the button on the USB port.
touchscreen.
E280315 • You are not saying the name exactly
as it appears on your device. Say the
1. Press Ford Assistant.
name of the track or artist exactly as it
2. Press Voice Command Help. appears on your device. Spell out any
3. Select a feature. abbreviations in the name.
• The system does not recognize some
FORD ASSISTANT SETTINGS special characters contained in the
name of a song or artist, for example
To access the settings menu: *, - or +. Rename the files on your
device or use the touchscreen to select
Press the button on the and play the track.
touchscreen.
E280315
1. Press Ford Assistant.
411
Voice Interaction

understand the name of a contact
in the phonebook on my device and
calls the wrong contact?
• You are not saying the name exactly
as it appears on your device. Say the
first and last name of the contact
exactly as it appears on your device.
Spell out any abbreviations in the
name.
• The name contains special characters,
for example *, - or +. Rename the
contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the
contact.

understand foreign names of
contacts in the phonebook on my
device?
• The system applies phonetic
pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in
the phonebook on your device. Select
the name of the contact on the
touchscreen and use the Hear it option
to get an idea of how the system
expects you to pronounce it.
Why do the system voice prompts

and the pronunciation of some
words not seem accurate?
• The system uses text-to-speech
technology and a synthetically
generated voice rather than a
pre-recorded human voice.
412
Alexa Built-In
WHAT IS ALEXA BUILT-IN Signing Out of Your Account

Allows you to use Alexa in your vehicle for
auto-specific use cases on the road and 2. Press Amazon Alexa.
gives you access to an ever-evolving 3. Press Sign Out.
number of skills that help to make your life
more productive, entertaining, and
connected while using your vehicle. USING ALEXA BUILT-IN
To use Alexa, say “Alexa” or press the voice
ALEXA BUILT-IN interaction button on the steering wheel
REQUIREMENTS and then say “Alexa” to invoke Alexa to
start listening.
To use Alexa, all of the following must Note: If the wake word is not enabled, you
occur: can only use the voice interaction button.
• Your vehicle modem is enabled. You can use Alexa for the following and
• You are signed in to an existing Amazon more:
account. • Entertainment.
• Vehicle location services are enabled. • Hands-free calling.
• Vehicle connectivity and vehicle data • Traffic and navigation.
sharing is enabled.
• Vehicle controls.
• Smart home device control.
SIGNING IN TO YOUR
• Weather and news information.
ACCOUNT
Press the button in the status ALEXA BUILT-IN SETTINGS
E368039 bar and follow the on-screen
prompts. Enabling the Wake Word
To sign in using the settings menu: 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Amazon Alexa.
2. Press Amazon Alexa. 3. Switch Listen for Wake Word on or off.
3. Press Get Started. Note: If the wake word is not enabled, you
can only use the voice interaction button.
4. Sign in to your account by either
scanning the QR code or entering the Contact List
on-screen code into the Amazon
website. Displays a list of connected phones and
5. Once signed in, follow the on-screen contact sharing status for each phone.
prompts. To change the contact sharing status:
6. When complete, the vehicle informs 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
you that Alexa is ready to be used in
2. Press Amazon Alexa.
the vehicle.
3. Press Contact List.
413
Alexa Built-In
4. Enable or disable sharing for each

phone.
Note: You can share contacts from more
than one phone at a time.
Things to Try
Learn more about what you can do with
Alexa by browsing the things to try.
2. Press Amazon Alexa.
3. Press Things to Try.
414
Phone
PHONE PRECAUTIONS PHONE MENU

This menu becomes available after pairing
WARNING: Driving while distracted a phone.
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Recent Call List
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any Display and select an entry from a list of
device that may take your focus off the previous calls.
safe operation of your vehicle. We Contacts
hand-held device while driving and Display a smart search form to look up your
encourage the use of voice-operated contacts. Use the List button to
systems when possible. Make sure you alphabetically sort your contacts.
that may affect the use of electronic Favorites
devices while driving. Display the list of favorite contacts that
are set up on your phone.
CONNECTING YOUR PHONE Messaging
Go to the settings menu on your device and Displays the list of text messages to read,
switch Bluetooth® on. listen to, or respond to.
Press the phone option on the Email
home screen.
Displays the list of emails to read, listen to,
1. Press Add Phone. or respond to.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your Phone List
vehicle on your cell phone.
Display the list of paired or connected
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone. devices that you can select.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
Note: Up to 12 devices can be stored.
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm the number on your cell phone Do Not Disturb
matches the number on the
touchscreen. Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone. Phone Keypad
4. Download the phonebook from your Directly dial a number.
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings on the center display
to specify the primary phone. You can
change this setting at any time.
415
Phone
Voice Control
Press the button and say a command to
use the Google or Siri voice assistant
available on your connected phone to
access supported features.
Note: Some features under the phone menu
may not be available if the feature is not
supported through the phone.
416
Phone
MAKING AND RECEIVING A Pressing the backspace button deletes the

last digit you typed.
PHONE CALL
Receiving Calls
Making Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
To call a number in your contacts, sounds. Caller information appears in the
select: display if it is available.
Menu Item Action and Description To accept the call, select:
Contacts You can then select the Menu Item
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers Accept
stored for that contact Note: You can also accept the call by
display along with any pressing the phone button on the steering
stored contact photos. You wheel.
can then select the
number that you want to To reject the call, select:
call. The system begins the
call. Menu Item
Reject
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
Menu Item Action and Description system logs it as a missed call.
Recent Call You can then select an During a Phone Call
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
To call a number from your favorites,
select: The phone status items are also visible:
Menu Item Action and Description • Signal Strength.
• Battery.
Favorites You can then select an
entry that you want to call. You can select any of the following during
The system begins the call. an active phone call:
To call a number that is not stored in

your phone, select:
Menu Item Action and Description
Phone Select the digits of the

Keypad number you wish to call.
Call The system begins the call.
417
Phone
Item
Item
Mute You can switch the
End Call Immediately end a microphone off so
phone call. You can the caller does not
also press the hear you.
button on the
steering wheel. Privacy Transfer the phone
call audio to the
Keypad Press this to access cell phone or back
the phone keypad. to the touchscreen.
SENDING AND RECEIVING A TEXT MESSAGE
Menu Item Description
Hear It Hear the text message.

View View the text message.
Call Call the sender.
Reply Reply to the text message with a standard text message.
418
Phone
SWITCHING TEXT MESSAGE

NOTIFICATION ON AND OFF
The settings on your device must be
enabled to receive text message
notifications on the center display. Check
your device settings to enable these
features.
419
Bluetooth®
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH® hand-held device while driving and

DEVICE encourage the use of voice-operated
1. Make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on are aware of all applicable local laws
your device. that may affect the use of electronic
3. Press Connectivity. Connect your device.
4. Press Bluetooth. Press the audio button on the
5. Press Add a Bluetooth Device. home screen.
E100027
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your device. Press Sources.
E250655
6. Select your vehicle on your device.
Note: A number appears on your device and Press the Bluetooth® option.
on the touchscreen.
7. Confirm that the number on your
device matches the number on the Press to play a track. Press again
touchscreen. to pause the track.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you Press to skip to the next track.
have successfully paired your device.
Press and hold to fast forward
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are through the track.
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Press once to return to the
Ford Motor Company is under license. beginning of a track. Repeatedly
Other trademarks and trade names are press to return to previous
those of their respective owners. tracks.
Press and hold to fast rewind through the
PLAYING MEDIA USING track.
BLUETOOTH®

420
Apps
APP PRECAUTIONS ENABLING APPS ON AN IOS

DEVICE
WARNING: Driving while distracted Select the apps option on the
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash home screen.
you use extreme caution when using any 1. Select Mobile Apps Help.
2. Follow the instructions to pair and
connect your device via Bluetooth® or
with a USB cable.
hand-held device while driving and 3. Start the apps on your device that you
encourage the use of voice-operated want to use.
systems when possible. Make sure you 4. Select the app that you want to use on
are aware of all applicable local laws the touchscreen.
devices while driving. Note: Some apps may run through Apple
CarPlay if it is enabled.
Note: Closing an app on your device closes
APP REQUIREMENTS it on the touchscreen.
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
When you start an app through the system Mobile Apps List under Mobile Apps Help.
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have ENABLING APPS ON AN
granted at any time when your vehicle is ANDROID DEVICE
not moving. We recommend that you
check your data plan before using your Select the apps option on the
apps through the system. Using them home screen.
could result in additional charges. We also
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and 1. Select Mobile Apps Help.
privacy policy before using their app. Make 2. Follow the instructions to pair and
sure that you have an active account for connect your device via Bluetooth® or
apps that you want to use through the with a USB cable.
system. Some apps will work with no 3. Start the apps on your device that you
setup. Others require you to configure want to use.
some personal settings before you can use
them. 4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
ACCESSING APPS
Note: Some devices may lose the ability to
Select the apps option on the play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
home screen. enabled.
Note: Some apps may run through Android
Auto if it is enabled.
421
Apps
Note: Closing an app on your device closes SWITCHING ANDROID AUTO

it on the touchscreen.
ON AND OFF
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
Mobile Apps List under Mobile Apps Help. Enabling Android Auto with USB
(If Equipped)
SWITCHING APPLE CARPLAY

1. Connect your device to a USB port.
ON AND OFF
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB
Note: Certain features of the system are
1. Connect your device to a USB port. not available when you are using Android
2. Follow the instructions on your device Auto.
and the touchscreen.
Enabling Android Auto with
Note: Selecting Enable Wireless CarPlay Wireless
on your device prepares the device for
wireless Apple CarPlay when you re-enter 1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®.
the vehicle. 2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Enabling Apple CarPlay with
Wireless Note: Certain Android devices do not
support Android Auto Wireless. Check your
1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®. Android OS version for compatibility.
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen. Disabling Android Auto
Disabling Apple CarPlay home screen.
E280315
home screen. 1. Press Phone List.
E280315
2. Select your device from the list.
1. Press Phone List.
3. Press Disable.
3. Press Disable. Re-Enabling Android Auto
Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay home screen.
E280315
home screen. 1. Press Phone List.
E280315
1. Press Phone List.
3. Press Connect to Android Auto.
3. Press Connect to Apple CarPlay.
422
Personal Profiles
HOW DO PERSONAL PROFILES ENABLING OR DISABLING

WORK PERSONAL PROFILES
This feature allows you to create multiple When you switch on the Personal Profiles
personal profiles enabling users to feature:
personalize vehicle’s settings such as seats • Unlocking a door with a remote control
and mirrors, as well as non-positional or mobile device that is not linked to a
settings like radio, navigation and driver driver profile does not change the
assist. Positional settings are saved by active profile, but remains in the last
holding a memory seat button. known profile. It does not change the
Non-positional settings are saved when positional settings.
you change a setting while a profile is
active. You can create one profile for each • Pressing a memory seat button that is
preset memory seat button along with a not linked to a driver profile or saved to
guest profile. a preset setting does not change the
active profile, but remains in the last
Recalling and Changing a Profile known profile. It does not change the
positional settings.
You can recall a profile using the • Pressing a memory seat button that is
touchscreen or the preset button you not linked to a driver profile but is saved
selected when you created your profile. to a preset setting does not change the
You can also link a remote control and a active profile, but remains in the last
mobile device to your profile, to recall the known profile. It recalls the positional
profile. settings that you saved to that memory
seat button.
When you switch off a Personal Profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control
or mobile device does not recall any
non-positional settings but still recalls
positional settings from the driver
profile which the remote control or
mobile device is linked to.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile or saved to
a preset setting does not change the
positional or non-positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
linked to a driver profile or has saved
to a preset setting recalls the positional
settings that you saved to that memory
seat button.
423
Personal Profiles
CREATING A PERSONAL LINKING OR UNLINKING A

PROFILE PERSONAL PROFILE TO A
DEVICE
Use the touchscreen to create a personal
profile. Use the touchscreen to link a mobile device
1. Switch the vehicle on and leave the to a personal profile.
vehicle in park (P). 1. Switch the vehicle on and leave the
2. Select the Personal Profiles button vehicle in park (P).
under Settings. 2. Select the Personal Profiles button
3. Follow the instructions on the display. under Settings.
3. Touch the arrow for the profile you
LINKING OR UNLINKING A wish to link to a mobile device.
PERSONAL PROFILE TO A 4. Select mobile device.
REMOTE CONTROL 5. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: To successfully link a mobile device,
You can save Personal Profiles, including the mobile device must be in your vehicle,
preset memory positions, for up to three and must have previously been setup as a
remote controls by assigning a remote remote control for your vehicle.
control to a personal profile using the
Note: The guest profile consists of existing
touchscreen.
settings when there is no driver profile
Use the touchscreen to link a remote created. After you create a driver profile, the
control to a personal profile. guest profile serves as an additional driver
1. Switch the vehicle on and leave the profile.
vehicle in park (P). Note: You cannot link a personalized name
2. Select Personal Profiles under Settings. to a guest profile.
3. Touch the arrow for the profile you
want to link to a remote control.
4. Select remote control.
5. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control is in range, the memory function
moves to the settings of the first key to
initiate a memory recall.
Note: The guest profile consists of existing
settings when there is no driver profile
created. After you create a driver profile, the
guest profile serves as an additional driver
profile.
Note: You cannot link a remote control to
a guest profile.
424
Navigation (If Equipped)
CONNECTED NAVIGATION (IF ADJUSTING THE MAP

EQUIPPED)
ZOOMING THE MAP IN AND OUT
Your vehicle may be equipped with
connected navigation. Depending on your You can use pinch gestures to zoom in and
version, you are given a 90 day or 3 year out. Place two fingers on the screen and
trial. After the trial period, you need to sign move them apart to zoom in. Place two
up to continue the experience. For fingers on the screen and bring them
additional information, visit ford.com/ together to zoom out.
connectedservices.
Note: If you do not sign up or renew your CHANGING THE FORMAT OF THE
subscription, you can still use navigation MAP
through a connected device.
Press the Menu button.
E328845
ACCESSING NAVIGATION
1. Press the Map Orientation tile.
Press the button to access
2. Select a map orientation.
Navigation.
Note: As the driver, be aware of all local LIVE TRAFFIC
traffic regulations and road attributes, and
operate your vehicle in a safe and legal
manner. WHAT IS LIVE TRAFFIC
You can observe real-time road congestion
NAVIGATION MAP UPDATES when live traffic is on.
To update your map data over Wi-Fi, your

vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
SWITCHING LIVE TRAFFIC ON
access point. For USB updates and other
AND OFF
details, contact dealers at Press the Menu button.
1-866-462-8837 in the United States and
Canada, or 800-557-5539 in Mexico. E328845
Note: If you find map data errors, you may 1. Press the Traffic on Map tile.
report them by going to
2. Press Traffic on or Traffic Off.
www.here.com/mapcreator.
SETTING A DESTINATION
SETTING A DESTINATION USING

THE TEXT ENTRY SCREEN
1. Press the search bar at the top of the
screen.
425
Navigation (If Equipped)
2. Enter your destination using the Press the button to begin

keyboard. E328844
navigation to the point of
3. Press Search. interest.
4. Select a destination from the list.
5. Press Start to begin navigation. WAYPOINTS
SETTING A DESTINATION USING ADDING A WAYPOINT

THE MAP SCREEN
Press the Add Waypoint button
Press and hold on the map to place a pin when in an active navigation
E328843
at that location. Information about the session.
location of the pin appears on the screen.
1. Select a category or enter your
Press the button to begin waypoint on the keyboard and press
E328844
navigation to the pin. Search.
2. Select a waypoint from the list.
SETTING A DESTINATION USING 3. Press Add to Trip.
A PREDICTIVE DESTINATION
EDITING WAYPOINTS
Press the predicted destination card on
the screen to navigate to it. These appear 1. Press the waypoint you would like to
when the navigation system has learned edit.
your driving habits.
2. Select an option to reorder or delete
the waypoint.
A RECENT DESTINATION
ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. Press the Recents tile.
2. Select a destination from the list. ADJUSTING THE GUIDANCE
PROMPT VOLUME
A SAVED DESTINATION Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
1. Press Saved Places.
2. Select a saved destination. CANCELING ROUTE GUIDANCE
Note: Press the star icon next when viewing Press the button to cancel route
location details to save the location. guidance to the selected
E280804
location.
A POINT OF INTEREST
Press a point of interest icon on the map.
Information about the location of the point
of interest appears on the screen.
426
Vehicle Software Updates
These software updates introduce new • The doors are open.

features or provide updates to vehicle • The parking lamps are switched on.
software systems. To receive updates, we
recommend you switch Automatic • You are pressing the brake pedal.
Updates on, set a recurring update • An emergency call is in process.
schedule and connect your vehicle to Wi-Fi. • Your vehicle is in limp home mode.
Updates could take longer when not
connected to Wi-Fi or could not download Vehicle Software Update
at all. See Connecting the Vehicle to a Limitations
Wi-Fi Network (page 383).
Once you begin a non-drivable software
Your vehicle may be able to receive update, you cannot:
drivable software updates, non-drivable
software updates or both. Drivable • Cancel the update.
software updates happen during normal • Enter your vehicle unless you have a
vehicle usage. If Automatic Updates is key blade.
switched on, updates happen without any • You can open the doors using the
input from you. If Automatic Updates is mechanical latch if child locks are
switched off, a software update icon not on.
displays on the touchscreen and customer
acceptance is required. • Use the remote control to lock, unlock
or start your vehicle.
Non-drivable software updates require you
to input a scheduled start time. You are • Drive your vehicle.
notified on your touchscreen and • Charge your vehicle.
connected device prior to a non-drivable • Charging resumes once the update
update. completes.
Most updates complete in less than 30
minutes, although some updates could SOFTWARE UPDATE
take up to a few hours.
SETTINGS
You are notified of the status of the
software updates on the top left part of To access the Software Updates menu:
the touchscreen and on your connected
device. See Software Update Indicators 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
(page 428). 2. Press Software Updates.
Vehicle Software Update You can do the following in the Software
Requirements Updates menu:
• Switch Automatic Updates on and off.
Non-drivable software updates do not
install if any of the following occur: • Schedule and install software updates.
• Your vehicle is running. • View software update details.
• Your vehicle is switched on. Press the button next to a menu
option for more information.
• Your vehicle is not parked. E366956
• The 12 V battery charge is too low.

• The hazard indicators are switched on.
• The alarm is sounding.
427
Vehicle Software Updates
Switching Automatic Updates On 1. Press Update Details.

and Off 2. Press Update Now.
Your vehicle may come with Automatic
Viewing Software Update Details
Updates switched on. Where Automatic
Updates is set to ‘On’ in your vehicle, you From the Software Updates menu:
agree that software updates may be
automatically delivered without any further 1. Press Update Details.
notice or additional consent from you.
Note: Software updates require approval SOFTWARE UPDATE
to download or install with Automatic INDICATORS
Updates switched off.
You can press the indicators in the status
Scheduling and Installing bar when they appear for more
Software Updates information.
Scheduling Software Updates Vehicle software update
reminder, schedule required,
From the Software Updates menu: E327787
confirmation of default schedule
1. Press Schedule Updates. required, or consent required.
2. Select the days and time for updates. Vehicle software update
3. Press Save. E327788
canceled, update not successful,
or precondition not met.
The more days that updates are
scheduled, the more frequently your Vehicle software update
vehicle installs new updates. We E353218 successful.
recommend selecting a time you normally
do not need your vehicle.
Note: The schedule you set is recurring. If
Automatic Updates is on, every time a
non-drivable update is available, it installs
on this schedule unless you change it. You
are notified on your touchscreen and
connected device prior to a non-drivable
update, with an option to reschedule it.
Installing Software Updates

Using the Status Bar
1. Press a Software Update indicator on
your touchscreen when it appears.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Using the Touchscreen
From the Software Updates menu:
428
Vehicle System Reset
PERFORMING A SYSTEM
RESET
Performing a system reset allows you to
remove all personal information and
restore settings to their factory defaults.
2. Press General.
3. Press Reset.
4. Press Factory Reset.
5. Follow the prompts on the screen to
complete the reset.
429
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep
that are available for your vehicle, please the following information in mind when
contact your authorized dealer or visit the adding accessories or equipment to your
online store web site: vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
Web Address (United States) passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
www.Accessories.Ford.com capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
Web Address (Canada) indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
www.Accessories.Ford.ca dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
We will repair or replace any properly Commission (FCC) and Canadian
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Radio Telecommunications
Accessory found to be defective in Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
factory-supplied materials or workmanship of mobile communications systems
during the warranty period, as well as any that are equipped with radio
component damaged by the defective transmitters, for example two-way
accessories. radios, telephones and theft alarms.
We will warrant your Ford Original Any such equipment installed in your
Accessory through the warranty that vehicle should comply with Federal
provides the greatest benefit: Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. Telecommunications Commission
• The remainder of your new vehicle (CRTC) regulations and should be
limited warranty. installed only by an authorized dealer.
Contact an authorized dealer for details • An authorized dealer needs to install
and a copy of the warranty. mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
Ford Licensed Accessories are the operation of your vehicle, particularly
accessory manufacturer's designs. The if the manufacturer did not design the
manufacturer develops and therefore mobile communication system
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and specifically for automotive use.
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford any non-Ford electrical or electronic
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited accessories or components to your
warranty details, and request a copy of the vehicle, you may adversely affect
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited battery performance and durability. In
warranty from the accessory manufacturer. addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
430
Ford Protect
WHAT IS FORD PROTECT That means you get:

• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Protect yourself from the rising cost of Lincoln dealership.
vehicle repairs with a Ford Protect • Repairs performed by factory trained
extended service plan. technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect Extended Service Rental Car Reimbursement
Plans - United States Only
First Day Rental Benefit
Ford Protect extended service plans mean
peace of mind. Extended service plans are If you bring your car into your dealer for
backed by Ford Motor Company, and service, we will give you a rental vehicle to
provide more protection beyond the New use for the day.
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, insist on the Ford Extended Rental Benefits
Protect extended service plan. If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
coverage, warranty repairs, and field
One trip to the service center could easily service actions.
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With the Ford Roadside Assistance
Protect extended service plan, you Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
minimize your risk for unexpected repair including:
bills and rising repair costs.
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle jump starts.
Components • Lock-out assistance.
There are four mechanical Ford Protect • Travel expense reimbursement for
extended service plans with different levels lodging, meals and rental car.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
details. coverage or other transportation.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over Transferable Coverage
1,000 covered components, this plan If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
is so complete it is probably easier to Protect extended service plan coverage
list what is not covered. expires, you can transfer any remaining
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, coverage to the new owner. This should
and includes many high-tech items. give you and your potential buyer peace of
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. mind.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
431
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your • Rental reimbursement.

Vehicle • Coverage for certain maintenance and
The Ford Protect extended service plan wear items.
also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan • Protection against repair costs after
that covers all scheduled maintenance, your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
and selected wear items. The coverage is Coverage expires.
prepaid, so you never have to worry about • Roadside Assistance benefits.
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
There are several Ford Protect extended
Covered maintenance includes: service plans available in various time,
• Windshield wiper blades. distance and deductible combinations.
• The clutch disc (if equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Brake pads and linings. and rental. When you purchase Ford
• Shock absorbers. Protect extended service plan, you receive
• Struts. added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
• Cabin air filter replacement every Mexico, provided by a network of
20,000 mi (32,000 km). participating authorized Ford Motor
Interest Free Finance Options Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
Just a 5% down payment provides you and the United States are not eligible for
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Ford Protect extended service plan
payment program allowing you all the coverage.
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while This information is subject to change. Visit
paying over time. You are pre-approved your local Ford of Canada dealer or
with no credit check or hassles. To learn www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect
more, call our Ford Protect extended extended service plan that is right for you.
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service

Plan (Canada Only)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
432
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
Carefully following the maintenance exceed our specifications. Parts installed
schedule helps protect against major repair at your dealership carry a nationwide
expenses resulting from neglect or 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
inadequate maintenance and may help to parts and labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes; Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to collision
scheduled maintenance performed and to repairs.
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
manual. See Capacities and or body shops. Please contact your dealer
Specifications (page 363). for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Protecting Your Investment
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance. Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your reliability, durability and resale value. To
Dealership? maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
Factory-Trained Technicians make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
Service technicians participate in extensive
intervals.
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
operation of your vehicle. Ask your oil-life monitor that determines oil life
dealership about the training and based on engine operating conditions.
certification their technicians have
received.
433
• Under normal operating conditions, a Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
message appears in the instrument with multiple, complex, performance
cluster display to indicate the regular systems. Every manufacturer develops
oil change interval. these systems using different
• Under severe operating conditions, the specifications and performance features.
oil change interval may reduce, and the That is why it is important to rely upon your
message interval may adjust. dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
High performance vehicles can be driven
in such a way that may lead to higher oil Ford Motor Company has recommended
consumption (this includes extended time maintenance intervals for various parts
at high engine speeds, high loads, engine and component systems based upon
braking, hard cornering maneuvers, and engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
track use). Under these conditions, oil relies upon this testing to determine the
consumption of approximately 1 quart per most appropriate mileage for replacement
500 miles (1 liter per 800 km) is possible. of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
As a result, the engine oil level needs to be the lowest overall cost to you and
checked at every refueling and adjusted to recommends against maintenance
maintain proper level to avoid engine schedules that deviate from the scheduled
damage. maintenance information.
Note: Oil level should not exceed the We strongly recommend the use of only
maximum mark on the indicator. See genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 299). Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
Your vehicle can be driven in such a way vehicle.
that dilutes and increases the level of oil
by short trips that do not allow the engine Additives and Chemicals
to get to operating temperature, extended
idling, and low speed driving for long This owner's manual and the Ford
periods of time. Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
When the oil change message appears in We do not recommend using chemicals or
the instrument cluster display, it is time for additives not approved by us as part of
an oil change. Make sure you perform the your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
oil change within two weeks or 500 mi consult your warranty information.
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Oils, Fluids and Flushing
Monitor after each oil change.
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
If your instrument cluster display resets normal operating characteristic and, by
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you itself, does not necessarily indicate a
should perform the oil change interval at concern or that the fluid needs to be
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from changed. However, a qualified expert, such
your last oil change. Never exceed one year as the factory-trained technicians at your
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
change intervals. that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
434
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and system or using a Ford-approved flushing
fluids at the specified intervals or in chemical.
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle Owner Checks and Services
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are Make sure you perform the following basic
flushed only with new fluid that is the same maintenance checks and inspections every
as that required to fill and operate the month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.

For severe use, high engine speed and engine loads, engine braking and track use, check
engine oil level every fuel fill-up.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires, including spare, for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps operation for brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
435
Multi-Point Inspection problems. We recommend having the

following multi-point inspection performed
In order to keep your vehicle running right, at every scheduled maintenance interval
it is important to have the systems on your to help make sure your vehicle keeps
vehicle checked regularly. This can help running great.
identify potential issues and prevent major
Multi-Point inspection
Accessory drive belts. Hazard warning system operation.

Battery performance. Horn operation.
Engine air filter. Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses.
Exhaust system. Suspension components for leaks or
damage.
Exterior lamps operation. Steering and linkage.
1 Tires, including spare, for wear and proper
Fluid levels; fill if necessary. 2
pressure.
For oil and fluid leaks. Windshield for cracks, chips or pits.
Half-shaft dust boots. Washer spray and wiper operation.
1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2 If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point NORMAL SCHEDULED
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive MAINTENANCE
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle. Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
436
This means you do not have to remember The following table provides examples of
to change the oil on a mileage-based vehicle use and its impact on oil change
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
an oil change is due by displaying a change intervals depend on several factors
message in the information display. and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Normal
7,000–10,000 mi Normal commuting with highway driving.

(11,000–16,000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
Moderate to heavy load or towing.
5,000–7,500 mi Mountainous or off-road conditions.
(8,000–12,000 km) Extended idling.
Extended hot or cold operation.
High engine speeds and loads, engine braking and hard
cornering.
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(4,800–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.
Normal Maintenance Intervals
1
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
2
Change the engine oil and filter.
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level if your vehicle has a dipstick. Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
437
1
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate if your vehicle has grease fittings.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
1
Brake Fluid Maintenance
Every three Years 2

Change the brake fluid.
1 Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
1
Other Maintenance Items
Every 20,000 mi Replace the cabin air filter.

(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine air filter.
(48,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km) 2
Inspect the accessory drive belts.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Every 150,000 mi
Change the manual transmission fluid.
(240,000 km)
Replace the accessory drive belts.
438
1
Other Maintenance Items
Change the rear axle fluid.

At 200,000 mi 3
Change the engine coolant.
(320,000 km)
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3 Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
In addition to the recommendations below,

Track Use Maintenance Intervals we recommend following the procedures
previously outlined in the Normal
Follow these maintenance intervals for Maintenance Intervals section to help keep
when you use your vehicle on a track or in your vehicle running right, to identify
a high-speed event. potential issues, and to prevent major
problems.
One track weekend or approximately

Change the engine oil and filter.
four hours of track use
Every 500 mi (800 km) Change the rear axle fluid.

1
1 Change the fluid every 500 mi (800 km) or when a message appears in the information
display stating that the axle fluid is overtemperature.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
439
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the instrument

cluster display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Inspect rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with
as required grease fittings.
See axle maintenance items under, Exceptions.
Every 60,000 mi Change manual transmission fluid.
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Short Trips that do not allow the engine to get to operating temperature causing fuel
dilution and an increase of the engine oil level
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the instrument

cluster display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.
as required
Every 15,000 mi Inspect engine air filter. Replace as required.
(24,000 km)
Every 60,000 mi Replace spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.

as required
Every 15,000 mi Inspect engine air filter. Replace as required.
(24,000 km)
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
440
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1

or six months
Every 50,000 mi Change manual transmission fluid.
(80,000 km)
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exclusive Use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full of regular
unleaded fuel.
California Fuel Filter Replacement

Exceptions
If you register your vehicle in California, the
There are several exceptions to the Normal California Air Resources Board has
Schedule: determined that the failure to perform this
Axle Maintenance maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is before the completion of your vehicle's
submerged in water. useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
If you receive an axle overtemperature
maintenance services performed at the
warning message in the instrument cluster
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
display and a wrench warning indicator
service.
appears, you should change the rear axle
fluid at the next convenient time. The Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
wrench warning indicator turns off when
you switch off your vehicle. Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
Timing Chain locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
If you use your vehicle extensively at a
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
racetrack or at high rpm, it is possible to
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
exceed the service life of the engine timing
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
chain. A wrench indicator light will
illuminate when it is time for you to replace If the available API SM or SN oils are not
your chain. See an authorized dealer. available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
441
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter

Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
442
THE BETTER BUSINESS try to resolve them. A Customer Claim

Form will be mailed that needs to be
BUREAU AUTO LINE completed, signed and returned to the BBB
PROGRAM along with proof of ownership. Upon
receipt, the BBB reviews the claim for
Your satisfaction is important to Ford eligibility under the Program Summary
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a Guidelines.
warranty concern has not been resolved You can get more information by
using the three-step procedure outlined calling BBB AUTO LINE at
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB
LINE program. National Programs, Inc.
1676 International Drive, Suite 550
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of McLean, VA 22102
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement Company Customer Relationship Center
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached at 1-800-392-3673.
during mediation or you do not want to For additional information, refer to the
participate in mediation, and if your claim Better Business Bureau website.
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
will be scheduled so that you can present right to change eligibility limitations, modify
your case in an informal setting before an procedures, or to discontinue this process
impartial person. The arbitrator considers at any time without notice and without
the testimony provided and makes a obligation.
decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE THE MEDIATION AND
program are usually decided within 40 ARBITRATION PROGRAM
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and For vehicles delivered to authorized
may reject the decision and proceed to Canadian dealers. In those cases where
court where all findings of the BBB Auto you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible of Canada and the authorized dealer to
in the court action. Should you choose to resolve a factory-related vehicle service
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
is then bound by the decision, and must Canada participates in an impartial third
comply with the decision within 30 days party mediation/arbitration program
of receipt of your acceptance letter. administered by the Canadian Motor
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
information that follows, call or write to
request a program application. You will be
asked for your name and address, general
information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to
443
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to IN THE UNITED STATES
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is If you believe that your vehicle has
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy a defect which could cause a
and expensive legal proceedings. crash or could cause injury or
In the CAMVAP program, impartial death, you should immediately
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at inform the National Highway
mutually convenient times and places in Traffic Safety Administration
an informal environment. These impartial (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
arbitrators review the positions of the Ford Motor Company.
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve If NHTSA receives similar
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, complaints, it may open an
and final as the arbitrator’s award is investigation, and if it finds that a
binding on both you and Ford of Canada. safety defect exists in a group of
CAMVAP services are available in all vehicles, it may order a recall and
Canadian territories and provinces. For remedy campaign. However,
more information, without charge or NHTSA cannot become involved
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
in individual problems between
or visit www.camvap.ca. you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
ORDERING A CANADIAN To contact NHTSA, you may call
FRENCH OWNER'S MANUAL the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
You can obtain a French owner's manual 1-800-424-9153); go to
from an authorized dealer or by contacting www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Helm, LLC at:
Administrator
HELM, LLC
47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Southeast
Attention: Customer Service
Washington, D.C. 20590
Call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
For additional information, visit safety from www.safercar.gov.
www.helminc.com.
444
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately
IN CANADA inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website http://tc.canada.ca/recalls
(English)
Website http://tc.canada.ca/rappels
(French)
Phone 1-800-333-0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1-800-565-3673
445
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Ukraine

COPYRIGHT
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Your vehicle could have components that
use open source software. For additional
information, visit http://
corporate.ford.com/ford-open-source.html.
RADIO FREQUENCY
CERTIFICATION LABELS
E269682
ANTENNAS
United Kingdom
European Union EU
E362840
E310043
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS
Device Supplier Type Designation
SRR5 BLIS Corner Radar Aptiv 2F5TR

(RRU2)
446
Argentina Ghana
NCA APPROVED: 7E6-M0-XDF-TME
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by

Jamaica: SMA - 2F5TR.
Paraguay
E380327
H-28070
Europe Union EU
E339812
NR: 2022-04-I-0255
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA REGISTERED No:

E310043
ER10085/22
DEALER No:
DA37380/15
447
United Kingdom BLIND SPOT INFORMATION

SYSTEM SENSORS
Argentina
E362840
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved E338548
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate Brazil
that Industry Canada technical
FCC ID: L2C2F5TR

IC: 3432A-2F5TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science E387284
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: Djibouti
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
E367134
448
Europe Union EU Mauritania
E310043
E367135
Ghana Mexico
IFETEL: RCPAPF520-0480
Morocco
E344037
Jamaica
E368150
E344038
449
Paraguay South Korea
E338319 R-C-1Ap-F5TR
Taiwan
E339812
2020-10-I-0753
Singapore
E356894
Thailand
E339940
South Africa
E392562
E369016
450
Ukraine United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
could void the user's authority to operate
FCC ID: L2CF5TR

E269682
IC: 3432A-F5TR
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
subject to the following two conditions:
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E344039
United Kingdom
E278262
E362840
451
BODY CONTROL MODULE Jamaica

Argentina
E340500
E338547 Moldova
Brazil
E337971
E340499 Morocco
Ghana
E340501
E341433
452
Paraguay South Africa
E339812 E340510
2019-01-I-000076 Ukraine
Serbia
E269682
E341434
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)

Singapore TRA REGISTERED No: ER68566/19
DEALER No: DA37380/15
United Kingdom
E339940 E362840
453
United States and Canada Zambia
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336

E340511
IC: 7812A-A2C766336
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science CRUISE CONTROL MODULE
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is Argentina
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E338549
Brazil
E278262
E388865
454
Djibouti Ghana
E356903 E344040
EAC Marking - Russia, Belarus, Independent State Of Samoa

Kazakhstan
E253816
Europe Union EU
E365127
Israel
E310043
E388866
455
Jamaica Mexico
IFT: RCPAPF320-0479
Moldova
E344041
E337971
Malaysia
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numéro d'agrément:
MR00030034ANRT2021
Date d'agrément: 16/09/2021
Pakistan
E339836
HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E359721
E356900
456
Paraguay Singapore
E339812 E339940
NR: 2020-10-I-0752 South Africa

Sierra Leone
E388867
South Korea
E382724
TAN: 2021-002-0028
E339675
R-C-1Ap-F3TR
457
Taiwan Unites Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E356901 E344042
Thailand United Kingdom
E362840
E392562
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2CF3TR

E269682 IC: 3432A-F3TR
458
This device complies with Part 15 of the This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and interference, and
2. This device must accept any 2. This device must accept any
interference received, including interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired interference that may cause undesired
operation. operation.
Zambia
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS
Argentina
E356902
GARAGE DOOR OPENER E340316
WARNING: Changes or
E340119
FCC ID: NZLSAHL5E
IC: 4112A-SAHL5E
459
Djibouti
E342143
E343017
Brazil
E340306
Ghana
E372151
E340317
E340120
E340307
Jamaica
E340318
460
Mauritania
E340308
E340487
E340215
Malaysia
E340310
Moldova
E339836
F17000176 E337971
461
Morocco Paraguay
E343018 E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
Serbia
E340311
Pakistan
E269681
E337974
462
Singapore South Korea
E339940 E339675
South Africa MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
Taiwan
E343025
E340216
TA-2016/2012
E340313
E340217
463
WARNING: Changes or

E269682 FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E340486
E278262
E340314
464
Zambia China
CMIIT ID: 2016DJ0249
Djibouti
E343026
E272192
E340315
RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE

E343015
Argentina
Ghana
E341732
E341741
465
Indonesia Mauritania
E341733
Jamaica
E341735
E341734
E340528
E272193
Moldova
E340651
E337971
466
Morocco Paraguay
E341736 E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-00244
Serbia
E343016
Pakistan
E269681
South Africa
E339843
E341737
467
South Korea
E340650
E339675 Ukraine
KCC-REM-DDG-FO3
Syria
E341738 E269682
Taiwan United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E341739
E341130
468
Zambia
E340529
E341740
SYNC
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved Argentina
FCC ID: LTQFO3AM315RX

FCC ID: L2C0062TR
IC: 3659A-FO3AM315RX
IC: 3659A-FO4AM902TRX
E338546
interference, and
operation.
E338545
469
Brazil
E342511
E342398
European Union EU
E310043
E342510
Ghana
Djibouti
E338082
E342399
E338203
470
Indonesia
E342512
E380500 Malaysia
E339836
E384585
SQASI/TA/19/4047
Jamaica
SQASI/TA/19/4046
Mauritania
E342400
E342401
471
E342513 E338205
Moldova Pakistan
E337971
2019
Morocco
E342402
Paraguay
E338085
E339812
2020-03-I-00192
2020-03-I-00193
472
Serbia
E342514
E342403
South Korea
Singapore
E338087
E338206
E339940 Taiwan
South Africa
TA-2019/2465
E342405
E342404
473
E342515 E361931
Ukraine United Kingdom
E362840

E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) WARNING: Changes or

FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4

FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4L
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4
E338088 IC: 1422A-SYNCG4L
474
This device complies with Part 15 of the TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT

and Economic Development Canada’s Argentina
interference, and
operation.
Zambia
E380327
C-28150
Brazil
E342406
E365116
Europe Union EU
E342516
E310043
475
Mexico United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E364908 E340527
South Africa United Kingdom
E362840

E363451
WARNING: Changes or
Taiwan modifications not expressively approved
FCC ID: KMH-14H074-NA1

E394624 IC: 1422A-14H074NA1
We recommend that the distance between

the antenna of the telematics control unit
and the user be greater than 14 in (35 cm)
when using the telematics control unit.
476
This device complies with Part 15 of the Brazil

interference, and
interference that may cause undesired E375123
operation.
Vietnam 18962-22-08001
China
E278262
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING E342218

SYSTEM SENSORS
Democratic Republic of Congo
Argentina
Agréé par l'ARPTC
N° d'homologation: HIR -0051/4/2014
Date d'homologation: 16/4/2014
E342217
477
Djibouti European Union (EU)
E310043
E367106
The RED 2014/53/EU (replacing R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC on 13 June 2016) explicitly
states that instructions for intentional radiators include reference to "(a) frequency
band(s) in which the radio equipment operates; and (b) maximum radio-frequency
power transmitted in the frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates,"
in addition to carrying over the general operational instruction and Declaration of
Conformity inclusion requirements from the R&TTE Directive.
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type AG2SZ4 is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity
is available at the following internet address:
http://www.tpmseuroshop.com/documents/declaration_conformities
f=433.92MHz
P<10mW (e.i.r.p)
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern
Ireland United Kingdom.
478
Ghana Malaysia
E342220 E339836
Independent State of Samoa HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E365127
E342221
Israel
Mexico
IFT: RLVSCMR15-1238
Moldova
E382726
Jamaica
Jamaica: SMA - AG2SZ4
E337971
479
Morocco Paraguay
E207821
Nigeria
E339812
NR: 2017-06-I-0000175
Pakistan
E337972
Oman
E342392
Russia
E253817
E253816
480
Sierra Leone Singapore
Complies with IMDA Standards

DA 00461
South Africa
E382724
TAN: 2017-002-0035
E198002
Serbia
South Korea
E342403
E339675
MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG2SZ4
481
Taiwan United Arab Emirates
TRA REGISTERED No:

ER80634/20
DEALER No:
DA83047/19
United Kingdom
E203679
Thailand
E362840
WARNING: Changes or
E392562 modifications not expressively approved
Ukraine could void the user's authority to operate
FCC ID: MRXAG2SZ4

IC: 2546A-AG2SZ4
E269682
interference, and
operation.
482
Vietnam TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM SENSORS
Argentina
E364765
Zambia E380327
CNC ID: H-28035
Brazil
E365151
E375123
483
13309-22-08001
European Union EU
E310043
The RED 2014/53/EU (replacing R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC on 13 June 2016) explicitly
states that instructions for intentional radiators include reference to "(a) frequency
band(s) in which the radio equipment operates; and (b) maximum radio-frequency
power transmitted in the frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates,"
in addition to carrying over the general operational instruction and Declaration of
Conformity inclusion requirements from the R&TTE Directive.
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type BG2BP4 is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity
is available at the following internet address:
http://www.tpmseuroshop.com/documents/declaration_conformities
f=433.92MHz
P<10mW (e.i.r.p)
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern
Ireland United Kingdom.
Israel Jamaica
Jamaica: SMA - BG2BP4.
E396859
484
Malaysia Paraguay
E339836 E339812
HIDF16000009
NR: 2022-05-I-0000331
Mexico
Serbia
IFT: RLVSCBG22-2502
Moldova
E337971 E392454
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numéro d'agrément:
MR00034968ANRT2022
Date d'agrément: 21/12/2022
485
Singapore Thailand
Complies with IMDA Standards

DA 00461
South Africa
E392562
Ukraine
E396860
South Korea
E269682
Unites Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA REGISTERED No:

ER10488/22
DEALER No:
E339675 DA37380/15
MSIP-R-C-SRD-BG2BP4
Taiwan
CCAB22LP0730T0
E373549
486
United Kingdom WIRELESS ACCESSORY

CHARGING MODULE
Argentina
E362840
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved E368925
FCC ID: MRXBG2BP4

IC: 2546A-BG2BP4
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is E368926

interference, and
operation.
E368927
487
Brazil Ghana
E367123 E364756
Democratic Republic of Congo Indonesia
E370174
European Union
E375961
E310043
E375962
488
Jamaica
E364757
E375963
Malaysia
Israel
E370175
E269697
RGEZ/35A/0521/S(21-2033)
RGEZ/35A/0521/S(21-2032)
RGEZ/35A/0521/S(21-2031)
Mauritania
E387620
E387621
E364761
489
Morocco
E364762
E364758
E364763
E364759
Moldova
E337971
E364760
490
Paraguay Sierra Leone
E339812
E371606
NR: 2021-04-I-0202 Singapore

NR: 2021-04-I-0203
NR: 2021-04-I-0204
Russia
E253816
E339940
Serbia
South Africa
E364764
E364768
491
South Korea
E364770
E339675
R-R-LGE-WCFDM00N2A1
Taiwan
E364771
E364769
E390486
492
Ukraine United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA REGISTERED No:

ER98638/21
DEALER No:
DA37380/15
TRA REGISTERED No:

ER00421/21
E269682 DEALER No:
DA37380/15
United Kingdom
TRA REGISTERED No:

ER00422/21
DEALER No:
DA37380/15
E362840
FCC ID: BEJWCFDM00N2A
IC: 2703H-WCFDM00N2A
493
E357468
Zambia REPLACEMENT PARTS

RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
E364773 packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs
PERCHLORATE
One of the best ways for you to make sure
Certain components in your vehicle such that your vehicle provides years of service
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners is to have it maintained in line with our
and remote control batteries may contain recommendations using parts that
perchlorate material. Special handling conform to the specifications detailed in
may apply for service or vehicle end of life this Owner’s Manual.
disposal. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
For more information visit: or exceed these specifications.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
494
Collision Repairs Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
We hope that you never experience a conduct of business and personal affairs.
collision, but accidents happen sometimes. However, you must not compromise your
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts own or others’ safety when using such
meet our stringent requirements for fit, equipment. Mobile communications can
finish, structural integrity, corrosion enhance personal safety and security when
protection and dent resistance. During appropriately used, particularly in
vehicle development we validate that emergency situations. Safety must be
these parts deliver the intended level of paramount when using mobile
protection as a whole system. A great way communications equipment to avoid
to know for sure you are getting this level negating these benefits. Mobile
of protection is to use genuine Ford communication equipment includes, but
replacement collision parts. is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
Warranty on Replacement Parts devices and portable two-way radios.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that FEDERAL HIGHWAY
benefit from a Ford Warranty. ADMINISTRATION
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage REGULATION
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. Regulations such as those issued by the
For additional information, refer to the Federal Highway Administration or issued
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. pursuant to the Occupational Safety and
Health Act (OSHA), and state and local
laws and regulations may require
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS additional equipment for the way you
EQUIPMENT intend to use your vehicle. It is the
responsibility of the registered owner to
determine the applicability of such laws
and regulations to your intended use for
WARNING: Driving while distracted the vehicle, and to arrange for the
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash installation of required equipment. The
and injury. We strongly recommend that dealer has information about the
you use extreme caution when using any availability of equipment which can be
device that may take your focus off the ordered for your vehicle.
495
END USER LICENSE Description of Other Rights and

Limitations.
AGREEMENT
• Speech Recognition: If the
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER SOFTWARE includes speech
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) an inherently statistical process and
have acquired a vehicle having several that recognition errors are inherent in
devices, including SYNC ® and various the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
control modules, ("DEVICES") that COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
include software licensed or owned by liable for any damages arising out of
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates errors in the speech recognition
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those process. It is your responsibility to
software products of FORD MOTOR monitor any speech recognition
COMPANY origin, as well as associated functions included in the system.
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
("SOFTWARE") are protected by Decompilation and Disassembly:
international intellectual property laws You may not reverse engineer,
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is decompile, translate, disassemble or
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• The SOFTWARE may interface with SOFTWARE nor permit others to
and/or communicate with, or may be reverse engineer, decompile or
later upgraded to interface with and/or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
communicate with additional software and only to the extent that such activity
and/or systems provided by FORD is expressly permitted by applicable
MOTOR COMPANY. law notwithstanding this limitation or
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END to the extent as may be permitted by
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") the licensing terms governing use of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY any open source components included
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT • Limitations on Distributing,
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, Copying, Modifying and Creating
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT Derivative Works: You may not
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF distribute, copy, make modifications
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). to or create derivative works based on
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
EULA grants you the following license: extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
• You may use the SOFTWARE as notwithstanding this limitation or to
installed on the DEVICES and as the extent as may be permitted by the
otherwise interfacing with systems licensing terms governing use of any
and/or services provide by or through open source components included with
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third the SOFTWARE.
party software and service providers.
496
• Single EULA: The end user • Additional Software/Services: The

documentation for the DEVICES and SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
related systems and services may COMPANY, third party software and
contain multiple EULAs, such as service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
multiple translations and/or multiple its designated agent to provide or make
media versions (e.g., in the user available to you SOFTWARE updates,
documentation and in the software). supplements, add-on components, or
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you Internet-based services components
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of of the SOFTWARE after the date you
the SOFTWARE. obtain your initial copy of the
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
permanently transfer your rights under Components".) SOFTWARE updates
this EULA only as part of a sale or may cause you to incur additional
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you charges from your wireless service
retain no copies, you transfer all of the provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
SOFTWARE (including all component or third party software and services
parts, the media and printed materials, suppliers provide or make available to
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the you Supplemental Components and
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the no other EULA terms are provided
recipient agrees to the terms of this along with the Supplemental
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, Components, then the terms of this
any transfer must include all prior EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
versions of the SOFTWARE. COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any discontinue without liability any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY Internet-based services provided to
may terminate this EULA if you fail to you or made available to you through
comply with the terms and conditions the use of the SOFTWARE.
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
497
• Links to Third Party Sites: The INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites. The and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
third party sites are not under the limited to any images, photographs,
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, animations, video, audio, music, text and
its affiliates and/or its designated "applets" incorporated into the
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its materials, and any copies of the
designated agent are responsible for SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
(I) the contents of any third party sites, COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates rights to use such content outside its
and/or its designated agent. intended use. All rights not specifically
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: granted under this EULA are reserved by
You recognize your obligation to drive FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
responsibly and keep attention on the and third party software and service
road. You will read and abide with the providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
DEVICES operating instructions services which may be accessed through
particularly as they pertain to safety the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
and you agree to assume any risk respective terms of use relating to such
associated with the use of the services. If this SOFTWARE contains
DEVICES. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or subject to U.S. and European Union export
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments.
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
498
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant General Operation

you any rights in connection with any • Voice Command Control: Certain
trademarks or service marks of FORD functions within the SYNC® system
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third may be accomplished using voice
party software and service providers. commands. Using voice commands
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to while driving helps you to operate the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions system without removing your hands
provided in the documentation for the from the wheel or eyes from the road.
DEVICES product support, such as the • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
vehicle owner guide. access any function requiring a
Should you have any questions concerning prolonged view of the screen while you
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, manner before attempting to access a
please refer to the address provided in the function of the system requiring
documentation for the DEVICES. prolonged attention.
No Liability for Certain Damages: • Volume Setting: Do not raise the
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD volume excessively. Keep the volume
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY at a level where you can still hear
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, outside traffic and emergency signals
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO while driving. Driving while unable to
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, hear these sounds could cause an
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL accident.
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN • Navigation Features: Any navigation
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR features included in the system are
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS intended to provide turn by turn
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY instructions to get you to a desired
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL destination. Please make certain all
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES persons using this system carefully
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE read and follow instructions and safety
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW information fully.
VEHICLE. • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
Information Read and follow perform such set-up or insert data
instructions: while driving can distract your attention
• Before using your SYNC® system, read and could cause an accident or other
and follow all instructions and safety serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
information provided in this end user and legal manner before attempting
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not these operations.
following precautions found in the • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
Owner Guide can lead to an accident navigation features are provided only
or other serious injuries. as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
499
substitute for your personal judgment. Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of

Any route suggestions made by this Risk
system should never replace any local • You agree to each of the following:(a)
traffic regulations or your personal Any use of the SOFTWARE while
judgment or knowledge of safe driving driving an automobile or other vehicle
practices. in violation of applicable law or
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
suggestions if doing so would result in presents a significant risk of distracted
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you driving and should not be attempted
would be placed in an unsafe situation, under any circumstances;(b) Use of
or if you would be directed into an area the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
that you consider unsafe. The driver is poses a significant risk of hearing
ultimately responsible for the safe damage and should not be attempted
operation of the vehicle and therefore, under any circumstances;(c) The
must evaluate whether it is safe to SOFTWARE may not be compatible
follow the suggested directions. with new or different versions of an
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps operating system, third party software,
used by this system may be inaccurate or third party services, and the
because of changes in roads, traffic SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
controls or driving conditions. Always critical failure of an operating system,
use good judgment and common sense third party software, or third party
when following the suggested routes. service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
any navigation features included in the charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
system to route you to emergency may not work correctly, on an
services. Ask local authorities or an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
emergency services operator for these may change streaming formats or
locations. Not all emergency services discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
such as police, fire stations, hospitals adult, profane or offensive content; and
and clinics are likely to be contained in (v) may contain inaccurate, false or
the map database for such navigation misleading traffic, weather, financial
features. or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
500
Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF • The laws of the State of Michigan
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY govern this EULA and Your use of the
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN SOFTWARE. Your use of the
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, SOFTWARE may also be subject to
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND other local, state, national, or
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY international laws. Any litigation arising
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES out of or related to this EULA shall be
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST brought and maintained exclusively in
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT a court of the State of Michigan
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY located in Wayne County or in the
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, United States District Court for the
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES consent to submit to the personal
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) jurisdiction of a court in the State of
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE Michigan located in Wayne County and
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, the United States District Court for the
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE Eastern District of Michigan for any
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) dispute arising out of or relating to this
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, EULA.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
501
Binding Arbitration and Class Action the right to litigate (or participate in as a
Waiver party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
(a) Application. This Section applies to will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT whose decision will be final except for a
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO limited right of appeal under the Federal
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, over the parties may enforce the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF arbitrator’s award.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
controversy between You and FORD forum will be conducted solely on an
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
exceptions listed above, concerning the MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this dispute heard as a class action, as a private
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, attorney general action, or in any other
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other proceeding in which any party acts or
legal or equitable basis. proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a be combined with another without the
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY prior written consent of all parties to all
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, affected arbitrations or proceedings.
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the (f) Arbitration procedure. Any
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the arbitration will be conducted by the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and American Arbitration Association (the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
resolve any dispute through informal Rules. If You are an individual and use the
negotiation within 60 days from the date SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may less whether or not You are an individual
commence arbitration. or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
(c) Small claims court. You may also Consumer-Related Disputes will also
litigate any dispute in small claims court apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
in your county of residence or FORD Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
business, if the dispute meets all request a telephonic or in-person hearing
requirements to be heard in the small by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
claims court. You may litigate in small involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
claims court whether or not You be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
negotiated informally first. good cause to hold an in-person hearing
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD instead. For more information, see adr.org
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
dispute by informal negotiation or in small commence arbitration only in your county
claims court, any other effort to resolve of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
the dispute will be conducted exclusively principal place of business. The arbitrator
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
502
may award the same damages to you filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
individually as a court could. The arbitrator expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
may award declaratory or injunctive relief fees or expenses from you in any
only to you individually, and only to the arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
extent required to satisfy your individual counted in determining how much a
claim. dispute involves.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives. (h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
by law, any claim or dispute under this
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
EULA to which this Section applies must
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
be filed within one year in small claims
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
d). The one-year period begins when the
COMPANY’S last written settlement
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
offer made before the arbitrator was
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
appointed (“last written offer”), your
year, it is permanently barred.
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an (I) Severability. If the class action waiver
“award”), and the arbitrator awards (Section e) is found to be illegal or
you more than the last written offer, unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you dispute, then that portion of Section e will
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of not apply to those parts. Instead, those
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your parts will be severed and proceed in a court
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
(3) reimburse any expenses (including in arbitration. If any other provision of that
expert witness fees and costs) that portion Section e is found to be illegal or
your attorney reasonably accrues for unenforceable, that provision will be
investigating, preparing, and pursuing severed with the remainder of Section e
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator remaining in full force and effect.
will determine the amounts.
Telenav Software End User License
• ii. Disputes involving more than
Agreement
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s Please read these terms and conditions
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. carefully before you use the TeleNav
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In Software. Your use of the TeleNav
any arbitration you commence, FORD Software indicates that you accept these
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA terms and conditions. If you do not accept
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or these terms and conditions, do not break
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the the seal of the package, launch, or
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
or brought for an improper purpose. In TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
any arbitration FORD MOTOR the privacy policy at any time, with or
COMPANY commences, it will pay all without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
503
1. Safe and Lawful Use 2. Account Information

You acknowledge that devoting attention You agree: (a) when registering the
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
of injury or death to you and others in true, accurate, current, and complete
situations that otherwise require your information about yourself, and (b) to
undivided attention, and you therefore inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
agree to comply with the following when to such information, and to keep it true,
using the TeleNav Software: accurate, current and complete.
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise 3. Software License
drive safely;
• Subject to your compliance with the
(b) use your own personal judgment while terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
driving. If you feel that a route suggested hereby grants to you a personal,
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to non-exclusive, non-transferable license
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, (except as expressly permitted below
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs in connection with your permanent
you into an area that you consider to be transfer of the TeleNav Software
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; license), without the right to
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise sublicense, to use the TeleNav
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless Software (in object code form only) in
your vehicle is stationary and parked; order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
use the TeleNav Software only for your
or in any manner inconsistent with this
personal business or leisure purposes,
Agreement;
and not to provide commercial
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices navigation services to other parties.
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in 3.1 License Limitations
your vehicle so that they will not interfere • (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
with your driving and will not prevent the disassemble, translate, modify, alter
operation of any safety device (such as an or otherwise change the TeleNav
airbag). Software or any part thereof; (b)
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav attempt to derive the source code,
harmless against all claims resulting from audio library or structure of the
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate TeleNav Software without the prior
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving express written consent of TeleNav;
vehicle, including as a result of your failure (c) remove from the TeleNav
to comply with the directions above. Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
504
distribute, sublicense or otherwise is dependent on the accuracy of

transfer the TeleNav Software to navigation, as the maps or functionality
others, except as part of your of the TeleNav Software are not
permanent transfer of the TeleNav intended to support such high risk
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav applications, especially in more remote
Software in any manner that geographical areas.
I. infringes the intellectual property or • TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
privacy or other rights of any party, CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
regulation, including but not limited to laws WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
and regulations related to spamming, FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
privacy, consumer and child protection, OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
obscenity or defamation, or LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
obscene, libelous, or otherwise PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
otherwise permit unauthorized access by RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
third parties to the TeleNav Software SOFTWARE.
without advanced written permission of • Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
TeleNav. disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible 5. Limitation of Liability
pursuant to applicable law, in no event • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
or agents or employees of any of the CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
foregoing, be liable for any decision OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
made or action taken by you or anyone BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
else in reliance on the information PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
provided by the TeleNav Software. INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
TeleNav also does not warrant the SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
accuracy of the map or other data used (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
for the TeleNav Software. Such data LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
may not always reflect reality due to, INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
among other things, road closures, OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
construction, weather, new roads and LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
other changing conditions. You are PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
responsible for the entire risk arising OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
out of your use of the TeleNav USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
Software. For example but without TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
limitation, you agree not to rely on the TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
TeleNav Software for critical POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
navigation in areas where the NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
well-being or survival of you or others THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
505
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, to the exclusive jurisdiction of the

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES courts of the County of Santa Clara,
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL California. The United Nations
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN Convention on Contracts for the
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING International Sale of Goods shall not
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE apply.
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS 7. Assignment
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT • You may not resell, assign, or transfer
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE this Agreement or any of your rights or
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES obligations, except in totality, in
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT connection with your permanent
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR expressly conditioned upon the new
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS to be bound by the terms and
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. conditions of this Agreement. Any such
6. Arbitration and Governing Law sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
• You agree that any dispute, claim or paragraph will result in immediate
controversy arising out of or relating to termination of this Agreement, without
this Agreement or the TeleNav liability to TeleNav, in which case you
Software shall be settled by and all other parties shall immediately
independent arbitration involving a cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
neutral arbitrator and administered by Notwithstanding the foregoing,
the American Arbitration Association TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
in the County of Santa Clara, California. any other party at any time without
The arbitrator shall apply the notice, provided the assignee remains
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the bound by this Agreement.
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered 8. Miscellaneous
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
8.1
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration This Agreement constitutes the entire
proceeding and the decision of the agreement between TeleNav and you with
arbitrator shall be binding upon both respect to the subject matter hereof.
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement 8.2
and performance hereunder will be Except for the limited licenses expressly
governed by and construed in granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
accordance with the laws of the State all right, title and interest in and to the
of California, without giving effect to TeleNav Software, including without
its conflict of law provisions. To the limitation all related intellectual property
extent judicial action is necessary in rights. No licenses or other rights which are
connection with the binding arbitration, not expressly granted in this Agreement
both TeleNav and you agree to submit are intended to, or shall be, granted or
506
conferred by implication, statute, 8.6

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
The headings in this Agreement are for
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
convenience of reference only, will not be
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
other than the licenses explicitly granted
and will not be referred to in connection
in this Agreement.
with the construction or interpretation of
8.3 this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
By using the TeleNav Software, you variations thereof, will not be deemed to
consent to receive from TeleNav all be terms of limitation, but rather will be
communications, including notices, deemed to be followed by the words
agreements, legally required disclosures "without limitation".
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
other data licensed to Telenav by third
Website or by downloading such Notices
party vendors for the benefit of you and
to your wireless device. If you desire to
other end users. This Agreement
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
includes end-user terms applicable to
electronically, you must discontinue your
these companies (included at the end
use of the TeleNav Software.
of this Agreement), and thus your use
8.4 of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
TeleNav's or your failure to require with the following additional terms and
performance of any provision shall not conditions, which are applicable to
affect that party's right to require Telenav’s third party vendor licensors.
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any North America, LLC
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself. The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
8.5 resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
If any provision herein is held conditions which are agreed to by you, on
unenforceable, then such provision will be the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
modified to reflect the intention of the its licensors (including their licensors and
parties, and the remaining provisions of suppliers) on the other hand.
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
507
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from Restrictions. Except where you have been
the United States Postal Service® to specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
publish and sell ZIP+4® information. and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
with any products, systems, or applications
Prices are not established, controlled or
installed or otherwise connected to or in
approved by the United States Postal
communication with vehicles, capable of
Service®. The following trademarks and
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
registrations are owned by the USPS:
real time route guidance, fleet
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
management or similar applications; or (b)
ZIP+4
with or in communication with any
The Data for Mexico includes certain data positioning devices or any mobile or
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y wireless-connected electronic or computer
Geografía. devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 computers, pagers, and personal digital
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd assistants or PDAs.
The data (“Data”) is provided for your Warning. The Data may contain
personal, internal use only and not for inaccurate or incomplete information due
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is to the passage of time, changing
subject to the following terms and circumstances, sources used and the
conditions which are agreed to by you, on nature of collecting comprehensive
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., geographic data, any of which may lead to
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including incorrect results.
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
Terms and Conditions risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data guarantees, representations or warranties
together with the Telenav Software solely of any kind, express or implied, arising by
for the internal business and personal law or otherwise, including but not limited
purposes for which you were licensed, and to, content, quality, accuracy,
not for service bureau, time-sharing or completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
subject to the restrictions set forth in the use or results to be obtained from this
following paragraphs, you agree not to Data, or that the Data or server will be
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, uninterrupted or error-free.
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
portion of this Data, and may not transfer ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
except to the extent permitted by ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
mandatory laws. OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
508
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, HERE from complying with any of its
Territories and Countries do not allow obligations hereunder to deliver or
certain warranty exclusions, so to that distribute Data, such failure shall be
extent the above exclusion may not apply excused and shall not constitute a breach
to you. of this Agreement.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND Entire Agreement. These terms and
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR conditions constitute the entire agreement
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT between Telenav (and its licensors,
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY including their licensors and suppliers) and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE and supersedes in their entirety any and
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR all written or oral agreements previously
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR existing between us with respect to such
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR Governing Law. The above terms and
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR conditions shall be governed by the laws
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY where European HERE Data is used],
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Convention for Contracts for the
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, International Sale of Goods, which is
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION [insert “The Netherlands” where European
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A HERE Data is used] for any and all
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS disputes, claims and actions arising from
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE or in connection with the Data provided to
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some you hereunder.
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or Government End Users. If the Data is
damages limitations, so to that extent the being acquired by or on behalf of the
above may not apply to you. United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
Export Control. You shall not export from those customarily claimed by the United
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct States government, this Data is a
product thereof except in compliance with, “commercial item” as that term is defined
and with all licenses and approvals at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
required under, applicable export laws, accordance with these End-User Terms,
rules and regulations, including but not and each copy of Data delivered or
limited to the laws, rules and regulations otherwise furnished shall be marked and
administered by the Office of Foreign embedded as appropriate with the
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and treated in accordance with such Notice:
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
509
NOTICE OF USE B. Canada Data. The following provi-

sions apply to the Data for Canada,
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ which may include or reflect data from
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE third party licensors (“Third Party
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
60606 Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
these End-User Terms under which this agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data was provided. Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
If the Contracting Officer, federal licensors of such data, including Her
government agency, or any federal official Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
refuses to use the legend provided herein, make no guarantees, representa-
the Contracting Officer, federal tions or warranties respecting such
government agency, or any federal official data, either express or implied,
must notify HERE prior to seeking arising by law or otherwise, including
additional or alternative rights in the Data. but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
I. US/Canada Territory for a particular purpose.
A. United States Data. The End-User b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Terms for any Application containing Party Data licensors, including Her
Data for the United States shall contain Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
the following notices: shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license spective of the nature of the cause
from the United States Postal of the claim, demand or action
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® alleging any loss, injury or damages,
information.” direct or indirect, which may result
“©United States Postal Service® from the use or possession of such
20XX. Prices are not established, Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
controlled or approved by the United revenues or contracts, or any other
States Postal Service®. The following consequential loss of any kind
trademarks and registrations are resulting from any defect in the
owned by the USPS: United States Data.
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
510
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with either express or implied, arising by

each copy of all or any portion of the law or otherwise, including but not
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client limited to, effectiveness, complete-
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the ness, accuracy or fitness for a
following copyright notice on at least particular purpose. The licensors,
one of: (i) the label for the storage including Her Majesty, Canada Post
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging and NRCan, shall not be liable in
for the copy; or (iii) other materials respect of any claim, demand or
packaged with the copy, such as user action, irrespective of the nature of
manuals or end user license agree- the cause of the claim, demand or
ments: “This data includes information action alleging any loss, injury or
taken with permission from Canadian damages, direct or indirect, which
authorities, including © Her Majesty may result from the use or posses-
the Queen in Right of Canada, © sion of the data or the Data. The
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada licensors, including Her Majesty,
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
Department of Natural Resources be liable in any way for loss of
Canada. All rights reserved.” revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
3. End-User Terms: Except as other- resulting from any defect in the data
wise agreed by the parties, in connec- or the Data.
tion with the provision of any portion End User shall indemnify and save
of the Data for the Territory of Canada harmless the licensors, including Her
to End-Users as may be authorized Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
under the Agreement, Client shall and their officers, employees and
provide such End-Users, in a reason- agents from and against any claim,
ably conspicuous manner, with terms demand or action, irrespective of
(set forth with other end user terms the nature of the cause of the claim,
required to be provided under the demand or action, alleging loss,
Agreement, or as otherwise may be costs, expenses, damages or injuries
provided, by Client) which shall include (including injuries resulting in death)
the following provisions on behalf of arising out of the use or possession
the Third Party Data licensors, of the data or the Data.
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
The Data may include or reflect tion to all of the rights and obligations
data of licensors, including Her of the parties under the Agreement.
Majesty the Queen in the Right of To the extent that any of the provi-
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada sions of this Section are inconsistent
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) with, or conflict with, any other provi-
and the Department of Natural sions of the Agreement, the provisions
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such of this Section shall prevail.
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
511
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

II. Mexico. The following provision applies of the Data and/or packaging relating
to the Data for Mexico, which includes thereto shall include the respective Third
certain data from the Instituto Nacional Party Notices set forth below and used
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or included in such copy:
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: Country Notice
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)” Jordan “© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
III. Latin America Territory for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Client or any of its permitted
of the Data and/or packaging relating
sublicensees (if any) fail to
thereto shall include the respective Third
meet such requirement,
Party Notices set forth below and used
HERE shall have the right to
as described below corresponding to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
included in such copy:
Data.
Territory Notice
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL licensing and/or otherwise distributing
ARGENTINO” HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
AUTORIZACION N° IGM- in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
ENERO DE 2011” censees (if any) and End-Users are
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD restricted from using the Jordan Data in
TOPO ®” Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Guade- Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
loupe, Jordan-based customer. For purposes
French of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
Guiana tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
and ations, GIS applications, mobile business
Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto asset management applications, call
nique Nacional de Estadística y center applications, telematics applica-
Mexico Geografía)” tions, public organization Internet
IV. Middle East Territory applications or for providing geocoding
services.
512
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior

V. Europe Territory written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe with respect to Data for the Territory of
1. General Restrictions Applicable to Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
and agrees that in certain countries of Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
the Europe Territory, Client will need Client is restricted from using Data for
to obtain rights directly from third the Territory of France to create paper
party RDS-TMC code providers to maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
receive and use the Traffic Codes in 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
the Data and to deliver to End-Users from using any Data to create, sell or
Transactions in any way derived from distribute paper maps that are the same
or based on such Traffic Codes. For or substantially similar, in terms of data
such countries, HERE shall deliver the content and specific use of color,
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to symbols and scale, to paper maps
Client only after receiving certification published by the European national
from Client of its having obtained such mapping agencies, including without
rights. limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
2. Display of Third Party Rights Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
each Transaction that uses Traffic Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Codes for Belgium, provide the Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
following notice to the End-User: swesen of Austria, and the National
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are Land Survey of Sweden.
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Transports.” Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
license granted to Client relating to a direct action against Client to enforce
making, selling or distributing paper compliance with the OS copyright notice
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or (see Section IV(D) below) and paper
paper-like medium): (a) such license map requirements (see Section IV(B)
with respect to Data for the Territory of above) contained in this Agreement.
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
separate written agreement with the of the Data and/or packaging relating
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and thereto shall include the respective Third
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the Party Notices set forth below and used
OS any and all applicable paper map as described below corresponding to
royalties, and Client’s complying with the Territory (or portion thereof)
the OS copyright notice requirements; included in such copy:
(b) such license for selling or otherwise Country(ies) Notice
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
513
Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich- Spain “Información geográfica

und Vermessungswesen” propiedad del CNIG”
Croatia Sweden “Based upon electronic
Cyprus, data © National Land
Estonia, Survey Sweden.”
Latvia,
Lithuania, Switzerland “Topografische
Moldova, Grundlage: © Bundesamt
Poland, für Landestopographie.
Slovenia E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
and/or acknowledges that HERE has not
Ukraine “© EuroGeographics” received approvals to distribute map
France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD data for the following countries in such
TOPO ®” respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
Germany “Die Grundlagendaten HERE may update such list from time to
wurden mit Genehmigung time. The license rights granted to Client
der zuständigen Behörden under this TL with respect to the Data
entnommen” for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
Great Britain “Contains Ordnance laws and regulations, including, without
Survey data © Crown limitation, any required licenses or
copyright and database approvals to distribute the Application
right 2010 Contains Royal incorporating such Data in such
Mail data © Royal Mail respective countries.
copyright and database
right 2010”
VI. Australia Territory
Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.” A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top- thereto shall include the respective Third
Map Ltd.” Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
included in such copy:
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed Copyright. Based on data provided
al tratto prodotta e fornita under license from PSMA Australia
dalla Regione Toscana.” Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Norway “Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
514
Product incorporates data which is © DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED

20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
addition to the foregoing, the End-User DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
Terms for any Application containing (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
shall contain the following notice: WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
“Product incorporates traffic location OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora- AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
tion Limited and its licensors.” INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
Telematics Disclosure OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH DEVICE.
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, SERVICES
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE GUARANTEE ANY END USER
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
515
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR do not remove any copyright notices that
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, appear and do not modify the Data in any
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS and may not transfer or distribute it in any
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR form, for any purpose, except to the extent
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) permitted by mandatory laws.
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, Restrictions
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE Except where you have been specifically
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR not (a) use this Data with any products,
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING systems, or applications installed or
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY otherwise connected to or in
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN communication with vehicles, capable of
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER real time route guidance, fleet
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL management or similar applications; or (b)
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END with or in communication with any
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND positioning devices or any mobile or
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER wireless-connected electronic or computer
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY devices, including without limitation
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE computers, pagers, and personal digital
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES using this Data if you fail to comply with
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER these terms and conditions.
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE Limited Warranty
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
CARRIER. perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
VII. China Territory period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
Personal Use Only provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
You agree to use this Data together with
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
[insert name of Client Application] for the
support engineers will make commercially
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
for which you were licensed, and not for
issues.
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
516
Customer Remedies FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
resulted from accident, abuse, or WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
misapplication. Any replacement Data will LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
be warranted for the remainder of the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
original warranty period or thirty (30) days, NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
nor any product support services offered EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
by NAV2 are available without proof of exclusions may not be permitted under
purchase from an authorized international applicable law, so to that extent the above
source. exclusion may not apply to you.
No Other Warranty: Export Control
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY You agree not to export to anywhere any
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT part of the Data provided to you or any
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 direct product thereof except in
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR compliance with, and with all licenses and
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM approvals required under, applicable
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, export laws, rules and regulations.
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A IP Protection
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
exclusions may not be permitted under suppliers and are protected by applicable
applicable law, so to that extent the above copyright and other intellectual property
exclusion may not apply to you. law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
Limited Liability: sale.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY Entire Agreement
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR These terms and conditions constitute the
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT entire agreement between NAV2(and its
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY licensors, including their licensors and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE matter hereof, and supersedes in their
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR entirety any and all written or oral
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR agreements previously existing between
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH us with respect to such subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
517
Governing Law. ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote
The above terms and conditions shall be Data only by means of the intended End
governed by the laws of the People’s User functions of this device. This device
Republic of China, without giving effect to may contain content belonging to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
United Nations Convention for Contracts restrictions set forth herein with respect to
for the International Sale of Goods, which Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising content and such content providers shall
from or in connection with the Data be entitled to all of the benefits and
provided to you hereunder shall be protections set forth herein that are
submitted to the Shanghai International available to Gracenote. You agree that you
Economic and Trade Arbitration will use the content from Gracenote
Commission for arbitration. ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote® Copyright the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
CD and music-related data from non-commercial use only. You agree not
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
associated with a music file) to any third
Gracenote. This product and service may
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
practice one or more of the following U.S.
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
pending. Some services supplied under
HEREIN.
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
Gracenote.
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote® End User License Agreement Data, the Gracenote Software, and
(EULA) Gracenote Servers.
This device contains software from Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Emeryville, California 94608 Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
("Gracenote"). Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote become liable for any payment
"Gracenote Software") enables this device to you for any information that you provide,
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
518
including any copyrighted material or IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

music file information. You agree that MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Gracenote may enforce its respective PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
rights, collectively or separately, under this NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
agreement against you, directly in each GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
company's own name. THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
queries for statistical purposes. The
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
queries without knowing anything about
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
who you are. For more information, see the
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy. Taiwan Territory
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM According to the "Technical Specifications
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE for Low Power Radio Frequency
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED Equipment" formulated by the National
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE Communications and Communication
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR Committee of the Executive Yuan: 3.8.2.
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, For the low-power radio frequency
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY equipment that has obtained the
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE verification certificate, the company, firm
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE or user shall not change the frequency,
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY increase the power or change the
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT characteristics and functions of the original
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT design without authorization.
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF The use of low-power radio frequency
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA equipment must not affect flight safety
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT and interfere with legal communications:
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO when the system detects interference,
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER immediately stop using it until there is no
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE interference.
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR The aforementioned legal communication
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE refers to the wireless communication
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE operated in accordance with the provisions
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR of the Telecommunications Management
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE Law. Low-power radio frequency
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT equipment needs to endure the
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY interference of legal communication or
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES industrial, scientific and medical radio
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO wave radiation electrical equipment.
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
519
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS SUNA Products and/or Services are

AND CONDITIONS intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
By activating, using and/or accessing the comprehensive or accurate information on
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or all occasions. On occasions, you may
other content or material provided by experience additional delay as a result of
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
and/or Services), you must accept acknowledge that it is not intended, or
certain terms and conditions. The following suitable, for use in applications where time
is a brief summary of the terms and of arrival or driving directions may impact
conditions that apply to you. To view the the safety of the public or yourself.
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
please consult: while driving
You, and other authorized drivers of the
Website vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon- active, remain at all times responsible for
ditions/ observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
1. Acceptance actively operate SUNA Products and/or
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
you will be deemed to have accepted and stop and it is safe to do so.
agreed to be bound by the terms and 5. Service Continuity and Reception of
conditions fully detailed at: the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavors to
Website provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
ditions/
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
2. Intellectual Property maintenance at times when congestion is
SUNA Products and/or Services are for light. We reserve the right to withdraw
your personal use. You may not record, or SUNA Products and/or Services at any
retransmit the content, nor use the content time.
in association with any other traffic Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
information or route guidance service or reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
device not approved by Intelematics. You RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including 6. Limitation of Liability
copyright) in the data that is used to Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
provide SUNA Products and/or Services. the manufacturer of your device (the
3. Appropriate Use “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
520
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier Tampering with emissions

has been advised of the possibility of such E67028
control systems including
damages. You also acknowledge that related sensors or the Diesel
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
guarantees nor make any warranties that engine power and the illumination of the
relate to the availability, accuracy or service engine soon light.
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is Tampering With a Noise Control
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each System
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA • Removal or rendering inoperative by
Products and/or Services. any person other than for purposes of
7. Please Note maintenance.
Great care has been taken in preparing this • Repair or replacement of any device or
manual. Constant product development element of the design incorporated into
may mean that some information is not a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
entirely up-to-date. The information in this control prior to its sale or delivery to
document is subject to change without the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
notice. use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
EMISSION LAW device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
follows:
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
of the vehicle. The floor covering and absorbers, fender apron barriers,
insulation protect occupants of the underbody noise shields or acoustically
vehicle from the engine and exhaust absorptive material.
system heat and noise. On vehicles with • Tampering or rendering inoperative the
no original equipment floor covering engine speed governor, to allow engine
insulation, do not carry passengers in a speed to exceed manufacturer
manner that permits prolonged skin specifications.
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in If the engine does not start, runs rough,
fire or personal injury. experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. • A plugged or disconnected air inlet
Similar federal or provincial laws may system hose.
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any • A plugged engine air filter element.
vehicle modification without first
• Water in the fuel filter and water
determining applicable laws.
separator.
521
• A clogged fuel filter. Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
• Contaminated fuel. Canadian markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
connections. Manual for all other required
• An open or pinched sensor hose. information and warnings.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. WARRANTY INFORMATION
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions. The following warranties may apply to your
vehicle:
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. • New vehicle limited warranties.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not • Emissions warranties, if applicable.
needed. (Note: Fully-electric vehicles are not
Note: If these checks do not help you eligible for emissions warranties.)
correct the concern, have your vehicle • Other warranties, if applicable.
checked as soon as possible. Detailed warranty information specific to
your vehicle can be found in the Warranty
Noise Emissions Warranty, Guide at www.owner.ford.com.
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance The following California Warranty
Statement, required by California
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation regulations, applies to vehicles certified to
became effective governing the noise California emissions standards and
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb registered in a state that requires California
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating emissions warranty. If applicable,
(GVWR). The preceding statements additional California Emissions Warranties
concerning prohibited tampering acts and can be found in the Warranty Guide at
maintenance, and the noise warranty www.owner.ford.com.
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS OBLIGATIONS
For your particular global region, your The California Air Resources Board and
vehicle may be equipped with features and Ford Motor Company are pleased to
options that are different from the features explain the emission control system
and options that are described in this warranty on your (year) vehicle. In
Owner’s Manual. A market unique California, new motor vehicles must be
supplement may be supplied that designated, built and equipped to meet
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
522
the State's stringent anti-smog standards. OWNER'S WARRANTY

Ford Motor Company must warrant the RESPONSIBILITIES:
emission control system on your vehicle
for the periods of time listed below - As the vehicle owner, you are responsible
provided there has been no abuse, neglect for the performance of the required
or improper maintenance of your vehicle. maintenance listed in your owner's
manual. Ford Motor Company
Your emission control system may include recommends that you retain all receipts
parts such as the carburetor or covering maintenance on your vehicle, but
fuel-injection system, the ignition system, Ford Motor Company cannot deny
catalytic converter and engine computer. warranty solely for the lack of receipts or
Also included may be hoses, belts, for your failure to ensure the performance
connectors and other emission-related of all scheduled maintenance.
assemblies. Where a warrantable condition
exists, Ford Motor Company will repair your - You are responsible for presenting your
vehicle at no cost to you including vehicle to a Ford or Lincoln dealer as soon
diagnosis, parts and labor. as a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable
MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.
COVERAGE: - As the vehicle owner, you should also be
(For 1990 and subsequent model aware that Ford Motor Company may deny
passenger cars, light-duty trucks, and you warranty coverage if your vehicle or a
medium-duty vehicles.) part has failed due to abuse, neglect,
improper maintenance or unapproved
- For 3 years or 50,000 miles (whichever modifications.
occurs first);
If you have any questions regarding your
1) If your vehicle fails a Smog Check warranty rights and responsibilities, you
inspection, all necessary repairs and should contact Ford Customer Service at
adjustments will be made by Ford Motor 1-800-392-3673 or the California Air
Company to ensure that your emission Resource Board at 9528 Telstar Avenue,
control system PERFORMANCE El Monte, CA 91731.
WARRANTY.
2) If any emission-related part on your
vehicle is defective, the part will be
repaired or replaced by Ford Motor
Company. This is your short-term emission
control system DEFECTS WARRANTY.
- For 7 years or 70,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If an emission-related part listed in this
warranty booklet specially noted with
coverage for 7 years or 70,000 miles is
defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your long-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
523
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
WARNING: Do not place objects applicable local legislation and other
or mount equipment on or near the requirements. Installation of some
airbag cover, on the side of the front or aftermarket electronic devices could
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may degrade the performance of vehicle
come into contact with a deploying functions, which use radio frequency signals
airbag. Failure to follow these such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
instructions may increase the risk of pressure monitoring system, push button
personal injury in the event of a crash. start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
WARNING: Keep antenna and Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from equipment in your vehicle, such as, cellular
any electronic modules and airbags. telephones and amateur radio transmitters,
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car
E239120
524
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
525
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum Output Power Watt Antenna Positions

MHz (Peak RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
526
Index
1 Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic

Cancellation.................................................213
12V Battery.....................................................307 Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators........218
12V Battery Precautions..................................307 Adaptive Cruise Control
Battery Management System Limitations.....................................................211
Limitations......................................................308 Adaptive Cruise Control
Changing the 12V Battery...............................308 Precautions..................................................210
How Does the Battery Management Adaptive Cruise Control –
System Work..................................................308 Troubleshooting........................................223
Recycling and Disposing of the 12V Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Battery..............................................................309 Messages.........................................................223
Resetting the Battery Sensor.......................309 Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors...................107
What Is the Battery Management Adjusting the Headlamps.........................310
System..............................................................307 Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
12V Battery – Troubleshooting..............309 Brightness.....................................................101
12V Battery – Information Messages..........310 Adjusting the Map.......................................425
12V Battery – Warning Lamps......................309 Changing the Format of the Map................425
Zooming the Map In and Out........................425
9 Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy......................................................55
911 Assist...........................................................69 Adjusting the Sound Settings.................389
Adjusting the Speed Limit
A Tolerance.....................................................230
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................89
A/C Adjusting the Volume................................388
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Aid Mode.........................................................234
Automatic Temperature Control How Does Aid Mode Work.............................234
(DATC)................................................................119 What Is Aid Mode..............................................234
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Airbag Precautions........................................63
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control Airbags...............................................................60
(EATC)...............................................................124 Front Passenger Sensing System..................64
About This Publication..................................17 Air Conditioning
ABS See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
See: Brakes............................................................181 Automatic Temperature Control
Accessing Apps.............................................421 (DATC)................................................................119
Accessing Navigation.................................425 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Accessing the Passive Key Backup Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
Position.........................................................158 (EATC)...............................................................124
Accessing the Trip Computer....................116 Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Accessories....................................................430 Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™.........376
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................210 Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Adaptive Cruise Control – Specification - 5.0L..................................377
Troubleshooting............................................223 Alert and Aid Mode.....................................234
Lane Centering....................................................218 How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work..........234
Predictive Speed Assist....................................221 What Is Alert and Aid Mode...........................234
Predictive Speed Assist – Alert Mode......................................................233
Troubleshooting............................................223 How Does Alert Mode Work..........................234
What Is Alert Mode............................................233
527
Index
Alexa Built-In..................................................413 Applying the Electric Parking Brake -

Alexa Built-In Requirements....................413 Manual Transmission, Vehicles
Alexa Built-In Settings................................413 Without: EcoBoost™ Performance
Ambient Lighting...........................................101 Package/GT Performance
Switching Ambient Lighting On and Package.........................................................185
Off........................................................................101 App Precautions...........................................421
Anti-Lock Braking System..........................181 App Requirements.......................................421
Anti-Lock Braking System Indicators...........181 Apps...................................................................421
Anti-Lock Braking System Audio System...............................................388
Limitations........................................................181 Audio System – Troubleshooting................394
Anti-Theft Alarm System...........................85 Digital Radio........................................................390
Arming the Anti-Theft Alarm System..........86 FM Radio..............................................................390
Disarming the Anti-Theft Alarm Satellite Radio....................................................392
System................................................................86 Audio System Precautions......................388
How Does the Anti-Theft Alarm System Audio System – Troubleshooting.........394
Work.....................................................................85 Audio System – Information
What Are the Inclination Sensors..................86 Messages.........................................................394
What Are the Interior Sensors.........................85 Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror..................107
What Is the Anti-Theft Alarm System.........85 What Is the Auto-Dimming Exterior
What Is the Perimeter Alarm...........................85 Mirror...................................................................107
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings.........86 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror..................106
Setting the Alarm Security Level...................86 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Switching Ask on Exit On and Off.................86 Limitations.......................................................106
What are the Alarm Security Levels.............86 What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior
What Is Ask on Exit..............................................86 Mirror..................................................................106
Appendices....................................................524 Auto Hold........................................................195
Applying the Electric Parking Brake - Auto Hold Indicators...................................195
Automatic Transmission, Vehicles Autolamps........................................................96
With: EcoBoost™ Performance Autolamp Settings..............................................96
Package/GT Performance What Are Autolamps..........................................96
Package........................................................186 Autolock.............................................................79
Applying the Electric Parking Brake - Autolock Requirements.....................................79
Automatic Transmission, Vehicles What Is Autolock..................................................79
Without: EcoBoost™ Performance Automatically Releasing the Electric
Package/GT Performance Parking Brake..............................................188
Package........................................................186 Automatic Crash Shutoff.........................282
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Automatic Crash Shutoff
Emergency - Vehicles With: Precautions.....................................................282
EcoBoost™ Performance Package/GT Re-Enabling Your Vehicle...............................282
Performance Package.............................187 What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff...............282
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Automatic Emergency Braking...............253
Emergency - Vehicles Without: Switching Automatic Emergency Braking
EcoBoost™ Performance Package/GT On and Off.......................................................254
Performance Package.............................187 What Is Automatic Emergency
Applying the Electric Parking Brake - Braking..............................................................253
Manual Transmission, Vehicles With: Automatic Engine Stop..............................158
EcoBoost™ Performance Package/GT How Does Automatic Engine Stop
Performance Package.............................185 Work...................................................................158
528
Index
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop..............158 Park (P)...................................................................175

Switching Automatic Engine Stop On and Reverse (R)............................................................175
Off.......................................................................158 Automatic Transmission
What Is Automatic Engine Stop...................158 Precautions..................................................175
Automatic High Beam Control.................98 Auto Mode........................................................121
Automatic High Beam Control Auto Mode Indicators.........................................121
Indicators.........................................................100 Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................121
Automatic High Beam Control Switching Dual Mode On and Off.................122
Limitations.........................................................99 Auto-Start-Stop............................................161
Automatic High Beam Control Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting...........163
Precautions.......................................................99 Auto-Start-Stop Indicators......................163
Automatic High Beam Control Auto-Start-Stop Precautions -
Requirements...................................................99 Automatic Transmission..........................161
How Does Automatic High Beam Control Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Manual
Work.....................................................................98 Transmission................................................161
Overriding Automatic High Beam Auto-Start-Stop –
Control..............................................................100 Troubleshooting.........................................163
Switching Automatic High Beam Control Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently Asked
On and Off.......................................................100 Questions.........................................................165
Automatic High Beam Control – Auto-Start-Stop – Information
Troubleshooting........................................100 Messages..........................................................163
Automatic High Beam Control – Autounlock........................................................79
Information Messages................................100 Autounlock Requirements................................79
Automatic Locking Mode............................54 Switching Autounlock On and Off.................79
Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode........54 What Is Autounlock.............................................79
Engaging Automatic Locking Mode..............54 Autowipers........................................................91
What Is Automatic Locking Mode.................54 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Rain
When to Use Automatic Locking Sensor..................................................................92
Mode....................................................................54 Autowipers Settings.............................................91
Automatic Transmission Audible What Are Autowipers..........................................91
Warnings........................................................177 Auxiliary Gauges..........................................408
Automatic Transmission............................175
Automatic Transmission Positions...............175
Brake Shift Interlock..........................................178
B
Manually Shifting Gears....................................177 Blind Spot Assist..........................................235
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Blind Spot Assist Indicators...........................236
and Specification......................................379 Blind Spot Assist Limitations........................236
Automatic Transmission Position How Does Blind Spot Assist Work..............235
Indicators - Vehicles With: Paddle What Is Blind Spot Assist...............................235
Shifters...........................................................177 Blind Spot Information System.............239
Automatic Transmission Position Blind Spot Information System –
Indicators - Vehicles Without: Paddle Troubleshooting.............................................241
Shifters...........................................................176 Blind Spot Information System
Automatic Transmission Positions........175 Indicators.....................................................240
Drive (D).................................................................175 Blind Spot Information System
Low (L)....................................................................176 Limitations..................................................239
Manual (M)...........................................................176 Blind Spot Information System
Neutral (N)............................................................175 Precautions.................................................239
529
Index
Blind Spot Information System Catalytic Converter –

Requirements.............................................239 Troubleshooting..........................................172
Blind Spot Information System – Catalytic Converter – Warning
Troubleshooting.........................................241 Lamps.................................................................172
Blind Spot Information System – Center Console...............................................151
Information Messages.................................241 Locking the Center Console.............................151
Bluetooth®....................................................420 Opening the Center Console...........................151
Body Control Module Fuse Box..............292 Center Display Limitations......................398
Accessing the Body Control Module Fuse Center Display Overview..........................398
Box......................................................................292 Center Display Precautions.....................398
Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control Center Display Settings............................399
Module Fuse Box...........................................292 Changing a Flat Tire....................................357
Locating the Body Control Module Fuse Changing a Road Wheel............................357
Box......................................................................292 Changing the Fuel Filter............................305
Body Styling Kit Precautions...................324 Changing the Language..............................115
Body Styling Kits..........................................324 Changing the Measurement Unit............115
Bonnet Lock Changing the Remote Control
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........296 Battery.............................................................72
Booster Seats..................................................48 Changing the Set Speed Limit................229
Brake Fluid Specification...........................182 Changing the Temperature Unit..............115
Brake Over Accelerator................................181 Changing the Tire Pressure Unit..............115
Brake Precautions.........................................181 Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Brakes................................................................181 Name or Password..................................386
Anti-Lock Braking System................................181 Charging a Device........................................146
Brakes – Troubleshooting...............................183 Charging a Wireless Device......................149
Brake Shift Interlock....................................178 Checking the Brake Fluid...........................182
Brake Shift Interlock Precautions.................178 Checking the Clutch Fluid Level..............174
Using Brake Shift Interlock..............................178 Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid
What Is Brake Shift Interlock..........................178 Level................................................................173
Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................183 Checking the Seatbelts................................57
Brakes – Frequently Asked Checking the Tire Pressures....................339
Questions.........................................................184 Checking the Wiper Blades........................92
Brakes – Information Messages...................183 Children and Airbags....................................64
Brakes – Warning Lamps................................183 Child Restraint Anchor Points....................41
Breaking-In.....................................................275 Locating the Child Restraint Lower Anchor
Points....................................................................41
C Locating the Child Restraint Top Tether
Anchor Points...................................................42
Calculating Payload...................................264 What Are the Child Restraint Anchor
Calculating the Load Limit.......................264 Points....................................................................41
Canceling the Set Speed.........................209 Child Restraints...............................................42
Canceling the Set Speed Limit..............230 Child Restraint Position Information.............42
Capacities and Specifications................363 Child Restraints Recommendation...............43
Catalytic Converter.......................................172 Child Safety......................................................40
Catalytic Converter – Child Restraint Anchor Points..........................41
Troubleshooting..............................................172 Child Restraints.....................................................42
Catalytic Converter Precautions..............172 Installing Child Restraints.................................43
Child Safety Precautions............................40
530
Index
Cleaning Products........................................318 Connected Vehicle –

Cleaning the Exterior...................................319 Troubleshooting........................................384
Cleaning Camera Lenses and Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked
Sensors.............................................................320 Questions........................................................384
Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or Stainless Connecting a Bluetooth® Device..........420
Steel....................................................................319 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear Network........................................................383
Lamps................................................................319 Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........383
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics.........................320 Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........383
Cleaning the Convertible Top........................320 What Is the Modem..........................................383
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions................319 Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Cleaning the Underbody.................................320 Network........................................................383
Cleaning Wheels.................................................319 Connecting Your Phone.............................415
Cleaning Windows and Wiper Blades........319 Contacting Us...................................................15
Cleaning the Interior...................................320 Convertible Top.............................................273
Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats................322 Coolant............................................................302
Cleaning Displays and Screens.....................321 Adding Coolant..................................................302
Cleaning Fabric....................................................321 Changing the Coolant......................................303
Cleaning Leather.................................................321 Checking the Coolant Level...........................302
Cleaning Plastic...................................................321 Coolant – Information Messages................305
Cleaning Seatbelts............................................322 Coolant – Warning Lamps.............................304
Cleaning Storage Compartments................322 Managing the Coolant Temperature.........304
Cleaning the Instrument Panel....................320 Cooling System Capacity and
Cleaning Vinyl......................................................322 Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™..........372
Climate Control..............................................119 Cooling System Capacity and
Auto Mode..............................................................121 Specification - 5.0L..................................373
Climate Control Hints..................................122 Crash and Breakdown Information.......278
Closing the Convertible Top.....................274 Automatic Crash Shutoff................................282
Closing the Rear Luggage Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................283
Compartment............................................269 Jump Starting the Vehicle...............................279
Closing the Rear Luggage Compartment Post-Crash Alert System.................................281
from Outside Your Vehicle........................269 Recovery Towing................................................282
Cluster Theme.............................................409 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........67
Clutch Fluid Capacity and Creating a Personal Profile......................424
Specification................................................174 Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........386
Cold Weather Precautions........................275 Cross Traffic Alert........................................246
Configuring the Trip Computer.................116 Cross Traffic Alert –
Connected Navigation...............................425 Troubleshooting............................................248
Connected Vehicle......................................383 Cross Traffic Alert Indicators....................247
Connected Vehicle – Cross Traffic Alert Limitations................246
Troubleshooting............................................384 Cross Traffic Alert Precautions...............246
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Cross Traffic Alert –
Network............................................................383 Troubleshooting........................................248
Connected Vehicle Data..............................24 Cross Traffic Alert – Information
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............383 Messages.........................................................248
Connected Vehicle Requirements........383 Cross Traffic Braking....................................191
Cross Traffic Braking –
Troubleshooting.............................................192
531
Index
Cross Traffic Braking Indicators..............192 Autounlock..............................................................79

Cross Traffic Braking Precautions...........191 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting............80
Cross Traffic Braking – Mislock......................................................................79
Troubleshooting.........................................192 Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Cross Traffic Braking – Frequently Asked Vehicle.................................................................78
Questions.........................................................193 Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Cross Traffic Braking – Information Vehicle.................................................................78
Messages..........................................................192 Doors and Locks –
Cruise Control...............................................208 Troubleshooting..........................................80
Cruise Control Indicators..........................209 Doors and Locks – Frequently Asked
Cup Holders.....................................................151 Questions............................................................81
Cup Holder Precautions....................................151 Doors and Locks – Information
Custom Drive Mode...................................408 Messages...........................................................80
Customer Information...............................443 Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps..............80
Radio Frequency Certification Drive Belt Routing Overview - 2.3L
Labels...............................................................446 EcoBoost™................................................306
Customizing the Instrument Cluster Drive Belt Routing Overview - 5.0L.......307
Display............................................................114 Drive Mode Control.....................................226
Drive Modes..........................................................227
D Drive Modes....................................................227
Custom...................................................................227
Data Privacy......................................................22 Drag Strip...............................................................227
Department of Transportation Uniform Normal....................................................................227
Tire Quality Grades...................................327 Slippery.................................................................228
Digital Radio..................................................390 Sport.......................................................................228
Digital Radio Indicators....................................391 Track.......................................................................228
Digital Radio Limitations.................................391 Driver Alert.....................................................260
How Does Digital Radio Work........................391 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting......................261
Switching Digital Radio Reception On and Driver Alert Indicators.................................261
Off.......................................................................391 Driver Alert Limitations.............................260
What Is Digital Radio.......................................390 Driver Alert Precautions............................260
Dinghy Tow Driver Alert – Troubleshooting................261
See: Recreationally Towing Your Driver Alert – Information Messages...........261
Vehicle..............................................................286 Driving Economically..................................275
Directing the Flow of Air..............................121 Driving Hints...................................................275
Disposing of Airbags.....................................68 Driving on Snow and Ice............................275
Distance Alert................................................253 Driving Through Shallow Water - Base/
Adjusting the Sensitivity of Distance GT....................................................................276
Alert....................................................................253 Driving Through Shallow Water - Dark
What Is Distance Alert.....................................253 Horse..............................................................276
Distance Indication.....................................252 Drowsiness Monitor
Distance Indication Indicator........................253 See: Driver Alert.................................................260
Switching Distance Indication On and
Off.......................................................................253
What Is Distance Indication...........................252
E
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings.........79 Easy Entry and Exit........................................84
Doors and Locks.............................................78 Electric Parking Brake Audible
Autolock...................................................................79 Warning.........................................................188
532
Index
Electric Parking Brake.................................185 Resetting the Intelligent Oil Life

Electric Parking Brake – Monitor.............................................................300
Troubleshooting.............................................188 Engine Specifications - 2.3L
Electric Parking Brake – EcoBoost™.................................................363
Troubleshooting........................................188 Engine Specifications - 5.0L...................364
Electric Parking Brake – Information Environment.....................................................26
Messages..........................................................189 Evasive Steering Assist..............................254
Electric Parking Brake – Warning Evasive Steering Assist Limitations............254
Lamps................................................................188 Switching Evasive Steering Assist On and
Electric Power Steering............................200 Off.......................................................................254
Electric Power Steering Precautions.........200 What Is Evasive Steering Assist...................254
How Does Electric Power Steering Event Data.........................................................23
Work..................................................................200 Exhaust Mode..............................................409
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............524 Exit Warning...................................................242
Emergency Call Limitations.......................70 Exit Warning - Troubleshooting...................244
Emergency Call Requirements.................69 Exit Warning Indicators..............................243
Emergency Call System Data - Vehicles Exit Warning Limitations...........................242
With: Emergency Assistance..................25 Exit Warning Precautions.........................242
Emergency Towing.....................................286 Exit Warning - Troubleshooting.............244
Emission Law.................................................521 Exit Warning - Information
Enabling Apps on an Android Messages.........................................................244
Device.............................................................421 Export Unique Options..............................522
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device............421 Extending the Remote Start
Enabling or Disabling Personal Duration.........................................................118
Profiles..........................................................423 Exterior Bulbs.................................................312
Enabling Remote Start................................117 Exterior Bulb Specification Chart.................312
End User License Agreement.................496 Exterior Lamps................................................97
Engine Air Filter............................................300 Exterior Lamp Indicators...................................98
Changing the Engine Air Filter......................300 Exterior Lamps On Audible Warning............98
Engine Block Heater....................................155 Switching the Daytime Running Lamps On
Engine Block Heater Precautions.................155 and Off.................................................................97
How Does the Engine Block Heater Switching Welcome Lighting On and
Work...................................................................156 Off.........................................................................98
Using the Engine Block Heater......................156 Using the Turn Signal Lamps...........................97
Engine Coolant Temperature Exterior Lighting Control.............................95
Gauge............................................................109 Exterior Lighting..............................................95
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Autolamps..............................................................96
2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................369 Automatic High Beam Control.......................98
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Automatic High Beam Control –
5.0L................................................................370 Troubleshooting............................................100
Engine Oil.......................................................299 Exterior Lamps......................................................97
Adding Engine Oil..............................................299 Headlamps.............................................................95
Checking the Engine Oil Level......................299 Headlamps – Troubleshooting.......................96
Engine Oil Capacity and Exterior Mirrors...............................................107
Specification..................................................300 Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror........................107
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview........................299
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor.............................300
533
Index
F Front Seats......................................................129
Heated Seats........................................................135
Fail-Safe Cooling.........................................283 Manual Seats.......................................................130
Driving When Fail-Safe Mode Is Power Seats..........................................................132
Activated..........................................................284 Ventilated Seats..................................................135
Fail-Safe Cooling Indicators..........................285 Fuel and Refueling.......................................166
How Does Fail-Safe Cooling Work.............284 Fuel and Refueling –
What Is Fail-Safe Cooling...............................283 Troubleshooting.............................................170
Fastening and Unfastening the Fuel Quality..........................................................166
Seatbelts........................................................52 Refueling................................................................169
Favorite...........................................................399 Running Out of Fuel...........................................167
Federal Highway Administration Fuel and Refueling Precautions.............166
Regulation...................................................495 Fuel and Refueling –
Flat Tire Troubleshooting.........................................170
See: Changing a Flat Tire................................357 Fuel and Refueling – Information
Flat Tow Messages............................................................171
See: Recreationally Towing Your Fuel and Refueling – Warning Lamps........170
Vehicle..............................................................286 Fuel Gauge......................................................109
Floor Mats........................................................277 Fuel Gauge Limitations....................................109
FM Radio........................................................390 Locating the Fuel Filler Door..........................109
FM Radio Limitations.......................................390 What Is Distance to Empty.............................109
Selecting an FM Radio Station....................390 What Is the Fuel Gauge...................................109
Folding the Exterior Mirrors.......................107 What Is the Low Fuel Reminder...................109
Ford Assistant.................................................411 Fuel Quality....................................................166
Ford Assistant – Frequently Asked Selecting the Correct Fuel..............................166
Questions..........................................................411 Fuel Tank Capacity - 2.3L
Ford Assistant Settings.....................................411 EcoBoost™.................................................374
Using Ford Assistant..........................................411 Fuel Tank Capacity - 5.0L.........................375
Ford Protect....................................................431 Fuel Tank Capacity.......................................170
Four Wheels Down Tow Fuse Precautions.........................................287
See: Recreationally Towing Your Fuses.................................................................287
Vehicle..............................................................286 Body Control Module Fuse Box....................292
Front Exterior - Base, Convertible............30 Fuses – Troubleshooting................................295
Front Exterior - Base, Coupe.......................31 High Current Fuse Box.....................................294
Front Exterior - Dark Horse.........................32 Under Hood Fuse Box......................................287
Front Exterior - GT, Convertible.................33 Fuses – Troubleshooting..........................295
Front Exterior - GT, Coupe..........................34 Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions........295
Front Passenger Sensing System............64
Front Passenger Sensing System
Indicators............................................................67
G
Front Passenger Sensing System Garage Door Opener Additional
Precautions.......................................................66 Assistance....................................................145
How Does the Front Passenger Sensing Garage Door Opener...................................142
System Work....................................................64 Garage Door Opener Introduction.........142
What Is the Front Passenger Sensing Garage Door Opener Precautions and
System................................................................64 Frequencies..................................................142
Front Seat Precautions..............................129 General Maintenance Information........433
534
Index
Glasses Holder...............................................152 Horn....................................................................90

Locating the Glasses Holder...........................152 How Does 911 Assist Work..........................69
Global Opening.............................................104 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Switching Global Opening On and Stop and Go Work - Automatic
Off.......................................................................105 Transmission...............................................210
Using Global Opening......................................104 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control Work
What Is Global Opening..................................104 - Manual Transmission............................210
Glossary of Tire Terminology...................333 How Does Auto Hold Work.......................195
Glove Compartment.....................................151 How Does Blind Spot Information
Opening the Glove Compartment.................151 System Work..............................................239
How Does Cross Traffic Alert
H Work..............................................................246
How Does Cross Traffic Braking
Headlamp Adjusting Work................................................................191
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................310 How Does Drive Mode Control
Headlamps.......................................................95 Work...............................................................226
Headlamp Indicators..........................................95 How Does Driver Alert Work...................260
Switching Headlamp Exit Delay On and How Does Easy Entry and Exit
Off.........................................................................95 Work.................................................................84
Using the High Beam Headlamps.................95 How Does Exit Warning Work.................242
Headlamps – Troubleshooting................96 How Does Hill Start Assist Work............194
Headlamps – Frequently Asked How Does Pre-Collision Assist
Questions...........................................................96 Work..............................................................249
Heated Seats..................................................135 How Does Speed Sign Recognition
Heated Seat Precautions.................................135 Work...............................................................257
Switching the Heated Seats On and How Does Stability Control Work..........198
Off........................................................................135 How Does the Intelligent Speed Limiter
Heating Work...............................................................229
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual How Does the Lane Keeping System
Automatic Temperature Control Work...............................................................232
(DATC)................................................................119 How Does the Memory Function
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Work...............................................................140
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control How Does the Personal Safety System
(EATC)...............................................................124 Work.................................................................59
High Current Fuse Box...............................294 How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
Accessing the High Current Fuse Box........294 System Work...............................................138
Identifying the Fuses in the High Current How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work -
Fuse Box...........................................................294 Coupe..............................................................62
Locating the High Current Fuse Box...........294 How Does Traction Control Work...........197
Hill Start Assist..............................................194 How Do Personal Profiles Work.............423
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting..............194 How Do the Front Airbags Work..............60
Hill Start Assist Precautions....................194 How Do the Knee Airbags Work................61
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.......194 How Do the Side Airbags Work................60
Hill Start Assist – Information
Messages..........................................................194
Home Screen................................................399
I
Hood Lock Icon Glossary
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........296 See: Symbols Glossary.......................................19
535
Index
Icons What Is the Interior Lamp Function.............101

See: Symbols Glossary.......................................19 Interior Lighting..............................................101
Identifying Fuse Types...............................295 Ambient Lighting.................................................101
Identifying the Climate Control Interior Lamp Function......................................101
Unit...................................................................119 Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting.............102
Inflating the Tires.........................................339 Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting.......102
Information On Demand Screen...........399 Interior Lighting – Frequently Asked
Information on the Tire Sidewall...........328 Questions.........................................................102
Inspecting the Tire for Damage...............341 Interior Mirror.................................................106
Inspecting the Tire for Wear....................340 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror........................106
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Interior Mirror Precautions........................106
Stems............................................................345 Introduction.......................................................17
Installing Child Restraints...........................43
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower Anchors
for Attaching Child Restraints....................46
J
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Jump Starting the Vehicle........................279
Children...............................................................45 Jump Starting Precautions.............................279
Using Seatbelts.....................................................43 Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................280
Using Tether Straps............................................46 Preparing the Vehicle......................................280
Instrument Cluster Display........................114
Instrument Cluster Indicators....................111
Instrument Cluster......................................108
K
Fuel Gauge............................................................109 Keyless Entry....................................................82
Instrument Cluster Overview..................108 Keyless Entry Limitations............................82
Instrument Cluster Warning Keys and Remote Controls Audible
Lamps............................................................109 Warnings.........................................................75
Instrument Panel...........................................28 Keys and Remote Controls..........................71
Intelligent Speed Limiter Audible Keys and Remote Controls –
Warnings......................................................230 Troubleshooting...............................................77
Intelligent Speed Limiter Remote Rev............................................................76
Indicators.....................................................230 Keys and Remote Controls –
Intelligent Speed Limiter..........................229 Troubleshooting...........................................77
Intelligent Speed Limiter – Keys and Remote Controls – Information
Troubleshooting.............................................231 Messages............................................................77
Precautions.................................................229
Intelligent Speed Limiter –
L
Troubleshooting.........................................231 Lane Centering..............................................218
Intelligent Speed Limiter – Frequently How Does Lane Centering Work...................218
Asked Questions............................................231 Lane Centering Alerts......................................220
Intentionally Exceeding the Set Speed Lane Centering Automatic
Limit...............................................................230 Cancellation...................................................220
Interior Air Quality........................................128 Lane Centering Indicators..............................220
Interior Bulbs..................................................312 Lane Centering Limitations.............................219
Interior Bulb Specification Chart...................312 Lane Centering Manual Cancellation........220
Interior Lamp Function................................101 Lane Centering Precautions...........................218
Switching the Interior Lamp Function On Lane Centering Requirements.......................218
and Off...............................................................101 Switching Lane Centering On and Off........219
536
Index
Lane Keeping System Indicators...........235 Locating the Wireless Accessory

Lane Keeping System.................................232 Charger..........................................................149
Aid Mode...............................................................234 Locating Your Vehicle....................................72
Alert and Aid Mode...........................................234 Luggage Compartment.............................267
Alert Mode............................................................233 Closing the Rear Luggage
Blind Spot Assist................................................235 Compartment................................................269
Lane Keeping System – Luggage Compartment –
Troubleshooting.............................................237 Troubleshooting............................................269
Lane Keeping System Limitations.........232 Opening the Rear Luggage
Lane Keeping System Precautions.......232 Compartment.................................................267
Lane Keeping System Settings...............233 Luggage Compartment
Lane Keeping System – Precautions.................................................267
Troubleshooting.........................................237 Luggage Compartment –
Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked Troubleshooting........................................269
Questions........................................................238 Luggage Compartment – Information
Lane Keeping System – Information Messages.........................................................270
Messages..........................................................237 Luggage Compartment – Warning
Limited Slip Differential.............................180 Lamps...............................................................269
a Device........................................................424
M
a Remote Control.....................................424 Maintenance.................................................296
Live Traffic......................................................425 12V Battery...........................................................307
Switching Live Traffic On and Off...............425 12V Battery – Troubleshooting.....................309
What Is Live Traffic............................................425 Coolant..................................................................302
Load Carrying................................................262 Engine Air Filter..................................................300
Load Carrying Precautions.......................262 Engine Oil.............................................................299
Loading Your Trailer......................................271 Exterior Bulbs.......................................................312
Locating the Blind Spot Information Interior Bulbs........................................................312
System Sensors........................................240 Maintenance Precautions........................296
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir.........182 Making and Receiving a Phone Call.......417
Locating the Cabin Air Filter.....................128 Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Brake - Vehicles With: EcoBoost™
Sensors.........................................................247 Performance Package/GT
Locating the Exit Warning Sensors.......244 Performance Package.............................188
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel.................167 Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Locating the Memory Function Brake - Vehicles Without: EcoBoost™
Buttons.........................................................140 Performance Package/GT
Locating the Power Outlets.....................148 Performance Package.............................187
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Manually Shifting Gears..............................177
Sensors..........................................................251 Shifting Using the Paddle Shifters................177
Locating the Rear View Camera............205 Manual Seats.................................................130
Locating the Safety Compliance Accessing the Rear Seats................................132
Certification Labels..................................263 Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................130
Locating the Tire label................................327 Adjusting the Seat Backrest............................131
Locating the Tire Sealant and Inflator Adjusting the Seat Height................................132
Kit....................................................................347 Folding the Seat Backrest................................137
Locating the USB Ports..............................146 Head Restraint Components.........................130
537
Index
Installing the Head Restraint...........................131 Opening and Closing the Windows -

Moving the Seat Backward and Convertible...................................................103
Forward..............................................................131 Opening and Closing the Windows -
Removing the Head Restraint.........................131 Coupe............................................................104
Unfolding the Seat Backrest...........................137 Opening the Convertible Top...................273
Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Opening the Rear Luggage
Specification................................................174 Compartment............................................267
Manual Transmission..................................173 Opening the Rear Luggage Compartment
Manual Transmission Precautions.........173 from Inside Your Vehicle.............................267
Memory Function.........................................140 Opening the Rear Luggage Compartment
Memory Function Precautions................140 from Outside Your Vehicle........................268
Mislock................................................................79 Opening the Rear Luggage Compartment
Mislock Limitations..............................................79 Using the Remote Control........................268
Switching Mislock On and Off.........................79 Operating the Doors From Inside Your
What Is Mislock.....................................................79 Vehicle.............................................................78
Mobile Communications Opening the Doors From Inside Your
Equipment..................................................495 Vehicle.................................................................79
Mobile Device Data........................................25 Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L Central Locking................................................78
EcoBoost™.................................................367 Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L.............................368 Vehicle.............................................................78
Muting the Audio.........................................389 Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
My Color.........................................................409 Key Blade............................................................78
My Mustang....................................................401 Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Track Apps...........................................................402 Remote Control................................................78
My Mustang Overview................................401 Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Manual.........................................................444
N OTA
See: Software Update Settings....................427
Navigation Map Updates..........................425 See: Vehicle Software Updates....................427
Navigation......................................................425 Overriding Cross Traffic Braking..............192
Adjusting the Map.............................................425 Overriding the Set Speed...........................217
Live Traffic............................................................425 Over the air
Route Guidance.................................................426 See: Software Update Settings....................427
Setting a Destination.......................................425 Over-the-air
Waypoints............................................................426 See: Software Update Settings....................427
Neutral Towing See: Vehicle Software Updates....................427
See: Recreationally Towing Your See: Vehicle Software Updates....................427
Vehicle..............................................................286
Neutral Tow
See: Recreationally Towing Your
P
Vehicle..............................................................286 Parking Aid Indicators................................204
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........436 Parking Aid Precautions............................202
Parking Aids...................................................202
O Parking Aids – Troubleshooting...................204
Rear Parking Aid.................................................203
Opening and Closing the Hood..............296
538
Index
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting............204 Pre-Collision Assist.....................................249

Parking Aids – Information Automatic Emergency Braking.....................253
Messages.........................................................204 Distance Alert......................................................253
Passive Anti-Theft System........................85 Distance Indication...........................................252
How Does the Passive Anti-Theft System Evasive Steering Assist....................................254
Work.....................................................................85 Pre-Collision Assist –
What Is the Passive Anti-Theft Troubleshooting............................................255
System................................................................85 Pre-Collision Assist –
Perchlorate....................................................494 Troubleshooting........................................255
Performing a System Reset.....................429 Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently Asked
Personalized Settings..................................115 Questions........................................................256
Personal Profiles..........................................423 Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Personal Safety System Messages.........................................................255
Components.................................................59 Pre-Collision Assist – Warning
Personal Safety System™..........................59 Lamps...............................................................255
Phone Menu...................................................415 Predictive Speed Assist..............................221
Phone................................................................415 Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance.............222
Phone Precautions......................................415 How Does Predictive Speed Assist
Playing Media Using Bluetooth®..........420 Work....................................................................221
Playing Media Using the USB Port........146 Predictive Speed Assist Alerts......................222
Playing or Pausing the Audio Predictive Speed Assist Indicators..............222
Source..........................................................388 Predictive Speed Assist Limitations...........222
Post-Collision Braking................................281 Predictive Speed Assist Precautions...........221
Post-Crash Alert System...........................281 Switching Predictive Speed Assist Mode
How Does the Post-Crash Alert System On and Off.......................................................222
Work....................................................................281 Predictive Speed Assist –
Post-Crash Alert System Limitations.........281 Troubleshooting........................................223
Switching the Post-Crash Alert System Predictive Speed Assist – Information
Off........................................................................281 Messages.........................................................223
What Is the Post-Crash Alert System.........281 Preparing Your Vehicle for
Power Outlet..................................................148 Storage.........................................................325
Power Outlet Precautions.........................148 Programming the Garage Door
Power Seats....................................................132 Opener...........................................................143
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................133 Programming the Remote Control..........74
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................134 Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................134 Passenger Seats..........................................63
Adjusting the Seat Height...............................134 Protecting the Environment.......................26
Head Restraint Components..........................132 Puncture
Installing the Head Restraint.........................134 See: Changing a Flat Tire................................357
Moving the Seat Backward and Push Button Ignition Switch.....................153
Forward.............................................................134
Removing the Head Restraint........................134
Power-Up
R
See: Software Update Settings....................427 Radio Frequency Certification
See: Vehicle Software Updates....................427 Labels...........................................................446
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations.............250 Antennas..............................................................446
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions...........249 Blind Spot Information System
Sensors............................................................446
539
Index
Body Control Module.......................................452 Zooming the Rear View Camera In and

Cruise Control Module.....................................454 Out.....................................................................206
Garage Door Opener........................................459 Rebooting the Center Display................400
Keys and Remote Controls............................459 Recalling a Preset Position.......................140
Radio Transceiver Module.............................465 Recovery Towing..........................................282
SYNC......................................................................469 Accessing the Front Towing Point...............282
Telematics Control Unit...................................475 Installing the Towing Eye................................282
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Locating the Towing Eye.................................282
Sensors..............................................................477 Recreationally Towing Your
Wireless Accessory Charging Vehicle..........................................................286
Module..............................................................487 Refueling.........................................................169
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Refueling System Overview...........................169
Specification..............................................380 Refueling Your Vehicle......................................169
Rear Axle.........................................................180 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
Rear Cross Traffic Braking the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
See: Cross Traffic Braking.................................191 Charge...........................................................188
Rear Exterior - Base, Convertible..............35 Remote Control Limitations........................71
Rear Exterior - Base, Coupe.......................36 Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Rear Exterior - Dark Horse...........................37 Vehicle.............................................................117
Rear Exterior - GT, Convertible..................38 Remote Rev......................................................76
Rear Exterior - GT, Coupe............................39 Remote Rev Limitations....................................76
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible Using Remote Rev................................................76
Warnings.......................................................139 What is Remote Rev............................................76
Rear Occupant Alert System Remote Start Limitations...........................117
Indicators......................................................139 Remote Start Precautions..........................117
Rear Occupant Alert System Remote Start...................................................117
Limitations...................................................138 Remote Start Settings.................................118
Rear Occupant Alert System Removing the Key Blade..............................72
Precautions..................................................138 Removing Your Vehicle From
Rear Occupant Alert System...................138 Storage.........................................................326
Rear Occupant Alert System Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............322
Settings.........................................................138 Replacement Parts
Rear Parking Aid...........................................203 Recommendation....................................494
Locating the Rear Parking Aid Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Sensors.............................................................203 Control.............................................................74
Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings............203 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................128
Rear Parking Aid Limitations.........................203 Replacing the Front Wiper Blades...........92
What is the Rear Parking Aid.........................203 Reporting Safety Defects in
Rear Seats........................................................137 Canada.........................................................445
Manual Seats........................................................137 Reporting Safety Defects in the United
Rear View Camera Guide Lines..............205 States...........................................................444
Rear View Camera Precautions.............205 Resetting the Trip Computer.....................116
Rear View Camera......................................205 Restarting the Engine - Automatic
Rear View Camera Settings..........................206 Transmission...............................................163
Rear View Camera Settings....................206 Restarting the Engine - Manual
Switching Rear View Camera Delay On and Transmission...............................................162
Off......................................................................206 Resuming the Set Speed - Automatic
Transmission...............................................216
540
Index
Resuming the Set Speed Limit..............230 Security – Information Messages..................87

Resuming the Set Speed - Manual Selecting a Drive Mode..............................226
Transmission...............................................216 Selecting the Audio Source.....................388
Resuming the Set Speed.........................209 Sending and Receiving a Text
Roadside Assistance..................................278 Message........................................................418
Route Guidance...........................................426 Sensitive Locking Mode...............................53
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Volume.............................................................426 Work.....................................................................53
Canceling Route Guidance............................426 What is Sensitive Locking Mode.....................53
Running-In Service Data.....................................................23
See: Breaking-In..................................................275 Setting a Destination.................................425
Running Out of Fuel.....................................167 Setting a Destination Using a Point of
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Interest.............................................................426
Container..........................................................168 Setting a Destination Using a Predictive
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................167 Destination......................................................426
Setting a Destination Using a Recent
S Destination......................................................426
Setting a Destination Using a Saved
Satellite Radio..............................................392 Destination......................................................426
Locating the Satellite Radio Identification Setting a Destination Using the Map
Number.............................................................392 Screen...............................................................426
Satellite Radio Limitations.............................392 Setting a Destination Using the Text Entry
Satellite Radio Settings..................................393 Screen...............................................................425
Selecting a Channel..........................................392 Setting a Memory Preset.........................389
What Is Satellite Radio....................................392 Settings Data...................................................24
Saving a Preset Position............................140 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Scheduled Maintenance...........................433 Gap..................................................................215
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................57 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Seatbelt Precautions.....................................51 Speed - Automatic Transmission........214
Seatbelt Reminder........................................55 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder Speed - Manual Transmission..............213
Work.....................................................................55 Setting the Blower Motor Speed............120
Seatbelt Reminder Audible Warnings..........56 Setting the Clock and Date.....................389
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators.........................55 Setting the Cruise Control Speed.........208
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder On and Setting the Speed Limit............................229
Off.........................................................................56 Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Seatbelts............................................................51 Speed Tolerance.......................................258
Automatic Locking Mode..................................54 Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Seatbelt Reminder...............................................55 Speed Warning..........................................258
Sensitive Locking Mode.....................................53 Setting the Temperature...........................120
Security..............................................................85 Shifting Into Reverse....................................173
Anti-Theft Alarm System.................................85 Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear - Vehicles
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings...............86 With: Paddle Shifters................................176
Passive Anti-Theft System...............................85 Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear - Vehicles
Security – Troubleshooting..............................87 Without: Paddle Shifters.........................176
Security – Troubleshooting........................87 Signing In to Your Account........................413
Security – Frequently Asked Sitting in the Correct Position..................129
Questions...........................................................88 Software Update Indicators....................428
541
Index
Software Update Settings........................427 Starting and Stopping the Engine –

Software Update Warning Lamps..............................................159
See: Software Update Settings....................427 Starting the Engine......................................154
See: Vehicle Software Updates....................427 Restarting the Engine After Stopping
Sounding the Panic Alarm..........................72 It...........................................................................155
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Starting a Gasoline Engine.............................154
Maintenance..............................................439 Status Bar......................................................398
Speed Control Steering..........................................................200
See: Cruise Control...........................................208 Electric Power Steering...................................200
Speedometer................................................108 Steering – Troubleshooting..........................200
Speed Sign Recognition Steering – Troubleshooting....................200
Indicators.....................................................258 Steering – Information Messages................201
Speed Sign Recognition Steering – Warning Indicators......................200
Limitations...................................................257 Steering Wheel................................................27
Speed Sign Recognition Stopping the Engine - Automatic
Precautions.................................................257 Transmission...............................................162
Speed Sign Recognition............................257 Stopping the Engine - Manual
Speed Sign Recognition – Transmission................................................161
Troubleshooting............................................258 Stopping the Engine....................................156
Speed Sign Recognition – Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Troubleshooting........................................258 Moving................................................................157
Speed Sign Recognition – Frequently Asked Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Questions........................................................259 Stationary.........................................................156
Speed Sign Recognition – Information Storage..............................................................151
Messages.........................................................258 Center Console.....................................................151
Stability Control Indicator.........................199 Cup Holders...........................................................151
Stability Control............................................198 Glasses Holder.....................................................152
Stability Control – Troubleshooting............199 Glove Compartment...........................................151
Stability Control – Storing Your Vehicle....................................325
Troubleshooting........................................199 Suspension Specifications......................365
Stability Control – Information Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Messages..........................................................199 and Off - Automatic
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Transmission...............................................213
Precautions..................................................153 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........153 and Off - Manual Transmission............212
Automatic Engine Stop....................................158 Switching Air Conditioning On and
Engine Block Heater..........................................155 Off....................................................................119
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Switching All of the Interior Lamps On
Troubleshooting.............................................159 and Off...........................................................101
Starting the Engine............................................154 Switching Android Auto On and
Stopping the Engine..........................................156 Off...................................................................422
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Switching Apple CarPlay On and
Troubleshooting.........................................159 Off...................................................................422
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Switching Auto Hold On and Off............195
Frequently Asked Questions.....................160 Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Off....................................................................161
Information Messages.................................159 Switching Blind Spot Information
System On and Off..................................239
542
Index
Switching Climate Control On and Switching the Heated Rear Window On

Off....................................................................119 and Off..........................................................120
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
Off..................................................................246 On and Off....................................................90
Switching Cross Traffic Braking On and Switching the Intelligent Speed Limiter
Off...................................................................192 On and Off...................................................229
Switching Cruise Control On and Switching the Lane Keeping System
Off..................................................................208 Mode..............................................................233
Switching Defrost On and Off..................119 Switching the Lane Keeping System On
Switching Driver Alert On and Off........260 and Off..........................................................233
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and Switching Traction Control On and
Off.....................................................................84 Off....................................................................197
Switching Exit Warning On and Symbols Glossary...........................................19
Off..................................................................244 Symbols Used on Your Vehicle..................19
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control System Update
to Cruise Control........................................218 See: Software Update Settings....................427
Switching From Intelligent Speed Limiter See: Vehicle Software Updates....................427
to Speed Limiter.......................................230
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off -
Automatic Transmission........................194
T
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off - Tachometer....................................................108
Manual Transmission..............................194 Technical Specifications
Switching Maximum Cooling On and See: Capacities and Specifications............363
Off...................................................................120 The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Program.......................................................443
Off....................................................................119 The Mediation and Arbitration
Switching Parking Aid On and Off........202 Program.......................................................443
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and Third Party Software Copyright
Off....................................................................251 Acknowledgment.....................................446
Switching Recirculated Air On and Tire Care..........................................................339
Off....................................................................119 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Switching Repeat Mode On and Limitations..................................................354
Off..................................................................389 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Overview......................................................353
Off..................................................................389 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Switching Stability Control On and Precautions.................................................354
Off...................................................................199 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........353
Switching Text Message Notification On Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
and Off..........................................................419 Troubleshooting............................................355
Switching the Audio Unit On and Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Off..................................................................388 Troubleshooting........................................355
Switching the Display On and Off........390 Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On Information Messages................................356
and Off...........................................................101 Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Warning
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Lamps...............................................................355
Off...................................................................279 Tire Replacement Requirements..........334
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Tire Rotation..................................................345
Off...................................................................120
543
Index
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit Using Alexa Built-In.....................................413

Components..............................................348 Using Auto Hold............................................195
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit Using Keyless Entry.......................................82
Precautions.................................................347 Using Snow Chains.....................................336
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit.....................347 Using Summer Tires...................................336
Towing a Trailer Precautions - Base/ Using the Controls on the Steering
GT.....................................................................271 Wheel..............................................................89
Towing a Trailer Precautions - Dark Using the Instrument Cluster Display
Horse...............................................................271 Controls..........................................................114
Towing a Trailer..............................................271 Using the Rear Luggage Compartment
Towing Weights and Dimensions.................272 Emergency Release.................................269
Towing Weights and Dimensions...........272 Using the Remote Control............................71
Recommended Towing Weights..................272 Using the Tire Sealant and Inflator
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions..........286 Kit...................................................................348
Towing Your Vehicle...................................286 Using This Publication..................................18
Track Apps.....................................................402
Acceleration Timer...........................................403
Brake Performance...........................................403
V
Drift Brake.............................................................407 Vehicle Care....................................................318
Launch Control..................................................406 Cleaning the Exterior.........................................319
Line Lock..............................................................404 Cleaning the Interior.........................................320
Manual Lap Timer.............................................403 Vehicle Identification Number................382
Performance Shift Indicator.........................404 Locating the Vehicle Identification
Rev Match............................................................406 Number.............................................................382
Track Apps Overview.......................................402 Vehicle Identification Number
Track Apps Precautions..................................402 Overview..........................................................382
Track Use - Dark Horse...............................315 Vehicle Identification.................................382
Track Use.........................................................313 Vehicle Identification Number......................382
Traction Control Indicator..........................197 Vehicle Interior................................................29
Traction Control.............................................197 Vehicle Software Updates........................427
Traction Control – Troubleshooting.............197 Vehicle System Reset................................429
Traction Control – Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot –
Troubleshooting.........................................197 Troubleshooting........................................387
Traction Control – Warning Lamps..............197 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot – Frequently Asked
Transporting the Vehicle...........................283 Questions.........................................................387
Trip Computer.................................................116 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot...............................386
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot –
U Troubleshooting............................................387
Ventilated Seats............................................135
Under Hood Fuse Box................................287 Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box.........287 Off........................................................................135
Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood Ventilated Seat Precautions...........................135
Fuse Box..........................................................288
Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box............287
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................297
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L..................298
USB Ports........................................................146
544
Index
Ventilation What Is Remote Start...................................117

See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual What Is Speed Sign Recognition............257
Automatic Temperature Control What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................128
(DATC)................................................................119 What Is the Catalytic Converter...............172
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: What Is the Electric Parking Brake.........185
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control What Is the Gross Axle Weight
(EATC)...............................................................124 Rating............................................................263
Viewing the Tire Pressures.......................355 What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Visual Search....................................................27 Rating............................................................263
Voice Interaction............................................411 What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight
Ford Assistant.......................................................411 Rating............................................................263
What Is the Intelligent Speed
W Limiter...........................................................229
What Is the Lane Keeping System........232
Warranty Information.................................522 What Is the Personal Safety
Washer Fluid Specification.......................377 System............................................................59
Washers.............................................................93 What Is the Power Outlet..........................148
Adding Washer Fluid...........................................94 What is the Rear Occupant Alert
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and System...........................................................138
Off.........................................................................93 What Is the Rear View Camera..............205
Using the Windshield Washer.........................93 What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Washer Fluid Specification..............................94 System..........................................................353
Washer Precautions............................................93 What Is the Tire Sealant and Inflator
Washers Kit....................................................................347
See: Wipers and Washers..................................91 What Is the Wireless Accessory
Waxing Your Vehicle...................................323 Charger..........................................................149
Waypoints......................................................426 What Is Traction Control............................197
Adding a Waypoint...........................................426 Wheel and Tire Information.....................327
Editing Waypoints.............................................426 Wheel Nuts.....................................................361
What Are the Instrument Cluster Wi Fi
Indicators........................................................111 See: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
What Are the Instrument Cluster Name or Password......................................386
Warning Lamps..........................................109 See: Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
What Is 911 Assist...........................................69 Network............................................................383
What Is a Connected Vehicle..................383 See: Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.......386
What is Alexa Built-In.................................413 See: Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot............................386
What Is Auto-Start-Stop............................161 Window Bounce-Back...............................105
What Is Blind Spot Information Overriding Window Bounce-Back...............105
System..........................................................239 What Is Window Bounce-Back.....................105
What Is Cross Traffic Alert.......................246 Windows..........................................................103
What Is Cross Traffic Braking....................191 Global Opening...................................................104
What Is Cruise Control..............................208 Window Bounce-Back.....................................105
What Is Drive Mode Control.....................226 Wipers and Washers –
What Is Driver Alert....................................260 Troubleshooting..........................................94
What is Exit Warning..................................242 Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked
What Is Ford Protect...................................431 Questions...........................................................94
What Is Hill Start Assist.............................194 Wipers and Washers – Warning
What Is Pre-Collision Assist....................249 Lamps.................................................................94
545
Index
Wipers and Washers......................................91

Autowipers..............................................................91
Washers...................................................................93
Wipers.......................................................................91
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting..............................................94
Wipers.................................................................91
Switching Windshield Wipers On and
Off..........................................................................91
Wiper Precautions................................................91
Precautions..................................................149
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................149
546

2024 Ford Mustang Owners Manual Version 1 Om EN-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 Ford Mustang Owners Manual Version 1 Om EN-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 Ford Mustang Owners Manual Version 1 Om EN-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 FORD MUSTANG Owner's manual

All rights reserved.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

Contacting Us Child Safety

Symbols Glossary Seatbelts

911 Assist Easy Entry and Exit

Interior Lighting Instrument Cluster Display

Instrument Cluster Climate Control - Vehicles

Manual Transmission Electric Parking Brake

Cross Traffic Braking Stability Control – Troubleshooting ......199

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Setting the Speed Limit ...........................229

Blind Spot Information System Pre-Collision Assist Precautions ..........249

Pre-Collision Assist Load Carrying

What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating Floor Mats .......................................................277

Drive Belt Routing Overview - 2.3L Inflating the Tires ........................................339

Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....367 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot

Track Apps ....................................................402 Switching Android Auto On and Off .....422

Bluetooth® Vehicle System Reset

Special Operating Conditions Scheduled

If you require assistance or clarification on New Zealand

Argentina Middle East

ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION Our digital resources include a

Thank you for choosing Ford. We Illustrations

USING THIS PUBLICATION

SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR Child safety door lock or unlock

Air conditioning system Cruise control

Air conditioning system lubricant Do not open when hot

Anti-lock braking system Electric Parking brake

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine air filter

Brake fluid - non petroleum

Fuel pump reset Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Fuse compartment Note operating instructions

Hazard flashers Panic alarm

Headlamp high beams Parking aid

Heated rear window Passenger airbag activated

Hill descent control Passenger airbag deactivated

Horn control Power steering fluid

Interior luggage compartment Power windows front/rear

Jack Power window lockout

Keep out of reach of children Requires registered technician

Lighting control Safety alert

Low fuel level See Owner's Manual

Low tire pressure warning See Service Manual

Maintain correct fluid level Side airbag

Shield the eyes

Stability control off

E67018 Turn Signal

Windshield defrosting system

Windshield wiping system

Windshield wash and wipe

• Events or errors in essential systems,

SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

A See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 108).

A See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 129).

FRONT EXTERIOR - BASE, CONVERTIBLE

A See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 296).

FRONT EXTERIOR - BASE, COUPE

A See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 296).